Annex II: Reporting on Own Funds and Own Funds Requirements

1
EN
ANNEX II
ANNEX II
REPORTING ON OWN FUNDS AND OWN FUNDS REQUIREMENTS
Table of Contents
PART I: GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS............................................................................. 5
1. STRUCTURE AND CONVENTIONS ........................................................................... 5
1.1. STRUCTURE.................................................................................................. 5
1.2. NUMBERING CONVENTION ................................................................................. 5
1.3. SIGN CONVENTION .......................................................................................... 5
1.4. ABBREVIATIONS............................................................................................. 6
PART II: TEMPLATE RELATED INSTRUCTIONS............................................................ 7
1. CAPITAL ADEQUACY OVERVIEW (CA).................................................................... 7
1.1. GENERAL REMARKS ........................................................................................ 7
1.2. C 01.00 - OWN FUNDS (CA1) ............................................................................ 8
1.2.1. INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC POSITIONS ....................................................... 8
1.3. C 02.00 - OWN FUNDS REQUIREMENTS (CA2)................................................... 22
1.3.1. INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC POSITIONS ..................................................... 22
1.4 C 03.00 - CAPITAL RATIOS AND CAPITAL LEVELS (CA3) .................................... 29
1.4.1. INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC POSITIONS ..................................................... 29
1.5. C 04.00 - MEMORANDUM ITEMS (CA4)............................................................ 32
1.5.1. INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC POSITIONS ..................................................... 32
1.6 TRANSITIONAL PROVISIONS AND GRANDFATHERED INSTRUMENTS: INSTRUMENTS
NOT CONSTITUTING STATE AID (CA 5).......................................................... 48
1.6.1 GENERAL REMARKS ...................................................................................... 48
1.6.2. C 05.01 - TRANSITIONAL PROVISIONS (CA5.1).................................................. 48
1.6.2.1. INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC POSITIONS ..................................................... 49
1.6.3. C 05.02 - GRANDFATHERED INSTRUMENTS:INSTRUMENTS NOT CONSTITUING STATE
AID (CA5.2)............................................................................................... 57
1.6.3.1. INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC POSITIONS ..................................................... 57
2. GROUP SOLVENCY: INFORMATION ON AFFILIATES (GS).................................. 59
2.1. GENERAL REMARKS ...................................................................................... 59
2.2. DETAILED GROUP SOLVENCY INFORMATION ........................................................... 60
2.3. INFORMATION ON THE CONTRIBUTIONS OF INDIVIDUAL ENTITIES TO GROUP SOLVENCY .......... 60
2.4. C 06.01 – GROUP SOLVENCY: INFORMATION ON AFFILIATES – TOTAL (GS TOTAL)... 61

2
2.5. C 06.02 – GROUP SOLVENCY: INFORMATION ON AFFILIATES (GS) ...................... 61
3. CREDIT RISK TEMPLATES................................................................................ 70
3.1. GENERAL REMARKS ...................................................................................... 70
3.1.1. REPORTING OF CRM TECHNIQUES WITH SUBSTITUTION EFFECT .................................... 70
3.1.2. REPORTING OF COUNTERPARTY CREDIT RISK......................................................... 70
3.2. C 07.00 - CREDIT AND COUNTERPARTY CREDIT RISKS AND FREE DELIVERIES: STANDARDISED
APPROACH TO CAPITAL REQUIREMENTS (CR SA) .................................................... 70
3.2.1. GENERAL REMARKS ...................................................................................... 70
3.2.2. SCOPE OF THE CR SA TEMPLATE........................................................................ 71
3.2.3. ASSIGNMENT OF EXPOSURES TO EXPOSURE CLASSES UNDER THE STANDARDISED APPROACH.... 72
3.2.4. CLARIFICATIONS ON THE SCOPE OF SOME SPECIFIC EXPOSURE CLASSES REFERRED TO IN ARTICLE
112 OF CRR ............................................................................................... 77
3.2.4.1. EXPOSURE CLASS “INSTITUTIONS”...................................................................... 77
3.2.4.2. EXPOSURE CLASS “COVERED BONDS”.................................................................. 77
3.2.4.3. EXPOSURE CLASS “COLLECTIVE INVESTMENT UNDERTAKINGS” .................................... 77
3.2.5. INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC POSITIONS ..................................................... 77
3.3. CREDIT AND COUNTERPARTY CREDIT RISKS AND FREE DELIVERIES: IRB APPROACH TO OWN FUNDS
REQUIREMENTS (CR IRB) ............................................................................... 85
3.3.1. SCOPE OF THE CR IRB TEMPLATE ...................................................................... 85
3.3.2. BREAKDOWN OF THE CR IRB TEMPLATE .............................................................. 86
3.3.3. C 08.01 - CREDIT AND COUNTERPARTY CREDIT RISKS AND FREE DELIVERIES: IRB APPROACH TO
CAPITAL REQUIREMENTS (CR IRB 1) .................................................................. 86
3.3.3.1 INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC POSITIONS ..................................................... 86
3.3.4. C 08.02 - CREDIT AND COUNTERPARTY CREDIT RISKS AND FREE DELIVERIES: IRB APPROACH TO
CAPITAL REQUIREMENTS (BREAKDOWN BY OBLIGOR GRADES OR POOLS (CR IRB 2 TEMPLATE). 95
3.4. CREDIT AND COUNTERPARTY CREDIT RISKS AND FREE DELIVERIES: INFORMATION WITH
GEOGRAPHICAL BREAKDOWN............................................................................ 96
3.4.1. C 09.01 – GEOGRAPHICAL BREAKDOWN OF EXPOSURES BY RESIDENCE OF THE OBLIGOR: SA
EXPOSURES (CR GB 1).................................................................................... 96
3.4.1.1. INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC POSITIONS ..................................................... 96
3.4.2. C 09.02 – GEOGRAPHICAL BREAKDOWN OF EXPOSURES BY RESIDENCE OF THE OBLIGOR: IRB
EXPOSURES (CR GB 2).................................................................................... 99
3.4.2.1. INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC POSITIONS ..................................................... 99
3.4.3. C 09.04 – BREAKDOWN OF CREDIT EXPOSURES RELEVANT FOR THE CALCULATION OF THE
COUNTERCYCLICAL BUFFER BY COUNTRY AND INSTITUTION-SPECIFIC COUNTERCYCLICAL BUFFER
RATE (CCB) ............................................................................................. 102
3.4.3.1. GENERAL REMARKS .................................................................................... 102
3.4.3.2. INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC POSITIONS ................................................... 102
3.5. C 10.01 AND C 10.02 – EQUITY EXPOSURES UNDER THE INTERNAL RATINGS BASED APPROACH (CR
EQU IRB 1 AND CR EQU IRB 2) ..................................................................... 106
3.5.1. GENERAL REMARKS .................................................................................... 106
3.5.2. INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC POSITIONS (APPLICABLE TO BOTH CR EQU IRB 1 AND CR
EQU IRB 2) ............................................................................................. 107

3
3.6. C 11.00 – SETTLEMENT/DELIVERY RISK (CR SETT)................................................ 111
3.6.1. GENERAL REMARKS .................................................................................... 111
3.6.2. INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC POSITIONS ................................................... 111
3.7. C 13.01 - CREDIT RISK – SECURITISATIONS (CR SEC).............................................. 114
3.7.1. GENERAL REMARKS .................................................................................... 114
3.7.2. INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC POSITIONS ................................................... 114
3.9. DETAILED INFORMATION ON SECURITISATIONS (SEC DETAILS) ................................. 125
3.9.1. SCOPE OF THE SEC DETAILS TEMPLATE ........................................................... 125
3.9.2 BREAKDOWN OF THE SEC DETAILS TEMPLATE......................................................... 126
3.9.3 C 14.00 – DETAILED INFORMATION ON SECURITISATIONS (SEC DETAILS)........................... 126
3.9.4. C 14.01 – DETAILED INFORMATION ON SECURITISATIONS (SEC DETAILS 2).................... 138
4. OPERATIONAL RISK TEMPLATES...................................................................... 142
4.1 C 16.00 – OPERATIONAL RISK (OPR) ................................................................ 142
4.1.1 GENERAL REMARKS .................................................................................... 142
4.1.2. INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC POSITIONS ................................................... 142
4.2. OPERATIONAL RISK: DETAILED INFORMATION ON LOSSES IN THE LAST YEAR (OPR DETAILS)
............................................................................................................ 146
4.2.1. GENERAL REMARKS .................................................................................... 146
4.2.2. C 17.01: OPERATIONAL RISK LOSSES AND RECOVERIES BY BUSINESS LINES AND EVENT TYPES IN THE
LAST YEAR (OPR DETAILS 1) ........................................................................ 147
4.2.2.1. GENERAL REMARKS .................................................................................... 147
4.2.2.2. INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC POSITIONS ................................................... 147
4.2.3. C 17.02: OPERATIONAL RISK: DETAILED INFORMATION ON THE LARGEST LOSS EVENTS IN THE LAST
YEAR (OPR DETAILS 2)............................................................................... 154
4.2.3.1. GENERAL REMARKS .................................................................................... 154
4.2.3.2. INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC POSITIONS ................................................... 154
5. MARKET RISK TEMPLATES ............................................................................ 156
5.1. C 18.00 – MARKET RISK: STANDARDISED APPROACH FOR POSITION RISKS IN TRADED DEBT
INSTRUMENTS (MKR SA TDI)......................................................................... 156
5.1.1. GENERAL REMARKS .................................................................................... 156
5.1.2. INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC POSITIONS ................................................... 156
5.2. C 19.00 - MARKET RISK: STANDARDISED APPROACH FOR SPECIFIC RISK IN
SECURITISATIONS (MKR SA SEC)............................................................... 159
5.2.1. GENERAL REMARKS .................................................................................... 159
5.2.2. INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC POSITIONS ................................................... 159
5.3. C 20.00 - MARKET RISK: STANDARDISED APPROACH FOR SPECIFIC RISK FOR
POSITIONS ASSIGNED TO THE CORRELATION TRADING PORTFOLIO (MKR SA CTP)
............................................................................................................ 161
5.3.1. GENERAL REMARKS .................................................................................... 161
5.3.2. INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC POSITIONS ................................................... 162

4
5.4. C 21.00 - MARKET RISK: STANDARDISED APPROACH FOR POSITION RISK IN EQUITIES (MKR SA
EQU)..................................................................................................... 164
5.4.1. GENERAL REMARKS .................................................................................... 164
5.4.2. INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC POSITIONS ................................................... 165
5.5. C 22.00 - MARKET RISK: STANDARDISED APPROACHES FOR FOREIGN EXCHANGE RISK (MKR SA
FX) ....................................................................................................... 167
5.5.1. GENERAL REMARKS .................................................................................... 167
5.5.2. INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC POSITIONS ................................................... 167
5.6. C 23.00 - MARKET RISK: STANDARDISED APPROACHES FOR COMMODITIES (MKR SA COM). 170
5.6.1. GENERAL REMARKS .................................................................................... 170
5.6.2. INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC POSITIONS ................................................... 170
5.7. C 24.00 - MARKET RISK INTERNAL MODEL (MKR IM)............................................. 171
5.7.1. GENERAL REMARKS .................................................................................... 171
5.7.2. INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC POSITIONS ................................................... 171
5.8. C 25.00 - CREDIT VALUATION ADJUSTMENT RISK (CVA) ................................. 174
5.8.1. INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC POSITIONS ................................................... 174
6. PRUDENT VALUATION (PRUVAL) ...................................................................... 176
6.1. C 32.01 - PRUDENT VALUATION: FAIR-VALUED ASSETS AND LIABILITIES (PRUVAL 1).......... 176
6.1.1. GENERAL REMARKS .................................................................................... 176
6.1.2. INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC POSITIONS ................................................... 177
6.2. C 32.02 - PRUDENT VALUATION: CORE APPROACH (PRUVAL 2) ................................... 181
6.2.1. GENERAL REMARKS .................................................................................... 181
6.2.2. INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC POSITIONS ................................................... 182
6.3. C 32.03 - PRUDENT VALUATION: MODEL RISK AVA (PRUVAL 3)........................................ 192
6.3.1. GENERAL REMARKS .................................................................................... 192
6.3.2. INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC POSITIONS ................................................... 192
6.4 C 32.04 - PRUDENT VALUATION: CONCENTRATED POSITIONS AVA (PRUVAL 4)........................ 195
6.4.1. GENERAL REMARKS .................................................................................... 195
6.4.2. INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC POSITIONS ................................................... 195
7. C 33.00 - EXPOSURES TO GENERAL GOVERNMENTS (GOV)......................................... 197
7.1. GENERAL REMARKS .................................................................................... 197
7.2. SCOPE OF THE TEMPLATE ON EXPOSURES TO “GENERAL GOVERNMENTS”........................ 197
7.3. INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC POSITIONS ................................................... 198

5
PART I: GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
1. Structure and conventions
1.1. Structure
1. Overall, the framework consists of five blocks of templates:
(a) capital adequacy, an overview of regulatory capital; total risk exposure amount; (b) group solvency, an overview of the fulfilment of the solvency requirements by all individual entities included in the scope of consolidation of the reporting entity (c) credit risk (including counterparty, dilution and settlement risks); (d) market risk (including position risk in trading book, foreign exchange risk, commodities risk and CVA risk); (e) operational risk.
2. For each template legal references are provided. Further detailed information
regarding more general aspects of the reporting of each block of templates, instructions concerning specific positions as well as validation rules are included in this part of the Implementing Technical Standard..
3. Institutions report only those templates that are relevant depending on the approach used for determining own funds requirements.
1.2. Numbering convention
4. The document follows the labelling convention set in the following table, when
referring to the columns, rows and cells of the templates. These numerical codes are extensively used in the validation rules.
5. The following general notation is followed in the instructions: {Template;Row;Column}.
6. In the case of validations inside a template, in which only data points of that
template is used, notations do not refer to a template: {Row;Column}.
7. In the case of templates with only one column, only rows are referred to. {Template;Row}
8. An asterisk sign is used to express that the validation is done for the rows or
columns specified before.
1.3. Sign convention
9. Any amount that increases the own funds or the capital requirements shall be
reported as a positive figure. On the contrary, any amount that reduces the total own

6 funds or the capital requirements shall be reported as a negative figure. Where there is a negative sign (-) preceding the label of an item no positive figure is expected to be reported for that item.
1.4. Abbreviations
9a. For the purposes of this Annex, Regulation (EU) No 575/2013 is referred to as ‘CRR’, and Directive 2013/36/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council is referred to as ‘CRD’.

7
PART II: TEMPLATE RELATED INSTRUCTIONS
1. Capital Adequacy Overview (CA)
1.1. General remarks
10. CA templates contain information about Pillar 1 numerators (own funds, Tier 1,
Common Equity Tier 1), denominator (own funds requirements), and transitional provisions and is structures in five templates:
(a) CA1 template contains the amount of own funds of the institutions, disaggregated in the items needed to get to that amount. The amount of own funds obtained includes the aggregate effect of transitional provisions per type of capital (b) CA2 template summarizes the total risk exposures amounts as defined in Article 92(3) of CRR (c) CA3 template contains the ratios for which CRR state a minimum level, and some other related data (d) CA4 template contains memorandums items needed for calculating items in CA1 as well as information with regard to the CRD capital buffers. (e) CA5 template contains the data needed for calculating the effect of transitional provisions in own funds. CA5 will cease to exist once the transitional provisions will expire.
11. The templates shall apply to all reporting entities, irrespective of the accounting
standards followed, although some items in the numerator are specific for entities applying IAS/IFRS-type valuation rules. Generally, the information in the denominator is linked to the final results reported in the correspondent templates for the calculation of the total risk exposure amount.
12. The total own funds consist of different types of capital: Tier 1 capital (T1),
which is the sum of Common Equity Tier 1 capital (CET1), Additional Tier 1 capital (AT1) as well as Tier 2 capital (T2).
13. Transitional provisions are treated as follows in CA templates:
(a) The items in CA1 are generally gross of transitional adjustments. This means that figures in CA1 items are calculated according to the final provisions (i.e. as if there were no transitional provisions), with the exception of items summarizing the effect of the transitional provisions. For each type of capital (i.e. CET1; AT1 and T2) there are three different items in which all the adjustments due to transitional provisions are included. (b) Transitional provisions may also affect the AT1 and the T2 shortfall (i.e. AT1 or T2 the excess of deduction, regulated in Articles 36(1) point (j) and 56 point (e) of CRR respectively), and thus the items containing these shortfalls may indirectly reflect the effect of transitional provisions.

8
(c) Template CA5 is exclusively used for reporting the transitional provisions.
14. The treatment of Pillar II requirements can be different within the Union (Article
104(2) CRD has to be transposed into national regulation). Only the impact of Pillar II requirements on the solvency ratio or the target ratio shall be included in the solvency reporting of CRR. A detailed reporting of Pillar II requirements is not within the mandate of Article 99 CRR. a) The templates CA1, CA2 or CA5 only contain data on Pillar I issues. b) The template CA3 contains the impact of additional Pillar II-requirements on the solvency ratio on an aggregated basis. One block focuses on the impact of amounts on the ratios, whereas the other block focuses on the ratio itself. Both blocks of ratios do not have any further link to the templates CA1, CA2 or CA5. c) The template CA4 contains one cell regarding additional own funds requirements relating to Pillar II. This cell has no link via validation rules to the capital ratios of the CA3 template and reflects Article 104 (2) CRD which explicitly mentions additional own funds requirements as one possibility for Pillar II decisions.
1.2. C 01.00 - OWN FUNDS (CA1)
1.2.1. Instructions concerning specific positions
Row Legal references and instructions
010 1. Own funds
Articles 4(1)(118) and 72 of CRR
The own funds of an institution shall consist of the sum of its Tier 1 capital and Tier 2 capital. 015 1.1 Tier 1 capital
Article 25 of CRR
The Tier 1 capital is the sum of Common Equity Tier 1 Capital and Additional Tier 1 capital 020 1.1.1 Common Equity Tier 1 capital
Article 50 of CRR
030 1.1.1.1 Capital instruments eligible as CET1 capital Articles 26(1) points (a) and (b), 27 to 30, 36(1) point (f) and 42 of CRR 040 1.1.1.1.1 Paid up capital instruments Articles 26(1) point (a) and 27 to 31 of CRR Capital instruments of mutual, cooperative societies or similar institutions (Articles 27 and 29 of CRR) shall be included. The share premium related to the instruments shall not be included.

9
Capital instruments subscribed by public authorities in emergency situations shall be included if all conditions of Article 31 CRR are fulfilled. 045 1.1.1.1.1* Of which: Capital instruments subscribed by public authorities in emergency situations
Article 31 of CRR
Capital instruments subscribed by public authorities in emergency situations shall be included in CET1 capital if all conditions of Article 31 CRR are fulfilled. 050 1.1.1.1.2* Memorandum item: Capital instruments not eligible
Article 28(1) points (b), (l) and (m) of CRR
Conditions in those points reflect different situations of the capital which are reversible, and thus the amount reported here can be eligible in subsequent periods. The amount to be reported shall not include the share premium related to the instruments 060 1.1.1.1.3 Share premium Articles 4(1)(124), 26(1) point (b) of CRR Share premium has the same meaning as under the applicable accounting standard. The amount to be reported in this item shall be the part related to the "Paid up capital instruments". 070 1.1.1.1.4 (-) Own CET1 instruments Articles 36(1) point (f) and 42 of CRR Own CET1 held by the reporting institution or group at the reporting date. Subject to exceptions in Article 42 of CRR. Holdings on shares included as "Capital instruments not eligible" shall not be reported in this row. The amount to be reported shall include the share premium related to the own shares. Items 1.1.1.1.4 to 1.1.1.1.4.3 do not include actual or contingent obligations to purchase own CET1 instruments. Actual or contingent obligations to purchase own CET1 instruments are reported separately in item 1.1.1.1.5. 080 1.1.1.1.4.1 (-) Direct holdings of CET1 instruments Articles 36(1) point (f) and 42 of CRR Common Equity Tier 1 instruments included in item 1.1.1.1 held by institutions of the consolidated group. The amount to be reported shall include holdings in the trading book calculated on the basis of the net long position, as stated in Article 42 point (a) of CRR. 090 1.1.1.1.4.2 (-) Indirect holdings of CET1 instruments

10
Articles 4(1)(114), 36(1) point (f) and 42 of CRR 091 1.1.1.1.4.3 (-) Synthetic holdings of CET1 instruments Articles 4(1)(126), 36(1) point (f) and 42 of CRR 092 1.1.1.1.5 (-) Actual or contingent obligations to purchase own CET1 instruments Articles 36(1) point (f) and 42 of CRR According to Article 36(1) point (f) of CRR, “own Common Equity Tier 1 instruments that an institution is under an actual or contingent obligation to purchase by virtue of an existing contractual obligation” shall be deducted. 130 1.1.1.2 Retained earnings Articles 26(1) point (c) and 26(2) of CRR Retained earnings includes the previous year retained earnings plus the eligible interim or year-end profits 140 1.1.1.2.1 Previous years retained earnings Articles 4(1)(123) and 26(1) c) of CRR
Article 4(1)(123) of CRR defines retained earnings as "Profit and losses
brought forward as a result of the final application of profit or loss under the applicable accounting framework". 150 1.1.1.2.2 Profit or loss eligible Articles 4(1)(121), 26(2) and 36(1) point (a) of CRR
Article 26(2) of CRR allows including as retained earnings interim or yearend profits, with the prior consent of the competent authorities, if some conditions are met.
On the other hand, losses shall be deducted from CET1, as stated in article 36(1) point a) of CRR. 160 1.1.1.2.2.1 Profit or loss attributable to owners of the parent Articles 26(2) and 36(1) point (a) of CRR The amount to be reported shall be the profit or loss reported in the accounting income statement. 170 1.1.1.2.2.2 (-) Part of interim or year-end profit not eligible
Article 26(2) of CRR
This row shall not present any figure if, for the reference period, the institution has reported losses. This is because the losses shall be completely deducted from CET1. If the institution reports profits, it shall be reported the part which is not eligible according to article 26(2) of CRR (i.e. profits not audited and foreseeable charges or dividends) Note that, in case of profits, the amount to be deduced shall be, at least, the interim dividends.

11
180 1.1.1.3 Accumulated other comprehensive income Articles 4(1)(100) and 26(1) point (d) of CRR The amount to be reported shall be net of any tax charge foreseeable at the moment of the calculation, and prior to the application of prudential filters. The amount to be reported shall be determined in accordance with Article 13(4) of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) No 241/2014. 200 1.1.1.4 Other reserves Articles 4(1)(117) and 26(1) point (e) of CRR Other reserves are defined in CRR as "Reserves within the meaning of the applicable accounting framework that are required to be disclosed under that applicable accounting standard, excluding any amounts already included in accumulated other comprehensive income or retained earnings". The amount to be reported shall be net of any tax charge foreseeable at the moment of the calculation. 210 1.1.1.5 Funds for general banking risk Articles 4(1)(112) and 26(1) point (f) of CRR Funds for general banking risk are defined in article 38 of Directive 86/635/EEC as "Amounts which a credit institution decides to put aside to cover such risks where that is required by the particular risks associated with banking" The amount to be reported shall be net of any tax charge foreseeable at the moment of the calculation. 220 1.1.1.6 Transitional adjustments due to grandfathered CET1 Capital instruments Articles 483(1) to (3), and 484 to 487 of CRR Amount of capital instruments transitionally grandfathered as CET1. The amount to be reported is directly obtained from CA5. 230 1.1.1.7 Minority interest given recognition in CET1 capital
Article 4 (120) and 84 of CRR
Sum of all the amounts of minority interests of subsidiaries that is included in consolidated CET1. 240 1.1.1.8 Transitional adjustments due to additional minority interests Articles 479 and 480 of CRR Adjustments to the minority interests due to transitional provisions. This item is obtained directly from CA5. 250 1.1.1.9 Adjustments to CET1 due to prudential filters Articles 32 to 35 of CRR 260 1.1.1.9.1 (-) Increases in equity resulting from securitised assets
Article 32(1) of CRR

12
The amount to be reported is the increase in the equity of the institution resulting from securitised assets, according to the applicable accounting standard. For example, this item includes the future margin income that results in a gain on sale for the institution, or, for originators, the net gains that arise from the capitalisation of future income from the securitised assets that provide credit enhancement to positions in the securitisation. 270 1.1.1.9.2 Cash flow hedge reserve
Article 33(1) point (a) of CRR
The amount to be reported could either be positive or negative. It shall be positive if cash flow hedges result in a loss (i.e. if it reduces accounting equity) and vice versa. Thus, the sign shall be contrary to the one used in accounting statements. The amount shall be net of any tax charge foreseeable at the moment of the calculation. 280 1.1.1.9.3 Cumulative gains and losses due to changes in own credit risk on fair valued liabilities
Article 33(1) point (b) of CRR
The amount to be reported could either be positive or negative. It shall be positive if there is a loss due to changes in own credit risk (i.e. if it reduces accounting equity) and vice versa. Thus, the sign shall be contrary to the one used in accounting statements. Unaudited profit shall not be included in this item. 285 1.1.1.9.4 Fair value gains and losses arising from the institution´s own credit risk related to derivative liabilities
Article 33(1) point (c) and 33(2) of CRR
The amount to be reported could either be positive or negative. It shall be positive if there is a loss due to changes in own credit risk and vice versa. Thus, the sign shall be contrary to the one used in accounting statements. Unaudited profit shall not be included in this item. 290 1.1.1.9.5 (-) Value adjustments due to the requirements for prudent valuation Articles 34 and 105 of CRR Adjustments to the fair value of exposures included in the trading book or non-trading book due to stricter standards for prudent valuation set in Article 105 of CRR 300 1.1.1.10 (-) Goodwill Articles 4(1)(113), 36(1) point (b) and 37 of CRR 310 1.1.1.10.1 (-) Goodwill accounted for as intangible asset Articles 4(1)(113) and 36(1) point (b) of CRR

13
Goodwill has the same meaning as under the applicable accounting standard.
The amount to be reported here shall be the same that is reported in the balance sheet. 320 1.1.1.10.2 (-) Goodwill included in the valuation of significant investments
Article 37 point (b) and 43 of CRR
330 1.1.1.10.3 Deferred tax liabilities associated to goodwill
Article 37 point (a) of CRR
Amount of deferred tax liabilities that would be extinguished if the goodwill became impaired or was derecognised under the relevant accounting standard 340 1.1.1.11 (-) Other intangible assets Articles 4(1)(115), 36(1) point (b) and 37 point (a) of CRR Other intangible assets are the intangibles assets under the applicable accounting standard, minus the goodwill, also according to the applicable accounting standard. 350 1.1.1.11.1 (-) Other intangible assets before deduction of deferred tax liabilities Articles 4(1)(115) and 36(1) point (b) of CRR Other intangible assets are the intangibles assets under the applicable accounting standard, minus the goodwill, also according to the applicable accounting standard. The amount to be reported here shall correspond to the amount reported in the balance sheet of intangible assets others than goodwill. 360 1.1.1.11.2 Deferred tax liabilities associated to other intangible assets
Article 37 point (a) of CRR
Amount of deferred tax liabilities that would be extinguished if the intangibles assets other than goodwill became impaired or was derecognised under the relevant accounting standard 370 1.1.1.12 (-) Deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability and do not arise from temporary differences net of associated tax liabilities Articles 36(1) point (c) and 38 of CRR 380 1.1.1.13 (-) IRB shortfall of credit risk adjustments to expected losses Articles 36(1) point (d), 40, 158 and 159 of CRR The amount to be reported shall not be reduced by a rise in the level of deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability, or other additional tax effect, that could occur if provisions were to rise to the level of expected losses" (Article 40 of CRR) 390 1.1.1.14 (-)Defined benefit pension fund assets

14
Articles 4(1)(109), 36(1) point (e) and 41 of CRR 400 1.1.1.14.1 (-)Defined benefit pension fund assets Articles 4(1)(109), 36(1) point (e) of CRR Defined benefit pension fund assets are defined as “the assets of a defined pension fund or plan, as applicable, calculated after they have been reduced by the amount of obligations under the same fund or plan” The amount to be reported here shall correspond to the amount reported in the balance sheet (if reported separately). 410 1.1.1.14.2 Deferred tax liabilities associated to defined benefit pension fund assets Articles 4(1)(108) and (109), and 41(1) point (a) of CRR Amount of deferred tax liabilities that would be extinguished if the defined benefit pension fund assets became impaired or were derecognised under the relevant accounting standard. 420 1.1.1.14.3 Defined benefit pension fund assets which the institution has an unrestricted ability to use Articles 4(1)(109) and 41(1) point (b) of CRR This item shall only present any amount if there is a prior consent of the competent authority to reduce the amount of defined benefit pension fund assets to be deducted. The assets included in this row shall receive a risk weight for credit risk requirements. 430 1.1.1.15 (-) Reciprocal cross holdings in CET1 Capital Articles 4(1)(122), 36(1) point (g) and 44 of CRR Holdings in CET1 instruments of financial sector entities (as defined in Article 4(27) of CRR) where there is a reciprocal cross holding that the competent authority considers to have been designed to inflate artificially the own funds of the institution The amount to be reported shall be calculated on the basis of the gross long positions, and shall include Tier 1 own-fund insurance items. 440 1.1.1.16 (-) Excess of deduction from AT1 items over AT1 Capital
Article 36(1) point (j) of CRR
The amount to be reported is directly taken from CA 1 item “Excess of deduction from AT1 items over AT1 Capital. The amount has to be deducted from CET1. 450 1.1.1.17 (-) Qualifying holdings outside the financial sector which can alternatively be subject to a 1.250% risk weight Articles 4(1)(36), 36(1) point (k) (i) and 89 to 91 of CRR Qualifying holdings are defined as “direct or indirect holding in an undertaking which represents 10% or more of the capital or of the voting rights or

15 which makes it possible to exercise a significant influence over the management of that undertaking”. According to Article 36(1) point (k) (i) of CRR they can, alternatively, be deducted from CET1 (using this item), or subject to a risk weight of 1250%. 460 1.1.1.18 (-) Securitisation positions which can alternatively be subject to a 1250% risk weight Articles 244(1) point (b), 245(1) point (b) and 253 (1) of CRR. Securitisation positions, which are subject to a 1250% risk weight, but alternatively are allowed to be deducted from CET1 (Article 36(1) point (k) (ii) of CRR, shall be reported in this item. 470 1.1.1.19 (-) Free deliveries which can alternatively be subject to a 1.250% risk weight Articles 36(1) point k) (iii) and 379(3) of CRR Free deliveries are subject to a 1250% risk weight after 5 days post second contractual payment or delivery leg until the extinction of the transaction, according to the own funds requirements for settlement risk. Alternatively, they are allowed to be deducted from CET1 (Article 36(1) point (k) (iii) of CRR). In the latter case, they shall be reported in this item. 471 1.1.1.20 (-) Positions in a basket for which an institution cannot determine the risk weight under the IRB approach, and can alternatively be subject to a 1.250% risk weight Articles 36(1) point k) (iv) and 153(8) of CRR According to Article 36(1) point (k) (iv) of CRR they can, alternatively, be deducted from CET1 (using this item), or subject to a risk weight of 1250%. 472 1.1.1.21 (-) Equity exposures under an internal models approach which can alternatively be subject to a 1.250% risk weight Articles 36(1) point k) (v) and 155(4) of CRR According to Article 36(1) point (k) (v) of CRR they can, alternatively, be deducted from CET1 (using this item), or subject to a risk weight of 1250%. 480 1.1.1.22 (-) CET1 instruments of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment Articles 4(1)(27), 36(1) point (h); 43 to 46, 49 (2) and (3) and 79 of CRR
Part of holdings by the institution of instruments of financial sector entities
(as defined in Article 4(1)(27) of CRR) where the institution does not have a significant investment that has to be deducted from CET1 See alternatives to deduction when consolidation is applied (article 49 (2) and (3)) 490 1.1.1.23 (-) Deductible deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability and arise from temporary differences Articles 36(1) point (c); 38 and 48(1) point (a) of CRR

16
Part of deferred tax assets that rely in future profitability and arise from temporary differences (net of the part of associated deferred tax liabilities allocated to deferred tax assets that arise from temporary differences, according
to article 38(5) point (b) of CRR) which has to be deducted, applying the 10% threshold in article 48(1) point (a) of CRR. 500 1.1.1.24 (-) CET1 instruments of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment Articles 4(1)(27); 36(1) point (i); 43, 45; 47; 48(1) point (b); 49(1) to (3) and 79 of CRR
Part of holdings by the institution of CET1 instruments of financial sector
entities (as defined in Article 4(1)(27) of CRR) where the institution has a significant investment that has to be deducted, applying the 10% threshold in
Article 48(1) point (b) of CRR.
See alternatives to deduction when consolidation is applied (article 49(1), (2) and (3)). 510 1.1.1.25 (-) Amount exceeding the 17.65% threshold
Article 48(1) of CRR
Part of deferred tax assets that rely in future profitability and arise from temporary differences, and direct, indirect and synthetic holdings by the institution of the CET1 instruments of financial sector entities (as defined in Article
4(1)(27) of CRR) where the institution has a significant investment that has to be deducted, applying the 17.65% threshold in Article 48(1) of CRR. 520 1.1.1.26 Other transitional adjustments to CET1 Capital Articles 469 to 472, 478 and 481 of CRR Adjustments to deductions due to transitional provisions. The amount to be reported is directly obtained from CA5. 524 1.1.1.27 (-) Additional deductions of CET1 Capital due to Article 3 CRR
Article 3 CRR
529 1.1.1.28 CET1 capital elements or deductions - other This row is invented to provide flexibility solely for reporting purposes. It shall only be populated in the rare cases that there is no final decision on the reporting of specific capital items/deductions in the current CA1 template. As a consequence, this row shall only be populated if a CET1 capital element respective a deduction of a CET1 element cannot be assigned to one of the rows 020 to 524. This cell shall not be used to assign capital items/deductions which are not covered by CRR into the calculation of solvency ratios (e.g. an assignment of national capital items / deductions which are outside the scope of CRR). 530 1.1.2 ADDITIONAL TIER 1 CAPITAL
Article 61 of CRR
540 1.1.2.1 Capital instruments eligible as AT1 Capital

17
Articles 51 point (a), 52 to 54, 56 point (a) and 57 of CRR 550 1.1.2.1.1 Paid up capital instruments Articles 51 point (a) and 52 to 54 of CRR The amount to be reported shall not include the share premium related to the instruments 560 1.1.2.1.2 (*) Memorandum item: Capital instruments not eligible
Article 52(1) points (c), (e) and (f) of CRR
Conditions in those points reflect different situations of the capital which are reversible, and thus the amount reported here can be eligible in subsequent periods. The amount to be reported shall not include the share premium related to the instruments 570 1.1.2.1.3 Share premium
Article 51 point (b) of CRR
Share premium has the same meaning as under the applicable accounting standard.
The amount to be reported in this item shall be the part related to the "Paid up capital instruments". 580 1.1.2.1.4 (-) Own AT1 instruments Articles 52(1) point (b), 56 point (a) and 57 of CRR Own AT1 instruments held by the reporting institution or group at the reporting date. Subject to exceptions in article 57 of CRR. Holdings on shares included as "Capital instruments not eligible" shall not be reported in this row. The amount to be reported shall include the share premium related to the own shares. Items 1.1.2.1.4 to 1.1.2.1.4.3 do not include actual or contingent obligations to purchase own CET1 instruments. Actual or contingent obligations to purchase own AT1 instruments are reported separately in item 1.1.2.1.5. 590 1.1.2.1.4.1 (-) Direct holdings of AT1 instruments Articles 4(1)(114) 52 (1) point (b), 56 point (a) and 57 of CRR Additional Tier 1 instruments included in item 1.1.2.1.1 held by institutions of the consolidated group. 620 1.1.2.1.4.2 (-) Indirect holdings of AT1 instruments Articles 52 (1) point (b) (ii), 56 point (a) and 57of CRR 621 1.1.2.1.4.3 (-) Synthetic holdings of AT1 instruments Articles 4(1)(126), 52(1) point (b), 56 point (a) and 57 of CRR

18
622 1.1.2.1.5 (-) Actual or contingent obligations to purchase own AT1 instruments Articles 56 point (a) and 57 of CRR According to Article 56 point (a) of CRR, “own Additional Tier 1 instruments that an institution could be obliged to purchase as a result of existing contractual obligations” shall be deducted. 660 1.1.2.2 Transitional adjustments due to grandfathered AT1 Capital instruments Articles 483(4) and (5), 484 to 487, 489 and 491 of CRR Amount of capital instruments transitionally grandfathered as AT1. The amount to be reported is directly obtained from CA5. 670 1.1.2.3 Instruments issued by subsidiaries that are given recognition in AT1 Capital Articles 83, 85 and 86 of CRR Sum of all the amounts of qualifying T1 capital of subsidiaries that is included in consolidated AT1. Qualifying AT1 capital issued by a special purpose entity (Article 83 of CRR) shall be included. 680 1.1.2.4 Transitional adjustments due to additional recognition in AT1 Capital of instruments issued by subsidiaries
Article 480 of CRR
Adjustments to the qualifying T1 capital included in consolidated AT1 capital due to transitional provisions. This item is obtained directly from CA5. 690 1.1.2.5 (-) Reciprocal cross holdings in AT1 Capital Articles 4(1)(122), 56 point (b) and 58 of CRR Holdings in AT1 instruments of financial sector entities (as defined in Article 4(1)(27) of CRR) where there is a reciprocal cross holding that the competent authority considers to have been designed to inflate artificially the own funds of the institution The amount to be reported shall be calculated on the basis of the gross long positions, and shall include Additional Tier 1 own-fund insurance items. 700 1.1.2.6 (-) AT1 instruments of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment Articles 4(1)(27), 56 point (c); 59, 60 and 79 of CRR
Part of holdings by the institution of instruments of financial sector entities
(as defined in Article 4(1)(27) of CRR) where the institution does not have a significant investment that has to be deducted from AT1 710 1.1.2.7 (-) AT1 instruments of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment Articles 4(1)(27), 56 point (d), 59 and 79 of CRR

19
Holdings by the institution of AT1 instruments of financial sector entities (as defined in Article 4(1)(27) of CRR) where the institution has a significant investment are completely deducted 720 1.1.2.8 (-) Excess of deduction from T2 items over T2 Capital
Article 56 point (e) of CRR
The amount to be reported is directly taken from CA 1 item “Excess of deduction from T2 items over T2 Capital (deducted in AT1). 730 1.1.2.9 Other transitional adjustments to AT1 Capital Articles 474, 475, 478 and 481 of CRR Adjustments due to transitional provisions. The amount to be reported is directly obtained from CA5. 740 1.1.2.10 Excess of deduction from AT1 items over AT1 Capital (deducted in CET1)
Article 36(1) point j) of CRR
Additional Tier 1 cannot be negative, but it is possible that AT1 deductions are greater than AT1 Capital plus related share premium. When this happens, AT1 has to be equal to zero, and the excess of AT1 deductions has to be deducted from CET1. With this item, it is achieved that the sum of items 1.1.2.1 to 1.1.2.12 is never lower than zero. Then, if this item shows a positive figure, item 1.1.1.16 shall be the inverse of that figure. 744 1.1.2.11 (-) Additional deductions of AT1 Capital due to Article 3 CRR
Article 3 CRR
748 1.1.2.12 AT1 capital elements or deductions - other This row is invented to provide flexibility solely for reporting purposes. It shall only be populated in the rare cases that there is no final decision on the reporting of specific capital items/deductions in the current CA1 template. As a consequence, this row shall only be populated if an AT1 capital element respective a deduction of an AT1 element cannot be assigned to one of the rows 530 to 744. This cell shall not be used to assign capital items/deductions which are not covered by CRR into the calculation of solvency ratios (e.g. an assignment of national capital items / deductions which are outside the scope of CRR). 750 1.2 TIER 2 CAPITAL
Article 71 of CRR
760 1.2.1 Capital instruments and subordinated loans eligible as T2 Capital Articles 62 point (a), 63 to 65, 66 point (a), and 67 of CRR 770 1.2.1.1 Paid up capital instruments and subordinated loans Articles 62 point (a), 63 and 65 of CRR

20
The amount to be reported shall not include the share premium related to the instruments 780 1.2.1.2 (*) Memorandum item: Capital instruments and subordinated loans not eligible
Article 63 points (c), (e) and (f); and article 64 of CRR
Conditions in those points reflect different situations of the capital which are reversible, and thus the amount reported here can be eligible in subsequent periods. The amount to be reported shall not include the share premium related to the instruments 790 1.2.1.3 Share premium Articles 62 point (b) and 65 of CRR Share premium has the same meaning as under the applicable accounting standard. The amount to be reported in this item shall be the part related to the "Paid up capital instruments". 800 1.2.1.4 (-) Own T2 instruments
Article 63 point (b) (i), 66 point (a), and 67 of CRR
Own T2 instruments held by the reporting institution or group at the reporting date. Subject to exceptions in article 67 of CRR. Holdings on shares included as "Capital instruments not eligible" shall not be reported in this row. The amount to be reported shall include the share premium related to the own shares. Items 1.2.1.4 to 1.2.1.4.3 do not include actual or contingent obligations to purchase own T2 instruments. Actual or contingent obligations to purchase own T2 instruments are reported separately in item 1.2.1.5. 810 1.2.1.4.1 (-) Direct holdings of T2 instruments Articles 63 point (b), 66 point (a) and 67 of CRR Tier 2 instruments included in item 1.2.1.1 held by institutions of the consolidated group. 840 1.2.1.4.2 (-) Indirect holdings of T2 instruments Articles 4(1)(114), 63 point (b), 66 point (a) and 67 of CRR 841 1.2.1.4.3 (-) Synthetic holdings of T2 instruments Articles 4(1)(126), 63 point (b), 66 point (a) and 67 of CRR 842 1.2.1.5 (-) Actual or contingent obligations to purchase own T2 instruments Articles 66 point (a) and 67 of CRR

21
According to Article 66 point (a) of CRR, “own Tier 2 instruments that an institution could be obliged to purchase as a result of existing contractual obligations” shall be deducted. 880 1.2.2 Transitional adjustments due to grandfathered T2 Capital instruments and subordinated loans Articles 483(6) and (7), 484, 486, 488, 490 and 491 of CRR Amount of capital instruments transitionally grandfathered as T2. The amount to be reported is directly obtained from CA5. 890 1.2.3 Instruments issued by subsidiaries that are given recognition in T2 Capital Articles 83, 87 and 88 of CRR Sum of all the amounts of qualifying own funds of subsidiaries that is included in consolidated T2. Qualifying Tier 2 capital issued by a special purpose entity (Article 83 of CRR) shall be included. 900 1.2.4 Transitional adjustments due to additional recognition in T2 Capital of instruments issued by subsidiaries
Article 480 of CRR
Adjustments to the qualifying own funds included in consolidated T2 capital due to transitional provisions. This item is obtained directly from CA5. 910 1.2.5 IRB Excess of provisions over expected losses eligible
Article 62 point (d) of CRR
For institutions calculating risk-weighted exposure amounts in accordance with IRB approach, this item contains the positive amounts resulting from comparing the provisions and expected losses which are eligible as T2 capital. 920 1.2.6 SA General credit risk adjustments
Article 62 point (c) of CRR
For institutions calculating risk-weighted exposure amounts in accordance with standard approach, this item contains the general credit risk adjustments eligible as T2 capital. 930 1.2.7 (-) Reciprocal cross holdings in T2 Capital Articles 4(1)(122), 66 point (b) and 68 of CRR Holdings in T2 instruments of financial sector entities (as defined in Article 4(1)(27) of CRR) where there is a reciprocal cross holding that the competent authority considers to have been designed to inflate artificially the own funds of the institution. The amount to be reported shall be calculated on the basis of the gross long positions, and shall include Tier 2 and Tier 3 own-fund insurance items. 940 1.2.8 (-) T2 instruments of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment

22
Articles 4(1)(27), 66 point (c), 68 to 70 and 79 of CRR
Part of holdings by the institution of instruments of financial sector entities
(as defined in Article 4(1)(27) of CRR) where the institution does not have a significant investment that has to be deducted from T2. 950 1.2.9 (-) T2 instruments of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment Articles 4(1)(27), 66 point (d), 68, 69 and 79 of CRR Holdings by the institution of T2 instruments of financial sector entities (as defined in Article 4(1)(27) of CRR) where the institution has a significant investment shall be completely deducted. 960 1.2.10 Other transitional adjustments to T2 Capital Articles 476 to 478 and 481 of CRR Adjustments due to transitional provisions. The amount to be reported shall be directly obtained from CA5. 970 1.2.11 Excess of deduction from T2 items over T2 Capital (deducted in AT1)
Article 56 point (e) of CRR
Tier 2 cannot be negative, but it is possible that T2 deductions are greater than T2 Capital plus related share premium. When this happens, T2 shall be equal to zero, and the excess of T2 deductions shall be deducted from AT1. With this item, the sum of items 1.2.1 to 1.2.13 is never lower than zero. If this item shows a positive figure, item 1.1.2.8 shall be the inverse of that figure. 974 1.2.12 (-) Additional deductions of T2 Capital due to Article 3 CRR
Article 3 CRR
978 1.2.13 T2 capital elements or deductions - other This row is invented to provide flexibility solely for reporting purposes. It shall only be populated in the rare cases that there is no final decision on the reporting of specific capital items/deductions in the current CA1 template. As a consequence, this row shall only be populated if a T2 capital element respective a deduction of a T2 element cannot be assigned to one of the rows 750 to 974. This cell shall not be used to assign capital items/deductions which are not covered by CRR into the calculation of solvency ratios (e.g. an assignment of national capital items / deductions which are outside the scope of CRR).
1.3. C 02.00 - OWN FUNDS REQUIREMENTS (CA2)
1.3.1. Instructions concerning specific positions

23
Row Legal references and instructions
010 1. TOTAL RISK EXPOSURE AMOUNT
Articles 92(3), 95, 96 and 98 of CRR
020 1* Of which: Investment firms under Article 95 paragraph 2 and
Article 98 of CRR
For investment firms under Article 95 (2) and Article 98 of CRR 030 1 Of which : Investment firms under Article 96 paragraph 2 and
Article 97 of CRR
For investment firms under Article 96 (2) and Article 97 of CRR 040 1.1 RISK WEIGHTED EXPOSURE AMOUNTS FOR CREDIT, COUNTERPARTY CREDIT AND DILUTION RISKS AND FREE DELIVERIES
Article 92(3) points (a) and (f) of CRR
050 1.1.1 Standardised approach (SA)
CR SA and SEC SA templates at the level of total exposures 051 1.1.1* Of which: Additional stricter prudential requirements based on Art. 124 Institutions shall report the additional risk exposure amounts needed to comply with the stricter prudential requirements as communicated to the institutions after having been consulted with the EBA, in accordance with
Article 124(2) and (5) of CRR.
060 1.1.1.1 SA exposure classes excluding securitisations positions CR SA template at the level of total exposures. The SA exposure classes are those mentioned in Article 112 of CRR excluding securitisation positions. 070 1.1.1.1.01 Central governments or central banks See CR SA template 080 1.1.1.1.02 Regional governments or local authorities See CR SA template 090 1.1.1.1.03 Public sector entities See CR SA template 100 1.1.1.1.04 Multilateral Development Banks See CR SA template 110 1.1.1.1.05 International Organisations See CR SA template 120 1.1.1.1.06 Institutions See CR SA template

24
130 1.1.1.1.07 Corporates
See CR SA template
140 1.1.1.1.08 Retail
See CR SA template
150 1.1.1.1.09 Secured by mortgages on immovable property See CR SA template 160 1.1.1.1.10 Exposures in default See CR SA template 170 1.1.1.1.11 Items associated with particular high risk See CR SA template 180 1.1.1.1.12 Covered bonds See CR SA template 190 1.1.1.1.13 Claims on institutions and corporate with a short-term credit assessment See CR SA template 200 1.1.1.1.14 Collective investments undertakings (CIU) See CR SA template 210 1.1.1.1.15 Equity See CR SA template 211 1.1.1.1.16 Other items See CR SA template 240 1.1.2 Internal ratings based Approach (IRB) 241 1.1.2* Of which: Additional stricter prudential requirements based on Art. 164 Institutions shall report the additional risk exposure amounts needed to comply with the stricter prudential requirements as communicated to the institutions after having been notified to the EBA, in accordance with Article 164(5) and (7) of CRR. 242 1.1.2 Of which: Additional stricter prudential requirements based on Art. 124 Institutions shall report the additional risk exposure amounts needed to comply with the stricter prudential requirements as communicated to the institutions after having been consulted with the EBA, in accordance with
Article 124(2) and (5) of CRR and related to limits on the eligible market
value of the collateral according to Article 125(2)(d) and Article 126(2)(d) of CRR. 250 1.1.2.1 IRB approaches when neither own estimates of LGD nor Conversion Factors are used

25
CR IRB template at the level of total exposures (when own estimates of LGD and/or CCF are not used) 260 1.1.2.1.01 Central governments and central banks See CR IRB template 270 1.1.2.1.02 Institutions See CR IRB template 280 1.1.2.1.03 Corporates - SME See CR IRB template 290 1.1.2.1.04 Corporates – Specialised Lending See CR IRB template 300 1.1.2.1.05 Corporates – Other See CR IRB template 310 1.1.2.2 IRB approaches when own estimates of LGD and/or Conversion Factor are used CR IRB template at the level of total exposures (when own estimates of LGD and/or CCF are used) 320 1.1.2.2.01 Central governments and central banks See CR IRB template 330 1.1.2.2.02 Institutions See CR IRB template 340 1.1.2.2.03 Corporates - SME See CR IRB template 350 1.1.2.2.04 Corporates – Specialised Lending See CR IRB template 360 1.1.2.2.05 Corporates – Other See CR IRB template 370 1.1.2.2.06 Retail – secure by real estate SME See CR IRB template 380 1.1.2.2.07 Retail – secure by real estate non-SME See CR IRB template 390 1.1.2.2.08 Retail – Qualifying revolving See CR IRB template 400 1.1.2.2.09 Retail – Other SME See CR IRB template 410 1.1.2.2.10 Retail – Other non-SME

26
See CR IRB template
420 1.1.2.3 Equity IRB
See CR EQU IRB template
450 1.1.2.5 Other non credit-obligation assets The amount to be reported is the risk weighted exposure amount as calculated according to Article 156 of CRR. 460 1.1.3 Risk exposure amount for contributions to the default fund of a CCP Articles 307 to 309 of CRR 470 1.1.4 Securitisation positions See CR SEC template 490 1.2 TOTAL RISK EXPOSURE AMOUNT FOR SETTLEMENT/DELIVERY Articles 92(3) point (c) (ii) and 92(4) point (b) of CRR 500 1.2.1 Settlement/delivery risk in the non-Trading book See CR SETT template 510 1.2.2 Settlement/delivery risk in the Trading book See CR SETT template 520 1.3 TOTAL RISK EXPOSURE AMOUNT FOR POSITION, FOREIGN EXCHANGE AND COMMODITIES RISKS Articles 92(3) points (b) (i) and (c) (i) and (iii), and 92(4) point (b) of CRR 530 1.3.1 Risk exposure amount for position, foreign exchange and commodities risks under standardised approaches (SA) 540 1.3.1.1 Traded debt instruments MKR SA TDI template at the level of total currencies. 550 1.3.1.2 Equity MKR SA EQU template at the level of total national markets. 555 1.3.1.3 Particular approach for position risk in CIUs Articles 348 (1), 350 (3) c) and 364 (2) a) CRR Total risk exposure amount for positions in CIUs if capital requirements are calculated according to Article 348 (1) CRR either immediately or as a consequence of the cap defined in Article 350 (3) (c) CRR. CRR does not explicitly assign those positions to either the interest rate risk or the equity risk. If the particular approach according to the first sentence of Article 348 (1) of CRR is applied, the amount to be reported is 32% of the net position of the CIU exposure in question, multiplied by 12,5.

27
If the particular approach according to Article 348 (1) sentence 2 of CRR is applied, the amount to be reported is the lower of 32% of the net position of the relevant CIU exposure and the difference between 40% of this net position and the own funds requirements that arise from the foreign exchange risk associated with this CIU exposure, multiplied by 12,5 respectively. 556 1.3.1.3.* Memo item: CIUs exclusively invested in traded debt instruments Total risk exposure amount for positions in CIUs if the CIU is invested exclusively in instruments subject to interest rate risk. 557 1.3.1.3. CIUs invested exclusively in equity instruments or in mixed instruments Total risk exposure amount for positions in CIUs if the CIU is invested either exclusively in instruments subject to equity risk or in mixed instruments or if the constituents of the CIU are unknown. 560 1.3.1.4 Foreign Exchange See MKR SA FX template 570 1.3.1.5 Commodities See MKR SA COM template 580 1.3.2 Risk exposure amount for positions, foreign exchange and commodity risks under internal models (IM) See MKR IM template 590 1.4 TOTAL RISK EXPOSURE AMOUNT FOR OPERATIONAL RISK (OpR)
Article 92(3) point (e) and 92(4) point (b) of CRR
For investment firms under Article 95 (2), Article 96 (2) and Article 98 of CRR this element shall be zero. 600 1.4.1 OpR Basic Indicator approach (BIA) See OPR template 610 1.4.2 OpR Standardised (TSA) / Alternative Standardised (ASA) approaches See OPR template 620 1.4.3 OpR Advanced measurement approaches (AMA) See OPR template 630 1.5 ADDITIONAL RISK EXPOSURE AMOUNT DUE TO FIXED OVERHEADS Articles 95(2), 96(2), 97 and 98(1) point (a) of CRR Only for investment firms under Article 95 (2), Article 96 (2) and Article 98 of CRR. See also Article 97 of CRR

28
Investment firms under Article 96 of CRR shall report the amount referred to in Article 97 multiplied by 12.5. Investment firms under Article 95 of CRR shall report:

If the amount referred to in article 95(2) point (a) of CRR is greater
than the amount referred to in article 95(2) point (b) of CRR, the amount to be reported is zero.
If the amount referred to in article 95(2) point (b) of CRR is greater
than the amount referred to in article 95(2) point (a) of CRR, the amount to be reported is the result of subtracting the latter amount from the former. 640 1.6 TOTAL RISK EXPOSURE AMOUNT FOR CREDIT VALUATION ADJUSTMENT
Article 92(3) point (d) of CRR See CVA template.
650 1.6.1 Advanced method
Own funds requirements for credit valuation adjustment risk according to
Article 383 of CRR. See CVA template.
660 1.6.2 Standardised method
Own funds requirements for credit valuation adjustment risk according to
Article 384 of CRR. See CVA template.
670 1.6.3. Based on OEM
Own funds requirements for credit valuation adjustment risk according to
Article 385 of CRR. See CVA template.
680 1.7 TOTAL RISK EXPOSURE AMOUNT RELATED TO
LARGE EXPOSURES IN THE TRADING BOOK
Articles 92(3) point (b) (ii) and 395 to 401 of CRR 690 1.8 OTHER RISK EXPOSURE AMOUNTS Articles 3, 458 and 459 of CRR and risk exposure amounts which cannot be assigned to one of the items from 1.1 to 1.7. Institutions shall report the amounts needed to comply with the following:
Stricter prudential requirements imposed by the Commission, in accordance with Article 458 and 459 of CRR Additional risk exposure amounts due to Article 3 CRR This item does not have a link to a details template. 710 1.8.2 Of which: Additional stricter prudential requirements based on Art 458
Article 458 of CRR
720 1.8.2* Of which: requirements for large exposures
Article 458 of CRR
730 1.8.2 Of which: due to modified risk weights for targeting asset bubbles in the residential and commercial property

29
Article 458 of CRR
740 1.8.2* Of which: due to intra financial sector exposures
Article 458 of CRR
750 1.8.3 Of which: Additional stricter prudential requirements based on Art 459
Article 459 of CRR
760 1.8.4 Of which: Additional risk exposure amount due to Article 3 CRR
Article 3 CRR
The additional risk exposure amount has to be reported. It shall only include the additional amounts (e.g. if an exposure of 100 has a risk-weight of 20% and the institutions applies a risk weight of 50% based on article 3 CRR, the amount to be reported is 30).
1.4 C 03.00 - CAPITAL RATIOS AND CAPITAL LEVELS (CA3)
1.4.1. Instructions concerning specific positions
Rows
010 1 CET1 Capital ratio
Article 92(2) point (a) of CRR
The CET1 capital ratio is the CET1 capital of the institution expressed as a percentage of the total risk exposure amount. 020 2 Surplus(+)/Deficit(-) of CET1 capital This item shows, in absolute figures, the amount of CET1 capital surplus or deficit relating to the requirement set in Article 92(1) point (a) of CRR (4,5%), i.e. without taking into account the capital buffers and transitional provisions on the ratio. 030 3 T1 Capital ratio
Article 92(2) point (b) of CRR
The T1 capital ratio is the T1 capital of the institution expressed as a percentage of the total risk exposure amount. 040 4 Surplus(+)/Deficit(-) of T1 capital This item shows, in absolute figures, the amount of T1 capital surplus or deficit relating to the requirement set in Article 92(1) point (b) of CRR (6%), i.e. without taking into account the capital buffers and transitional provisions on the ratio. 050 5 Total capital ratio
Article 92(2) point (c) of CRR
The total capital ratio is the own funds of the institution expressed as a percentage of the total risk exposure amount. 060 6 Surplus(+)/Deficit(-) of total capital

30
This item shows, in absolute figures, the amount of own funds surplus or deficit relating to the requirement set in Article 92(1) point (c) of CRR (8%), i.e. without taking into account the capital buffers and transitional provisions on the ratio. 130 13 Total SREP capital requirement (TSCR) ratio The sum of (i) and (ii) as follows:
(i) the total capital ratio (8%) as specified in Article 92(1)(c) of CRR; (ii) the additional own funds requirements (Pillar 2 Requirements – P2R) ratio determined in accordance with the criteria specified in the EBA Guidelines on common procedures and methodologies for the supervisory review and evaluation process and supervisory stress testing (EBA SREP GL). This item shall reflect the total SREP capital requirement (TSCR) ratio as communicated to the institution by the competent authority. The TSCR is defined in Section 1.2 of the EBA SREP GL. If no additional own funds requirements were communicated by the competent authority, then only point (i) should be reported. 140 13* TSCR: to be made up of CET1 capital The sum of (i) and (ii) as follows:
(i) the CET1 capital ratio (4.5%) as per Article 92(1)(a) of CRR; (ii) the part of the P2R ratio, referred to in point (ii) of row 130, which is required by the competent authority to be held in the form of CET1 capital. If no additional own funds requirements, to be held in the form of CET1 capital, were communicated by the competent authority, then only point (i) should be reported. 150 13 TSCR: to be made up of Tier 1 capital The sum of (i) and (ii) as follows:
(i) the Tier 1 capital ratio (6%) as per Article 92(1)(b) of CRR; (ii) the part of P2R ratio, referred to in point (ii) of row 130, which is required by the competent authority to be held in the form of Tier 1 capital. If no additional own funds requirements, to be held in the form of Tier 1 capital, were communicated by the competent authority, then only point (i) should be reported. 160 14 Overall capital requirement (OCR) ratio The sum of (i) and (ii) as follows:
(i) the TSCR ratio referred to in row 130;
(ii) to the extent it is legally applicable, the combined buffer requirement ratio referred to in Article 128 point (6) of CRD. This item shall reflect the Overall capital requirement (OCR) ratio as defined in
Section 1.2 of the EBA SREP GL.
If no buffer requirement is applicable, only point (i) shall be reported.

31
170 14* OCR: to be made up of CET1 capital
The sum of (i) and (ii) as follows:
(i) the TSCR ratio to be made up of CET1 capital referred to in row 140; (ii) to the extent it is legally applicable, the combined buffer requirement ratio referred to in Article 128 point (6) of CRD. If no buffer requirement is applicable, only point (i) shall be reported. 180 14 OCR: to be made up of Tier 1 capital The sum of (i) and (ii) as follows:
(i) the TSCR ratio to be made up of Tier 1 capital referred to in row 150; (ii) to the extent it is legally applicable, the combined buffer requirement ratio referred to in Article 128 point (6) of CRD. If no buffer requirement is applicable, only point (i) shall be reported. 190 15 Overall capital requirement (OCR) and Pillar 2 Guidance (P2G) ratio The sum of (i) and (ii) as follows:
(i) the OCR ratio referred to in row 160;
(ii) where applicable, the Pillar 2 Guidance (P2G) as defined in the EBA SREP GL. P2G shall be included only if communicated to the institution by the competent authority. If no P2G is communicated by the competent authority, then only point (i) should be reported. 200 15* OCR and P2G: to be made up of CET1 capital The sum of (i) and (ii) as follows:
(i) the OCR ratio to be made up of CET1 capital referred to in row 170; (ii) where applicable, the part of P2G, referred to in point (ii) in row 190, which is required by the competent authority to be held in the form of CET1 capital. P2G shall be included only if communicated to the institution by the competent authority. If no P2G is communicated by the competent authority, then only point (i) should be reported. 210 15 OCR and P2G: to be made up of Tier 1 capital The sum of (i) and (ii) as follows:
(i) the OCR ratio to be made up of Tier 1 capital referred to in row 180; (ii) where applicable, the part of P2G, referred to in point (ii) in row 190, which is required by the competent authority to be held in the form of Tier 1 capital. P2G shall be included only if communicated to the institution by the competent authority. If no P2G is communicated by the competent authority, then only point (i) should be reported.

32
1.5. C 04.00 - MEMORANDUM ITEMS (CA4)
1.5.1. Instructions concerning specific positions
Rows
010 1. Total deferred tax assets
The amount reported in this item shall be equal to the amount reported in the latest verified/audited accounting balance sheet. 020 1.1 Deferred tax assets that do not rely on future profitability
Article 39 (2) of CRR
Deferred tax assets that do not rely on future profitability, and thus are subject to the application of a risk weight. 030 1.2 Deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability and do not arise from temporary differences Articles 36(1) point (c) and 38 of CRR Deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability, but do not arise from temporary differences, and thus are not subject to any threshold (i.e. are completely deducted from CET1). 040 1.3 Deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability and arise from temporary differences Articles 36(1) point (c); 38 and 48(1) point (a) of CRR Deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability and arise from temporary differences, and thus, their deduction from CET1 is subject to 10% and 17.65% thresholds in Article 48 of CRR. 050 2 Total deferred tax liabilities The amount reported in this item shall be equal to the amount reported in the latest verified/audited accounting balance sheet. 060 2.1 Deferred tax liabilities non deductible from deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability
Article 38(3) and (4) of CRR
Deferred tax liabilities for which conditions in Article 38(3) and (4) of CRR are not met. Hence, this item shall include the deferred tax liabilities that reduce the amount of goodwill, other intangible assets or defined benefit pension fund assets required to be deducted, which are reported, respectively, in CA1 items 1.1.1.10.3, 1.1.1.11.2 and 1.1.1.14.2. 070 2.2 Deferred tax liabilities deductible from deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability
Article 38 of CRR

33
080 2.2.1 Deductible deferred tax liabilities associated with deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability and do not arise from temporary differences
Article 38 (3), (4) and (5) of CRR
Deferred tax liabilities which may reduce the amount of deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability, according to Article 38(3) and (4) of CRR, and are not allocated to deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability and arise from temporary differences, according to Article 38(5) of CRR 090 2.2.2 Deductible deferred tax liabilities associated with deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability and arise from temporary differences
Article 38 (3), (4) and (5) of CRR
Deferred tax liabilities which may reduce the amount of deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability, according to Article 38(3) and (4) of CRR, and are allocated to deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability and arise from temporary differences, according to Article 38(5) of CRR 093 2A Tax overpayments and tax loss carry backs
Article 39 (1) CRR
The amount of tax overpayments and tax loss carry backs which is not deducted from own funds in accordance with Article 39 (1) CRR; the amount reported shall be the amount before the application of risk weights. 096 2B Deferred Tax Assets subject to a risk weight of 250%
Article 48 (4) CRR
The amount of deferred tax assets that are dependent on future profitability and arise from temporary differences that are not deducted pursuant to Article 48(1) CRR, but subject to a risk weight of 250% in accordance with Article 48(4) CRR, taking into account the effect of Article 470 CRR. The amount reported shall be the amount of DTAs before the application of the risk weight. 097 2C Deferred Tax Assets subject to a risk weight of 0%
Article 469 (1) lit. d, 470, 472 (5) and 478 CRR
The amount of deferred tax assets that are dependent on future profitability and arise from temporary differences that are not deducted pursuant to Articles 469 (1) lit. d and 470 CRR, but subject to a risk weight of 0% in accordance with Article 472 (5) CRR. The amount reported shall be the amount of DTAs before the application of the risk weight. 100 3. IRB excess (+) or shortfall (-) of credit risk adjustments, additional value adjustments and other own funds reductions to expected losses for non defaulted exposures

34
Articles 36(1) point (d), 62 point (d), 158 and 159 of CRR This item shall only be reported by IRB institutions. 110 3.1 Total credit risk adjustments, additional value adjustments and other own funds reductions eligible for inclusion in the calculation of the expected loss amount
Article 159 of CRR
This item shall only be reported by IRB institutions.
120 3.1.1 General credit risk adjustments
Article 159 of CRR
This item shall only be reported by IRB institutions.
130 3.1.2 Specific credit risk adjustments
Article 159 of CRR
This item shall only be reported by IRB institutions.
131 3.1.3 Additional value adjustments and other own funds reductions Articles 34, 110 and 159 of CRR This item shall only be reported by IRB institutions. 140 3.2 Total expected losses eligible Articles 158(5), (6) and (10), and 159 of CRR This item shall only be reported by IRB institutions. Only the expected loss related to non-defaulted exposures shall be reported. 145 4 IRB excess (+) or shortfall (-) of specific credit risk adjustments to expected losses for defaulted exposures Articles 36(1) point (d), 62 point (d), 158 and 159 of CRR This item shall only be reported by IRB institutions. 150 4.1 Specific credit risk adjustments and positions treated similarily
Article 159 of CRR
This item shall only be reported by IRB institutions.
155 4.2 Total expected losses eligible
Articles 158(5), (6) and (10), and 159 of CRR
This item shall only be reported by IRB institutions. Only the expected loss related to defaulted exposures shall be reported. 160 5 Risk weighted exposure amounts for calculating the cap to the excess of provision eligible as T2
Article 62 point (d) of CRR
For IRB institutions, according to Article 62 point (d) of CRR, the excess amount of provisions (to expected losses) eligible for inclusion in

35
Tier 2 capital is capped at 0.6% of risk-weighted exposure amounts calculated with the IRB approach. The amount to be reported in this item is the risk weighted exposure amounts (i.e. not multiplied by 0.6%) which is the base for calculating the cap. 170 6 Total gross provisions eligible for inclusion in T2 capital
Article 62 point (c) of CRR
This item includes the general credit risk adjustments that are eligible for inclusion in T2 capital, before cap. The amount to be reported shall be gross of tax effects. 180 7 Risk weighted exposure amounts for calculating the cap to the provision eligible as T2
Article 62 point (c) of CRR
According to Article 62 point (c) of CRR, the credit risk adjustments eligible for inclusion in Tier 2 capital is capped at 1.25% of riskweighted exposure amounts. The amount to be reported in this item is the risk weighted exposure amounts (i.e. not multiplied by 1.25%) which is the base for calculating the cap. 190 8 Threshold non deductible of holdings in financial sector entities where an institution does not have a significant investment
Article 46(1) point (a) of CRR
This item contains the threshold up to which holdings in a financial sector entity where an institution does not have a significant investment are not deducted. The amount results from adding up all items which are the base of the threshold and multiplying the sum thus obtained by 10%.. 200 9 10% CET1 threshold
Article 48(1) points (a) and (b) of CRR
This item contains the 10% threshold for holdings in financial sector entities where an institution has a significant investment, and for deferred tax assets that are dependent on future profitability and arise from temporary differences. The amount results from adding up all items which are the base of the threshold and multiplying the sum thus obtained by 10%. 210 10 17.65% CET1 threshold
Article 48(1) of CRR
This item contains the 17.65% threshold for holdings in financial sector entities where an institution has a significant investment, and for deferred tax assets that are dependent on future profitability and arise from temporary differences, to be applied after the 10% threshold.

36
The threshold is calculated so that the amount of the two items that is recognised must not exceed 15% of the final Common Equity Tier 1 capital, i.e. the CET1 capital calculated after all deductions, not including any adjustment due to transitional provisions. 225 11.1 Eligible capital for the purposes of qualifying holdings outside the financial sector
Article 4(1)(71)(a)
226 11.2 Eligible capital for the purposes of large exposures
Article 4(1)(71)(b)
230 12 Holdings of CET1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment, net of short positions Articles 44 to 46 and 49 of CRR 240 12.1 Direct holdings of CET1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment Articles 44, 45, 46 and 49 of CRR 250 12.1.1 Gross direct holdings of CET1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment Articles 44, 46 and 49 of CRR Direct holdings of CET1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment, excluding:
a) Underwriting positions held for 5 working days or fewer; b) The amounts relating to the investments for which any alternative in article 49 is applied; and c) Holdings which are treated as reciprocal cross holdings according to article 36(1) point (g) of CRR 260 12.1.2 (-) Permitted offsetting short positions in relation to the direct gross holdings included above
Article 45 of CRR
Article 45 of CRR allows offsetting short positions in the same underlying exposure provided the maturity of the short position matches the
maturity of the long position or has a residual maturity of at least one year.
270 12.2 Indirect holdings of CET1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment Articles 4(1)(114), 44 and 45 of CRR 280 12.2.1 Gross indirect holdings of CET1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment Articles 4(1)(114), 44 and 45 of CRR

37
The amount to be reported is the indirect holdings in the trading book of the capital instruments of financial sector entities that take the form of holdings of index securities. It is obtained by calculating the underlying exposure to the capital instruments of the financial sector entities in the indices. Holdings which are treated as reciprocal cross holdings according to article 36(1) point (g) of CRR shall not be included 290 12.2.2 (-) Permitted offsetting short positions in relation to the indirect gross holdings included above Articles 4(1)(114) and 45 of CRR
Article 45 point (a) of CRR allows offsetting short positions in the same
underlying exposure provided the maturity of the short position matches the maturity of the long position or has a residual maturity of at least one year. 291 12.3.1 Synthetic holdings of CET1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment Articles 4(1)(126), 44 and 45 of CRR 292 12.3.2 Gross synthetic holdings of CET1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment Articles 4(1)(126), 44 and 45 of CRR 293 12.3.3 (-) Permitted offsetting short positions in relation to the synthetic gross holdings included above Articles 4(1)(126) and 45 of CRR 300 13 Holdings of AT1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment, net of short positions Articles 58 to 60 of CRR 310 13.1 Direct holdings of AT1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment Articles 58, 59 and 60(2) of CRR 320 13.1.1 Gross direct holdings of AT1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment Articles 58 and 60(2) of CRR Direct holdings of AT1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment, excluding:
a) Underwriting positions held for 5 working days or fewer; and b) Holdings which are treated as reciprocal cross holdings according to article 56 point (b) of CRR 330 13.1.2 (-) Permitted offsetting short positions in relation to the direct gross holdings included above

38
Article 59 of CRR
Article 59 point (a) of CRR allows offsetting short positions in the same
underlying exposure provided the maturity of the short position matches the maturity of the long position or has a residual maturity of at least one year. 340 13.2 Indirect holdings of AT1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment Articles 4(1)(114), 58 and 59 of CRR 350 13.2.1 Gross indirect holdings of AT1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment Articles 4(1)(114), 58 and 59 of CRR The amount to be reported is the indirect holdings in the trading book of the capital instruments of financial sector entities that take the form of holdings of index securities. It is obtained by calculating the underlying exposure to the capital instruments of the financial sector entities in the indices. Holdings which are treated as reciprocal cross holdings according to article 56 point (b) of CRR shall not be included 360 13.2.2 (-) Permitted offsetting short positions in relation to the indirect gross holdings included above Articles 4(1)(114) and 59 of CRR
Article 59 (a) of CRR allows offsetting short positions in the same underlying exposure provided the maturity of the short position matches
the maturity of the long position or has a residual maturity of at least one year. 361 13.3 Synthetic holdings of AT1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment Articles 4(1)(126), 58 and 59 of CRR 362 13.3.1 Gross synthetic holdings of AT1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment Articles 4(1)(126), 58 and 59 of CRR 363 13.3.2 (-) Permitted offsetting short positions in relation to the synthetic gross holdings included above Articles 4(1)(126) and 59 of CRR 370 14. Holdings of T2 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment, net of short positions Articles 68 to 70 of CRR 380 14.1 Direct holdings of T2 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment Articles 68, 69 and 70(2) of CRR

39
390 14.1.1 Gross direct holdings of T2 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment Articles 68 and 70(2) of CRR Direct holdings of T2 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment, excluding:
a) Underwriting positions held for 5 working days or fewer; and b) Holdings which are treated as reciprocal cross holdings according to article 66 point (b) of CRR 400 14.1.2 (-) Permitted offsetting short positions in relation to the direct gross holdings included above
Article 69 of CRR
Article 69 point (a) of CRR allows offsetting short positions in the same
underlying exposure provided the maturity of the short position matches the maturity of the long position or has a residual maturity of at least one year. 410 14.2 Indirect holdings of T2 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment
Article 4(1)(114), 68 and 69 of CRR
420 14.2.1 Gross indirect holdings of T2 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment Articles 4(1)(114), 68 and 69 of CRR The amount to be reported is the indirect holdings in the trading book of the capital instruments of financial sector entities that take the form of holdings of index securities. It is obtained by calculating the underlying exposure to the capital instruments of the financial sector entities in the indices. Holdings which are treated as reciprocal cross holdings according to article 66 point (b) of CRR shall not be included 430 14.2.2 (-) Permitted offsetting short positions in relation to the indirect gross holdings included above Articles 4(1)(114) and 69 of CRR
Article 69 point (a) of CRR allows offsetting short positions in the same
underlying exposure provided the maturity of the short position matches the maturity of the long position or has a residual maturity of at least one year. 431 14.3 Synthetic holdings of T2 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment Articles 4(1)(126), 68 and 69 of CRR 432 14.3.1 Gross synthetic holdings of T2 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment Articles 4(1)(126), 68 and 69 of CRR

40
433 14.3.2 (-) Permitted offsetting short positions in relation to the synthetic gross holdings included above Articles 4(1)(126) and 69 of CRR 440 15 Holdings of CET1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment, net of short positions Articles 44, 45, 47 and 49 of CRR 450 15.1 Direct holdings of CET1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment Articles 44, 45, 47 and 49 of CRR 460 15.1.1 Gross direct holdings of CET1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment Articles 44, 45, 47 and 49 of CRR Direct holdings of CET1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment, excluding:
a) Underwriting positions held for 5 working days or fewer; b) The amounts relating to the investments for which any alternative in article 49 is applied; and c) Holdings which are treated as reciprocal cross holdings according to article 36(1) point (g) of CRR 470 15.1.2 (-) Permitted offsetting short positions in relation to the direct gross holdings included above
Article 45 of CRR
Article 45 point (a) of CRR allows offsetting short positions in the same
underlying exposure provided the maturity of the short position matches the maturity of the long position or has a residual maturity of at least one year. 480 15.2 Indirect holdings of CET1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment Articles 4(1)(114), 44 and 45 of CRR 490 15.2.1 Gross indirect holdings of CET1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment Articles 4(1)(114), 44 and 45 of CRR The amount to be reported shall be the indirect holdings in the trading book of the capital instruments of financial sector entities that take the form of holdings of index securities. It shall be obtained by calculating the underlying exposure to the capital instruments of the financial sector entities in the indices. Holdings which are treated as reciprocal cross holdings according to article 36(1) point (g) of CRR shall not be included.

41
500 15.2.2 (-) Permitted offsetting short positions in relation to the indirect gross holdings included above Articles 4(1)(114) and 45 of CRR
Article 45 point (a) of CRR allows offsetting short positions in the same
underlying exposure provided the maturity of the short position matches the maturity of the long position or has a residual maturity of at least one year. 501 15.3 Synthetic holdings of CET1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment Articles 4(1)(126), 44 and 45 of CRR 502 15.3.1 Gross synthetic holdings of CET1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment Articles 4(1)(126), 44 and 45 of CRR 503 15.3.2 (-) Permitted offsetting short positions in relation to the synthetic gross holdings included above Articles 4(1)(126) and 45 of CRR 510 16 Holdings of AT1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment, net of short positions Articles 58 and 59 of CRR 520 16.1 Direct holdings of AT1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment Articles 58 and 59 of CRR 530 16.1.1 Gross direct holdings of AT1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment
Article 58 of CRR
Direct holdings of AT1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment, excluding:
a) Underwriting positions held for 5 working days or fewer (Article 56 point (d); and b) Holdings which are treated as reciprocal cross holdings according to article 56 point (b) of CRR 540 16.1.2 (-) Permitted offsetting short positions in relation to the direct gross holdings included above
Article 59 of CRR
Article 59 point (a) of CRR allows offsetting short positions in the same
underlying exposure provided the maturity of the short position matches the maturity of the long position or has a residual maturity of at least one year. 550 16.2 Indirect holdings of AT1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment

42
Articles 4(1)(114), 58 and 59 of CRR
560 16.2.1 Gross indirect holdings of AT1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment Articles 4(1)(114), 58 and 59 of CRR The amount to be reported shall be the indirect holdings in the trading book of the capital instruments of financial sector entities that take the form of holdings of index securities. It shall be obtained by calculating the underlying exposure to the capital instruments of the financial sector entities in the indices. Holdings which are treated as reciprocal cross holdings according to article 56 point (b) of CRR shall not be included. 570 16.2.2 (-) Permitted offsetting short positions in relation to the indirect gross holdings included above
Article 4(1)(114) and 59 of CRR
Article 59 point (a) of CRR allows offsetting short positions in the same
underlying exposure provided the maturity of the short position matches the maturity of the long position or has a residual maturity of at least one year. 571 16.3 Synthetic holdings of AT1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment Articles 4(1)(126), 58 and 59 of CRR 572 16.3.1 Gross synthetic holdings of AT1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment Articles 4(1)(126), 58 and 59 of CRR 573 16.3.2 (-) Permitted offsetting short positions in relation to the synthetic gross holdings included above Articles 4(1)(126) and 59 of CRR 580 17 Holdings of T2 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment, net of short positions Articles 68 and 69 of CRR 590 17.1 Direct holdings of T2 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment Articles 68 and 69 of CRR 600 17.1.1 Gross direct holdings of T2 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment
Article 68 of CRR
Direct holdings of T2 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment, excluding:
a) Underwriting positions held for 5 working days or fewer (Article 66 point (d); and

43 b) Holdings which are treated as reciprocal cross holdings according to article 66 point (b) of CRR 610 17.1.2 (-) Permitted offsetting short positions in relation to the direct gross holdings included above
Article 69 of CRR
Article 69 point (a) of CRR allows offsetting short positions in the same
underlying exposure provided the maturity of the short position matches the maturity of the long position or has a residual maturity of at least one year. 620 17.2 Indirect holdings of T2 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment Articles 4(1)(114), 68 and 69 of CRR 630 17.2.1 Gross indirect holdings of T2 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment Articles 4(1)(114), 68 and 69 of CRR The amount to be reported shall be the indirect holdings in the trading book of the capital instruments of financial sector entities that take the form of holdings of index securities. It shall be obtained by calculating the underlying exposure to the capital instruments of the financial sector entities in the indices. Holdings which are treated as reciprocal cross holdings according to article 66 point (b) of CRR shall not be included 640 17.2.2 (-) Permitted offsetting short positions in relation to the indirect gross holdings included above Articles 4(1)(114), 69 of CRR
Article 69 point (a) of CRR allows offsetting short positions in the same
underlying exposure provided the maturity of the short position matches the maturity of the long position or has a residual maturity of at least one year. 641 17.3 Synthetic holdings of T2 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment Articles 4(1)(126), 68 and 69 of CRR 642 17.3.1 Gross synthetic holdings of T2 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment Articles 4(1)(126), 68 and 69 of CRR 643 17.3.2 (-) Permitted offsetting short positions in relation to the synthetic gross holdings included above Articles 4(1)(126) and 69 of CRR 650 18 Risk weighted exposures of CET1 holdings in financial sector entities which are not deducted from the institution's CET1 capital
Article 46(4) , 48(4) and 49(4) of CRR

44
660 19 Risk weighted exposures of AT1 holdings in financial sector entities which are not deducted from the institution's AT1 capital
Article 60(4) of CRR
670 20 Risk weighted exposures of T2 holdings in financial sector entities which are not deducted from the institution's T2 capital
Article 70(4) of CRR
680 21 Holdings on CET1 Capital Instruments of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment temporary waived
Article 79 of CRR
A competent authority may waive on a temporary basis the provisions on deductions from CET1 due to holdings on instruments of a specific financial sector entity, when it deems those holdings to be for the purposes of a financial assistance operation designed to reorganise and save that entity. Note that these instruments shall also be reported on item 12.1. 690 22 Holdings on CET1 Capital Instruments of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment temporary waived
Article 79 of CRR
A competent authority may waive on a temporary basis the provisions on deductions from CET1 due to holdings on instruments of a specific financial sector entity, when it deems those holdings to be for the purposes of a financial assistance operation designed to reorganise and save that entity. Note that these instruments shall also be reported on item 15.1. 700 23 Holdings on AT1 Capital Instruments of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment temporary waived
Article 79 of CRR
A competent authority may waive on a temporary basis the provisions on deductions from AT1 due to holdings on instruments of a specific financial sector entity, when it deems those holdings to be for the purposes of a financial assistance operation designed to reorganise and save that entity. Note that these instruments shall also be reported on item 13.1. 710 24 Holdings on AT1 Capital Instruments of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment temporary waived
Article 79 of CRR
A competent authority may waive on a temporary basis the provisions on deductions from AT1 due to holdings on instruments of a specific

45 financial sector entity, when it deems those holdings to be for the purposes of a financial assistance operation designed to reorganise and save that entity. Note that these instruments shall also be reported on item 16.1. 720 25 Holdings on T2 Capital Instruments of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment temporary waived
Article 79 of CRR
A competent authority may waive on a temporary basis the provisions on deductions from T2 due to holdings on instruments of a specific financial sector entity, when it deems those holdings to be for the purposes of a financial assistance operation designed to reorganise and save that entity. Note that these instruments shall also be reported on item 14.1. 730 26 Holdings on T2 Capital Instruments of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment temporary waived
Article 79 of CRR
A competent authority may waive on a temporary basis the provisions on deductions from T2 due to holdings on instruments of a specific financial sector entity, when it deems those holdings to be for the purposes of a financial assistance operation designed to reorganise and save that entity. Note that these instruments shall also be reported on item 17.1. 740 27 Combined buffer requirement
Article 128 point (6) of CRD
750 Capital conservation buffer
Articles 128 point (1) and 129 of CRD
According to Article 129 (1) the capital conservation buffer is an additional amount of Common Equity Tier 1 capital. Due to the fact that the capital conservation buffer rate of 2.5% is stable, an amount shall be reported in this cell. 760 Conservation buffer due to macro-prudential or systemic risk identified at the level of a Member State
Article 458 (2) point d (iv) of CRR
In this cell the amount of the conservation buffer due to macro-prudential or systemic risk identified at the level of a Member State, which can be requested according to Article 458 CRR in addition to the capital conservation buffer shall be reported. The amount reported shall represent the amount of own funds needed to fulfil the respective capital buffer requirements at the reporting date.

46
770 Institution specific countercyclical capital buffer Articles 128 point (2), 130, 135-140 of CRD The amount reported shall represent the amount of own funds needed to fulfil the respective capital buffer requirements at the reporting date. 780 Systemic risk buffer Articles 128 point (5), 133 and 134 of CRD The amount reported shall represent the amount of own funds needed to fulfil the respective capital buffer requirements at the reporting date. 800 Global Systemically Important Institution buffer Articles 128 point (3) and 131 of CRD The amount reported shall represent the amount of own funds needed to fulfil the respective capital buffer requirements at the reporting date. 810 Other Systemically Important Institution buffer Articles 128 point (4) and 131 of CRD The amount reported shall represent the amount of own funds needed to fulfil the respective capital buffer requirements at the reporting date. 820 28 Own funds requirements related to Pillar II adjustments
Article 104 (2) of CRD.
If a competent authority decides that an institution has to calculate additional own funds requirements for Pillar II reasons, those additional own funds requirements shall be reported in this cell. 830 29 Initial capital Articles 12, 28 to 31of CRD and Article 93 of CRR 840 30 Own funds based on Fixed Overheads Articles 96(2) point (b), 97 and 98(1) point (a) of CRR 850 31 Non-domestic original exposures Information necessary to calculate the threshold for reporting of the CR GB template according to Article 5(a)(4) of this Regulation. The calculation of the threshold shall be done at the basis of the original exposure pre conversion factor. Exposures shall be deemed to be domestic where they are exposures to counterparties located in the Member State where the institution is located. 860 32 Total original exposures Information necessary to calculate the threshold for reporting of the CR GB template according to Article 5(a)(4) of this Regulation. The calculation of the threshold shall be done at the basis of the original exposure pre conversion factor

47
Exposures shall be deemed to be domestic where they are exposures to counterparties located in the Member State where the institution is located. 870 Adjustments to total own funds
Article 500 (4) of CRR
The difference between the amount reported in position 880 and the total own funds pursuant to CRR has to be reported in this position. If the SA alternative (Article 500 (2) CRR) is applied, this row shall be empty. 880 Own funds fully adjusted for Basel I floor
Article 500 (4) of CRR
Total own funds pursuant to CRR adjusted as required by Article 500(4) of CRR (i.e. fully adjusted to reflect differences in the calculation of own funds under Directive 93/6/EEC and Directive 2000/12/EC as those Directives stood prior to 1 January 2007 and the calculation of own funds under CRR deriving from the separate treatments of expected loss and unexpected loss under Part Three, Title II, Chapter 3, of CRR) have to be reported in this position. If the SA alternative (Article 500 (2) CRR) is applied, this row shall be empty. 890 Own funds requirements for Basel I floor
Article 500 (1) point (b) of CRR
The amount of own funds required by Article 500(1)(b) of CRR to be hold (i.e. 80 % of the total minimum amount of own funds that the institution would be required to hold under Article 4 of Directive 93/6/EEC as that Directive and Directive 2000/12/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 20 March 2000 relating to the taking up and pursuit of the business of credit institutions as those Directives stood prior to January 2007) has to be reported in this position. 900 Own funds requirements for Basel I floor - SA alternative
Article 500 (2) and (3) of CRR
The amount of own funds required by Article 500 (2) of CRR to be hold (i.e. 80 % of the own funds that the institution would be required to hold under Article 92 calculating risk-weighted exposure amounts in accordance with Part Three, Title II, Chapter 2, and Part Three, Title III, Chapter 2 or 3 of CRR, as applicable, instead of in accordance with Part Three, Title II, Chapter 3, or Part Three, Title III, Chapter 4 of CRR, as applicable) has to be reported in this position. 910 Deficit of total own funds as regards the own funds requirements of the Basel I floor or SA alternative Articles 500 (1) point (b) and 500 (2) CRR This row has to be filled with:

if Article 500 (1) (b) CRR is applied and row 880 < row 890:
the difference between row 890 and row 880
or if Article 500 (2) CRR is applied and row 010 of C 01.00 <
row 900 of C 04.00: the difference between row 900 of C 04.00 and row 010 of C 01.00
1.6 TRANSITIONAL PROVISIONS and GRANDFATHERED INSTRUMENTS: INSTRUMENTS NOT CONSTITUTING STATE AID (CA 5)
1.6.1 General remarks

CA5 summarizes the calculation of own funds elements and deductions subject
to the transitional provisions laid down in Articles 465 to 491 of CRR.
CA5 is structured as follows:
(a) Template 5.1 summarizes the total adjustments which need to be made to the different components of own funds (reported in CA1 according to the final provisions) as a consequence of the application of the transitional provisions. The elements of this table are presented as “adjustments” to the different capital components in CA1, in order to reflect in own funds components the effects of the transitional provisions. (b) Template 5.2 provides further details on the calculation of those grandfathered instruments which do not constitute state aid.
Institutions shall report in the first four columns the adjustments to Common
Equity Tier 1 capital, Additional Tier 1 capital and Tier 2 capital as well as the amount to be treated as risk weighted assets. Institutions are also required to report the applicable percentage in column 050 and the eligible amount without the recognition of transitional provisions in column 060.
Institutions shall only report elements in CA5 during the period where transitional provisions in accordance with Part Ten of CRR apply.
Some of the transitional provisions require a deduction from Tier 1. If this is the
case the residual amount of a deduction or deductions is applied to Tier 1 and there is insufficient AT1 to absorb this amount then the excess shall be deducted from CET1.
1.6.2. C 05.01 - TRANSITIONAL PROVISIONS (CA5.1)
Institutions shall report in Table 5.1 the transitional provisions to own funds
components as laid down in Articles 465 to 491 of CRR, compared to applying the final provisions laid down in Title II of Part Two of CRR.
Institutions shall report in rows 020 to 060 information in relation with the transitional provisions of grandfathered instruments. The figures to be reported in columns 010 to 030 of row 060 of CA 5.1 can be derived from the respective sections
of CA 5.2.

49
22. Institutions shall report in rows 070 to 092 information in relation with the transitional provisions of minority interests and additional Tier 1 and Tier 2 instruments
issued by subsidiaries (in accordance with Articles 479 and 480 of CRR).
23. In rows 100 onwards institutions shall report information in relation with the
transitional provisions of unrealized gains and losses, deductions as well as additional filters and deductions.
24. There might be cases where the transitional deductions of CET1, AT1 or T2
capital exceed the CET1, AT1 or T2 capital of an institution. This effect – if it results from transitional provisions – shall be shown in the CA1 template using the respective cells. As a consequence, the adjustments in the columns of the CA5 template do not include any spill-over effects in the case of insufficient capital available.
1.6.2.1. Instructions concerning specific positions
Columns
010 Adjustments to CET1
020 Adjustments to AT1
030 Adjustments to T2
040 Adjustments included in RWAs
Column 040 includes the relevant amounts adjusting the total risk exposure amount of Article 92 (3) of CRR due to transitional provisions. The amounts reported shall consider the application of provisions of Chapter 2 or 3 of Title II of Part Three or of Title IV of Part Three in accordance with Art. 92 (4) of CRR. This means that transitional amounts subject to provisions of
Chapter 2 or 3 of Title II of Part Three shall be reported as risk weighted
exposure amounts, whereas transitional amounts subject to Title IV of Part Three shall represent the own funds requirements multiplied by 12.5. Whereas columns 010 to 030 have a direct link to the CA1 template, the adjustments to the total risk exposure amount do not have a direct link to the relevant templates for credit risk. If there are adjustments stemming from the transitional provisions to the total risk exposure amount, those adjustments shall be included directly in the CR SA, CR IRB, CR EQU IRB, MKR SA TDI, MKR SA EQU or MKR IM. Additionally, those effects shall be reported in column 040 of CA5.1. As a consequence, those amounts are only memorandum items. 050 Applicable percentage 060 Eligible amount without transitional provisions Column 060 includes the amount of each instrument prior the application of transitional provisions. I.e. the basis amount relevant to calculate the adjustments. Rows

50
010 1. Total adjustments
This row reflects the overall effect of transitional adjustments in the different types of capital, plus the risk weighted amounts arising from these adjustments 020 1.1 Grandfathered instruments Articles 483 to 491 of CRR This row reflects the overall effect of instruments transitionally grandfathered in the different types of capital. 030 1.1.1 Grandfathered instruments: Instruments constituting state aid
Article 483 CRR
040 1.1.1.1 Instruments that qualified as own funds according to 2006/48/EC
Article 483 (1) (2), (4) and (6) of CRR
050 1.1.1.2 Instruments issued by institutions that are incorporated in a Member State that is subject to an Economic Adjustment Programme
Article 483 (1), (3), (5), (7) and (8) of CRR
060 1.1.2 Instruments not constituting state aid The amounts to be reported shall be obtained from column 060 of table CA 5.2. 070 1.2 Minority interests and equivalents Articles 479 and 480 of CRR This row reflects the effects of transitional provisions in the minority interests eligible as CET1; the qualifying T1 instruments eligible as consolidated AT1; and the qualifying own funds eligible as consolidated T2. 080 1.2.1 Capital instruments and items that do not qualify as minority interests Articles 479 of CRR The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row shall be the amount qualifying as consolidated reserves in accordance with prior regulation. 090 1.2.2 Transitional recognition in consolidated own funds of minority interests Articles 84 and 480 of CRR The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row shall be the eligible amount without transitional provisions. 091 1.2.3 Transitional recognition in consolidated own funds of qualifying Additional Tier 1 capital
Article 85 and 480 of CRR
The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row shall be the eligible amount without transitional provisions.

51
092 1.2.4 Transitional recognition in consolidated own funds of qualifying Tier 2 capital
Article 87 and 480 of CRR
The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row shall be the eligible amount without transitional provisions. 100 1.3 Other transitional adjustments Articles 467 to 478 and 481 of CRR This row reflects the overall effect of transitional adjustments in the deduction to different types of capital, unrealised gains and losses, additional filters and deductions plus the risk weighted amounts arising from these adjustments. 110 1.3.1 Unrealised gains and losses Articles 467 and 468 of CRR This row reflects the overall effect of transitional provisions on unrealized gains and losses measured at fair value. 120 1.3.1.1 Unrealised gains
Article 468(1) of CRR
130 1.3.1.2 Unrealised losses
Article 467(1) of CRR
133 1.3.1.3 Unrealised gains on exposures to central governments classified in the "Available for sale" category of EU-endorsed IAS39
Article 468 of CRR
136 1.3.1.4 Unrealised loss on exposures to central governments classified in the "Available for sale" category of EU-endorsed IAS39
Article 467 of CRR
138 1.3.1.5 Fair value gains and losses arising from the institution's own credit risk related to derivative liabilities
Article 468 of CRR
140 1.3.2 Deductions
Articles 36(1), 469 to 478 of CRR
This row reflects the overall effect of transitional provisions on deductions.
150 1.3.2.1. Losses for the current financial year Articles 36 (1) point (a), 469 (1), 472 (3) and 478 of CRR The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row shall be the original deduction according to Article 36(1)(a) of CRR. Where firms have only been required to deduct material losses:

where the total interim net loss was ‘material’, the full residual amount
would be deducted from Tier 1, or

where the whole total interim net loss was not 'material', no deduction of
residual amount would be made.
160 1.3.2.2. Intangible assets
Articles 36 (1) point (b), 469 (1), 472 (4) and 478 of CRR When determining the amount of intangible assets to be deducted, institutions shall take into account the provisions of Article 37 of CRR. The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row shall be the original deduction according to Article 36(1)(b) of CRR. 170 1.3.2.3. Deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability and do not arise from temporary differences Articles 36 (1) point (c), 469 (1), 472 (5) and 478 of CRR When determining the amount of the above-mentioned deferred tax assets (DTA) to be deducted, institutions shall take into account the provisions of
Article 38 of CRR relating to the reduction of DTA by deferred tax liabilities.
The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row: Total amount according to Article 469 (1) of CRR. 180 1.3.2.4. IRB shortfall of provisions to expected losses Articles 36 (1) point (d), 469 (1), 472 (6) and 478 of CRR When determining the amount of the above-mentioned IRB shortfall of provisions to expected losses to be deducted, institutions shall take into account the provisions of Article 40 of CRR. The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row: Original deduction according to Article 36(1)(d) of CRR 190 1.3.2.5. Defined benefit pension fund assets Articles 33 (1) point (e), 469 (1), 472 (7), 473 and 478 of CRR When determining the amount of the above-mentioned defined benefit pension fund assets to be deducted, institutions shall take into account the provisions of Article 41 of CRR. The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row: Original deduction according to Article 36(1)(e) of CRR 194 1.3.2.5.* of which: Introduction of amendments to IAS 19 – positive item
Article 473 of CRR
198 1.3.2.5. of which: Introduction of amendments to IAS 19 – negative item
Article 473 of CRR
200 1.3.2.6. Own instruments
Articles 36 (1) point (f), 469 (1), 472 (8) and 478 of CRR

53
The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row: Original deduction according to Article 36(1)(f) of CRR 210 1.3.2.6.1 Own CET1 instruments Articles 36 (1) point (f), 469 (1), 472 (8) and 478 of CRR When determining the amount of the above-mentioned Own Common Equity Tier 1 instruments to be deducted, institutions shall take into account the provisions of Article 42 of CRR. Given that the treatment of the “residual amount” differs depending upon the nature of the instrument, institutions shall break down holdings in own Common Equity instruments according to “direct” and “indirect” holdings. The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row: Original deduction according to Article 36(1)(f) of CRR. 211 1.3.2.6.1 of which: Direct holdings
Article 469 (1) (b), 472 (8) (a) of CRR
The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row: Total amount of direct holdings, including instruments that an institution could be obliged to purchase by virtue of an existing or contingent contractual obligation. 212 1.3.2.6.1* of which: Indirect holdings
Article 469 (1) (b), 472 (8) (b) of CRR
The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row: Total amount of indirect holdings, including instruments that an institution could be obliged to purchase by virtue of an existing or contingent contractual obligation. 220 1.3.2.6.2 Own AT1 instruments Articles 56 point (a), 474, 475(2) and 478 of CRR When determining the amount of the above-mentioned holdings to be deducted, institutions shall take into account the provisions of Article 57 of CRR. Given that the treatment of the “residual amount” differs depending upon the nature of the instrument (Article 475(2) of CRR), institutions shall break down the above-mentioned holdings according to “direct” and “indirect” own Additional Tier 1 holdings. The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row: Original deduction according to Article 56 (a) of CRR. 221 1.3.2.6.2 of which: Direct holdings The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row: Total amount of direct holdings, including instruments that an institution could be obliged to purchase by virtue of an existing or contingent contractual obligation, Articles 474 (b) and 475 (2) (a) of CRR. 222 1.3.2.6.2* of which: Indirect holdings The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row: Total amount of indirect holdings, including instruments that an institution could be obliged to

54 purchase by virtue of an existing or contingent contractual obligation, Article 474 (b), 475 (2) (b) of CRR. 230 1.3.2.6.3 Own T2 instruments Articles 66 point (a), 476, 477(2) and 478 of CRR When determining the amount of the holdings to be deducted, institutions shall take into account the provisions of Article 67 of CRR. Given that the treatment of the “residual amount” differs depending upon the nature of the instrument (Article 477(2) of CRR), institutions shall break down the above-mentioned holdings according to “direct” and “indirect” own Tier 2 holdings. The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row: Original deduction0 according to Article 66 (a) of CRR. 231 of which: Direct holdings The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row: Total amount of direct holdings, including instruments that an institution could be obliged to purchase by virtue of an existing or contingent contractual obligation, Articles 476 (b) and 477 (2) (a) of CRR 232 of which: Indirect holdings The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row: Total amount of indirect holdings, including instruments that an institution could be obliged to purchase by virtue of an existing or contingent contractual obligation, Articles 476 (b) and 477 (2) (b) of CRR 240 1.3.2.7. Reciprocal cross holdings Given that the treatment of the “residual amount” differs depending whether the holding of Common Equity Tier 1, Additional Tier 1 or Tier 2 in the financial sector entity is to be considered being significant or not (Articles 472(9), 475 (3) and 477 (3) of CRR), institutions shall break down reciprocal cross holdings according to significant investments and non-significant investments. 250 1.3.2.7.1 Reciprocal cross holdings in CET1 Capital Articles 36(1) point (g), 469 (1), 472(9) and 478 of CRR The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row: Original deduction according to Article 36(1)(g) of CRR 260 1.3.2.7.1.1 Reciprocal cross holdings in CET1 Capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment Articles 36(1) point (g), 469 (1), 472(9) point (a) and 478 of CRR The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row: Residual amount according to Article 469 (1) (b) of CRR 270 1.3.2.7.1.2 Reciprocal cross holdings in CET1 Capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment

55
Articles 36(1) point (g), 469 (1), 472(9) point (b) and 478 of CRR The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row: Residual amount according to Article 469 (1) (b) of CRR 280 1.3.2.7.2 Reciprocal cross holdings in AT1 Capital Articles 56 point (b), 474, 475(3) and 478 of CRR The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row: Original deduction according to Article 56 (b) of CRR 290 1.3.2.7.2.1 Reciprocal cross holdings in AT1 Capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment Articles 56 point (b), 474, 475(3) point (a) and 478 of CRR The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row: Residual amount according to Article 475 (3) of CRR 300 1.3.2.7.2.2 Reciprocal cross holdings in AT1 Capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment Articles 56 point (b), 474, 475(3) point (b) and 478 of CRR The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row: Residual amount according to Article 475 (3) of CRR 310 1.3.2.7.3 Reciprocal cross holdings in T2 Capital Articles 66 point (b), 476, 477(3) and 478 of CRR The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row: Original deduction according to Article 66 (b) of CRR 320 1.3.2.7.3.1 Reciprocal cross holdings in T2 Capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment Articles 66 point (b), 476, 477(3) point (a) and 478 of CRR The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row: Residual amount according to Article 477 (3) of CRR 330 1.3.2.7.3.2 Reciprocal cross holdings in T2 Capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment Articles 66 point (b), 476, 477(3) point (b) and 478 of CRR The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row: Residual amount according to Article 477 (3) of CRR 340 1.3.2.8. Own funds instruments of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment 350 1.3.2.8.1 CET1 instruments of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment Articles 36(1) point (h), 469 (1), 472(10) and 478 of CRR The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row: Original deduction according to Article 36 (1) (h) of CRR

56
360 1.3.2.8.2 AT1 instruments of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment Articles 56 point (c), 474, 475(4) and 478 of CRR The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row: Original deduction according to Article 56 (c) of CRR 370 1.3.2.8.3 T2 instruments of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment Articles 66 point (c), 476, 477(4) and 478 of CRR The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row: Original deduction according to Article 66 (c) of CRR 380 1.3.2.9 Deferred tax assets that are dependent on future profitability and arise from temporary differences and CET1 instruments of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment
Article 470(2) and (3) of CRR
The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row: Article 470 (1) of CRR 385 Deferred tax assets that are dependent on future profitability and arise from temporary differences
Article 469(1)(c), 478 and 472(5) CRR.
Part of deferred tax assets that rely in future profitability and arise from temporary differences which exceeds the 10% threshold in article 470 (2) lit. (a)
CRR.
390 1.3.2.10 Own funds instruments of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment 400 1.3.2.10.1 CET1 instruments of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment Articles 36(1) point (i), 469 (1), 472(11) and 478 of CRR The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row: Original deduction according to Article 36 (1) (i) of CRR 410 1.3.2.10.2 AT1 instruments of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment Articles 56 point (d), 474, 475(4) and 478 of CRR The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row: Original deduction according to Article 56 (d) of CRR 420 1.3.2.10.2 T2 instruments of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment Articles 66 point (d), 476, 477(4) and 478 of CRR The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row: Original deduction according to Article 66 (d) of CRR 425 1.3.2.11 Exemption from deduction of Equity Holdings in Insurance Companies from CET 1 Items

57
Article 471 of CRR
430 1.3.3 Additional filters and deductions
Article 481 of CRR
This row reflects the overall effect of transitional provisions on additional filters and deductions. In accordance with Article 481 of CRR, institutions shall report in item 1.3.3 information relating to the filters and deductions required under the national transposition measures for Articles 57 and 66 of Directive 2006/48/EC and for Articles 13 and 16 of Directive 2006/49/EC, and which are not required in accordance with Part Two. 440 1.3.4 Adjustments due to IFRS 9 transitional arrangements Institutions shall report information in relation with the transitional arrangements due to IFRS 9 in accordance with the applicable legal provisions.
1.6.3. C 05.02 - GRANDFATHERED INSTRUMENTS: INSTRUMENTS NOT CONSTITUING STATE AID (CA5.2)
25. Institutions shall report information in relation with the transitional provisions
of grandfathered instruments not constituting state aid (Article 484 to 491 of CRR).
1.6.3.1. Instructions concerning specific positions
Columns
010 Amount of instruments plus related share premium
Article 484 (3) to (5) of CRR
Instruments which are eligible for each respective row, including their related share premiums. 020 Base for calculating the limit Articles 486 (2) to (4) of CRR 030 Applicable percentage
Article 486 (5) of CRR
040 Limit
Article 486 (2) to (5) of CRR
050 (-) Amount that exceeds the limits for grandfathering
Article 486 (2) to (5) of CRR
060 Total grandfathered amount

58
The amount to be reported shall be equal to the amounts reported in the respective columns in row 060 of CA 5.1. Rows 010 1. Instruments that qualified for point a) of Article 57 of 2006/48/EC
Article 484(3) of CRR
The amount to be reported shall include the related share premium accounts.
020 2. Instruments that qualified for point ca) of Article 57 and Article 154(8) and (9) of 2006/48/EC, subject to the limit of Article 489
Article 484(4) of CRR
030 2.1 Total instruments without a call or an incentive to redeem
Article 484 (4) and 489 of CRR
The amount to be reported shall include the related share premium accounts.
040 2.2 Grandfathered instruments with a call and incentive to redeem
Article 489 of CRR
050 2.2.1 Instruments with a call exercisable after the reporting date, and which meet the conditions in Article 52 of CRR after the date of effective maturity Articles 489(3), and 491 point (a) of CRR The amount to be reported shall include the related share premium accounts. 060 2.2.2 Instruments with a call exercisable after the reporting date, and which do not meet the conditions in Article 52 of CRR after the date of effective maturity Articles 489(5), and 491 point (a) of CRR The amount to be reported shall include the related share premium accounts. 070 2.2.3 Instruments with a call exercisable prior to or on 20 July 2011, and which do not meet the conditions in Article 52 of CRR after the date of effective maturity Articles 489(6) and 491 point (c) of CRR The amount to be reported shall include the related share premium accounts 080 2.3 Excess on the limit of CET1 grandfathered instruments
Article 487(1) of CRR
The excess on the limit of CET1 grandfathered instruments may be treated as instruments which can be grandfathered as AT1 instruments. 090 3. Items that qualified for points e), f), g) or h) of Article 57 of 2006/48/EC, subject to the limit of Article 490
Article 484(5) of CRR

59
100 3.1 Total items without an incentive to redeem
Article 490 of CRR
110 3.2 Grandfathered items with an incentive to redeem
Article 490 of CRR
120 3.2.1 Items with a call exercisable after the reporting date, and which meet the conditions in Article 63 of CRR after the date of effective maturity Articles 490(3), and 491 point (a) of CRR The amount to be reported shall include the related share premium accounts. 130 3.2.2 Items with a call exercisable after the reporting date, and which do not meet the conditions in Article 63 of CRR after the date of effective maturity Articles 490(5), and 491 point (a) of CRR The amount to be reported shall include the related share premium accounts. 140 3.2.3 Items with a call exercisable prior to or on 20 July 2011, and which do not meet the conditions in Article 63 of CRR after the date of effective maturity Articles 490(6) and 491 point (c) of CRR The amount to be reported shall include the related share premium accounts. 150 3.3 Excess on the limit of AT1 grandfathered instruments
Article 487(2) of CRR
The excess on the limit of AT1 grandfathered instruments may be treated as instruments which can be grandfathered as T2 instruments.
2. GROUP SOLVENCY: INFORMATION ON AFFILIATES (GS)
2.1. General remarks
26. Templates C 06.01 and C 06.02 shall be reported if own funds requirements are
calculated on a consolidated basis. This template consists of four parts in order to gather different information on all individual entities (including the reporting institution) included in the scope of consolidation. (a) Entities within the scope of consolidation; (b) Detailed group solvency information; (c) Information on the contribution of individual entities to group solvency; (d) Information on capital buffers;
27. Institutions waived according to Article 7 of CRR shall only report the columns
010 to 060 and 250 to 400.

60
28. The figures reported take into account all applicable transitional provisions of
CRR which are applicable at the respective reporting date.
2.2. Detailed group solvency information
29. The second part of this template (detailed group solvency information) in columns 070 to 210 is designed to gather information on credit and other regulated financial institutions which are effectively subject to particular solvency requirements
on individual basis. It provides, for each of those entities within the scope of the reporting, the own funds requirements for each risk category and the own funds for solvency purposes.
30. In the case of proportional consolidation of participations, the figures related to
own funds requirements and own funds shall reflect the respective proportional amounts.
2.3. Information on the contributions of individual entities to group solvency
31. The objective of the third part of this template (information on the contributions
of all entities within CRR scope of consolidation to group solvency), including those that are not subject to particular solvency requirements on an individual basis, in columns 250 to 400, is to identify which entities within the group generate the risks and raise own funds from the market, based on data that are readily available or can easily be reprocessed, without having to reconstruct the capital ratio on a solo or subconsolidated basis. At the entity level, both risk and own fund figures are contributions to the group figures and not elements of a solvency ratio on a solo basis and as such must not be compared to each other.
32. The third part also includes the amounts of minority interests, qualifying AT1,
and qualifying T2 eligible in the consolidated own funds.
33. As this third part of the template refers to “contributions”, the figures to be reported herein shall defer, when applicable, from the figures reported in the columns
referring to detailed group solvency information.
34. The principle is to delete the cross-exposures within the same groups in a homogeneous way both in terms of risks or own funds, in order to cover the amounts reported in the group’s consolidated CA template by adding the amounts reported for
each entity in ”Group Solvency” template. In cases where the 1 % threshold is not exceeded a direct link to the CA template is not possible.
35. The institutions shall define the most appropriate breakdown method between
the entities to take into account the possible diversification effects for market risk and operational risk.
36. It is possible for one consolidated group to be included within another consolidated group. This means that the entities within a subgroup shall be reported entityby-entity in the GS of the entire group, even if the sub-group itself is subject to reporting requirements. If the subgroup is subject to reporting requirements, it shall
also report the GS template on an entity-by-entity basis, although those details are included in the GS template of a higher consolidated group.

61
37. An institution shall report data of the contribution of an entity when its contribution to the total risk exposure amount exceeds 1 % of the total risk exposure
amount of the group or when its contribution to the total own funds exceeds 1% of the total own funds of the group. This threshold does not apply in the case of subsidiaries or subgroups that provide own funds (in the form of minority interests or qualifying AT1 or T2 instruments included in own funds) to the group.
2.4. C 06.01 – GROUP SOLVENCY: INFORMATION ON AFFILIATES – Total (GS Total)
Columns Instructions
250-400 ENTITIES WITHIN SCOPE OF CONSOLIDATION See instructions for C 06.02 410-480 CAPITAL BUFFERS See instructions for C 06.02 Rows Instructions 010 TOTAL The Total shall represent the sum of the values reported in all rows of template C 06.02.
2.5. C 06.02 – GROUP SOLVENCY: INFORMATION ON AFFILIATES (GS)
Columns Instructions
010-060 ENTITIES WITHIN SCOPE OF CONSOLIDATION This template is designed to gather information on all entities on an entity-by-entitybasis within the scope of consolidation according to Chapter 2 of Title II of Part One of CRR. 010 NAME Name of the entity within the scope of consolidation. 020 CODE This code is a row identifier and shall be unique for each row in the table. Code assigned to the entity within the scope of consolidation. The actual composition of the code depends on the national reporting system. 025 LEI CODE

62
LEI code stands for Legal Entity Identification code which is a reference code proposed by the Financial Stability Board (FSB) and endorsed by the G20, aimed at achieving a unique and worldwide identification of parties to financial transactions. Until the global LEI system is fully operational, pre-LEI codes are being assigned to counterparties by a Local Operational Unit that has been endorsed by Regulatory Oversight Committee (ROC, detailed information may be found at the following website:
www.leiroc.org)).
Where a Legal Entity Identification code (LEI code) exists for a given counterparty, it shall be used to identify that counterparty. 030 INSTITUTION OR EQUIVALENT (YES / NO) "YES" shall be reported in case the entity is subject to own funds requirements according to CRR and CRD or provisions at least equivalent to Basel provisions. ”NO” shall be reported otherwise.  Minority interests:
Articles 81(1) point (a) (ii) and 82(1) point (a) (ii) of CRR To the effects of minority interests and AT1 and T2 instruments issued by subsidiaries, the subsidiaries whose instruments can be eligible shall be institutions or undertakings subject by virtue of applicable national law to the requirements of CRR. 035 TYPE OF ENTITY The type of entity shall be reported based on the following categories:
(a) credit institution
Article 4 (1) (1) CRR;
(b) investment firm
Article 4 (1) (2) CRR;
(c) financial institution (other)
Articles 4 (1) (20), (21) and (26) CRR
Financial institutions within the meaning of Article 4 (1) (26) CRR which are not included in any of the categories (d), (f) or (g); (d) (mixed) financial holding company Articles 4 (1) (20) and (21) CRR; (e) ancillary services undertaking
Article 4 (1) (18) CRR;
(f) securitisation special purpose entity (SSPE),
Article 4 (1) (66) CRR;
(g) covered bond company
Entity set up to issue covered bonds or to hold the collateral securing a covered bond, if not included in any of the categories (a), (b) or (d) to (f) above;

63
(h) other type of entity
Entity other than those referred to in points (a) to (g) Where an entity is not subject to CRR and CRD, but subject to provisions at least equivalent to Basel provisions, the relevant category shall be determined on a best effort basis. 040 SCOPE OF DATA: SOLO FULLY CONSOLIDATED (SF) OR SOLO PARTIALLY CONSOLIDATED (SP) “SF” shall be reported for individual subsidiaries fully consolidated. “SP” shall be reported for individual subsidiaries partially consolidated. 050 COUNTRY CODE Institutions shall report the two-letter country code according to ISO 3166-2. 060 SHARE OF HOLDING (%) This percentage refers to the actual share of capital the parent undertaking holds in subsidiaries. In case of full consolidation of a direct subsidiary, the actual share is e.g. 70 %. In accordance with Article 4(16) of CRR, the share of holding of a subsidiary of a subsidiary to be reported results from a multiplication of the shares between the subsidiaries concerned. 070-240 INFORMATION ON ENTITIES SUBJECT TO OWN FUNDS REQUIREMENT The section of detailed information (i.e. columns 070 to 240) shall gather information only on those entities and subgroups which, being within the scope of consolidation (Chapter 2 of Title II of Part One of CRR), are effectively subject to solvency requirements according to CRR or provisions at least equivalent to Basel provisions (i.e, reported yes in column 030). Information shall be included about all individual institutions of a consolidated group that are subject to own funds requirements, regardless where they are located. The information reported in this part shall be according to the local solvency rules where the institution is operating (therefore for this template it is not necessary to do a double calculation on an individual basis according to the parent institution’s rules). When local solvency rules differ from CRR and a comparable breakdown is not given, the information shall be completed where data is available in the respective granularity. Therefore, this part is a factual template that summarises the calculations that the individual institutions of a group shall carry out, bearing in mind that some of those institutions may be subject to different solvency rules. Reporting of fixed overheads of investment firms:
Investment firms shall include own funds requirements related to fixed overheads in their calculation of capital ratio according to Articles 95, 96, 97 and 98 of CRR. The part of the total risk exposure amount related to fixed overheads shall be reported in column 100 of part 2 of this template. 070 TOTAL RISK EXPOSURE AMOUNT The sum of the columns 080 to 110 shall be reported.

64
080 CREDIT; COUNTERPARTY CREDIT; DILUTION RISKS, FREE DELIVERIES AND SETTLEMENT/DELIVERY RISK The amount to be reported in this column corresponds to the sum of risk weighted exposure amounts that are equal or equivalent to the ones that must be reported in row 040 “RISK WEIGHTED EXPOSURE AMOUNTS FOR CREDIT, COUNTERPARTY CREDIT AND DILUTION RISKS AND FREE DELIVERIES” and the amounts of own funds requirements that are equal or equivalent to the ones that must be reported in row 490 “TOTAL RISK EXPOSURE AMOUNT FOR SETTLEMENT/DELIVERY RISKS” of the template CA2. 090 POSITION, FX AND COMMODITY RISKS The amount to be reported in this column corresponds to the amount of own funds requirements that are equal or equivalent to the ones that must be reported in row 520 “TOTAL RISK EXPOSURE AMOUNT FOR POSITION, FOREIGN EXCHANGE AND COMMODITIES RISKS” of the template CA2. 100 OPERATIONAL RISK The amount to be reported in this column corresponds to the risk exposure amount that is equal or equivalent to the one that shall be reported in row 590 “TOTAL RISK EXPOSURE AMOUNT FOR OPERATIONAL RISKS (OpR)” of the template CA2. Fixed overheads shall be included in this column including the row 630 “ADDITIONAL RISK EXPOSURE AMOUNT DUE TO FIXED OVERHEADS” of the template CA2. 110 OTHER RISK EXPOSURE AMOUNTS The amount to be reported in this column corresponds to the risk exposure amount not especially listed above. It is the sum of the amounts of rows 640, 680 and 690 of the template CA2. 120-240 DETAILED INFORMATION ON GROUP SOLVENCY OWN FUNDS The information reported in the following columns shall be according to the local solvency rules where the entity or subgroup is operating. 120 OWN FUNDS The amount to be reported in this column corresponds to the amount of own funds that are equal or equivalent to the ones that must be reported in row 010 “OWN FUNDS” of the template CA1. 130 OF WHICH: QUALIFYING OWN FUNDS
Article 82 of CRR
This column shall only be provided for the subsidiaries reported on an individual basis that are fully consolidated, which are institutions. Qualifying holdings are, for the subsidiaries specified above, the instruments (plus related retained earnings, share premium accounts and other reserves) owned by persons other than the undertakings included in the CRR consolidation.

65
The amount to be reported shall include the effects of any transitional provision. It shall be the eligible amount on the date of reporting. 140 RELATED OWN FUNDS INSTRUMENTS, RELATED RETAINED EARNINGS, SHARE PREMIUM ACCOUNTS AND OTHER RESERVES
Article 87 (1) (b) of CRR
150 TOTAL TIER 1 CAPITAL
Article 25 of CRR
160 OF WHICH: QUALIFYING TIER 1 CAPITAL
Article 82 of CRR
This column shall only be provided for the subsidiaries reported on an individual basis that are fully consolidated, which are institutions. Qualifying holdings are, for the subsidiaries specified above, the instruments (plus related retained earnings and share premium accounts) owned by persons other than the undertakings included in the CRR consolidation. The amount to be reported shall include the effects of any transitional provision. It shall be the eligible amount on the date of reporting. 170 RELATED T1 INSTRUMENTS, RELATED RETAINED EARNINGS AND SHARE PREMIUM ACCOUNTS
Article 85 (1) (b) of CRR
180 COMMON EQUITY TIER 1 CAPITAL
Article 50 of CRR
190 OF WHICH: MINORITY INTERESTS
Article 81 of CRR
This column shall only be reported for subsidiaries fully consolidated which are institutions, except subsidiaries referred to in article 84(3) of CRR. Each subsidiary shall be considered on a sub-consolidated basis for the purpose of all the calculations required in
article 84 of CRR, if relevant, in accordance with article 84(2), otherwise on a solo basis.
To the effects of CRR and this template, minority interests are, for the subsidiaries specified above, the CET1 instruments (plus related retained earnings and share premium accounts) owned by persons other than the undertakings included in the CRR consolidation. The amount to be reported shall include the effects of any transitional provision. It shall be the eligible amount on the date of reporting. 200 RELATED OWN FUNDS INSTRUMENTS, RELATED RETAINED EARNINGS, SHARE PREMIUM ACCOUNTS AND OTHER RESERVES
Article 84 (1) (b) of CRR
210 ADDITIONAL TIER 1 CAPITAL

66
Article 61 of CRR
220 OF WHICH: QUALIFYING ADDITIONAL TIER 1 CAPITAL Articles 82 and 83 of CRR This column shall only be provided for the subsidiaries reported on an individual basis that are fully consolidated which are institutions, except subsidiaries referred to in article 85 (2) of CRR . Each subsidiary shall be considered on a sub-consolidated basis for the purpose of all the calculations required in article 85 of CRR, if relevant, in accordance with article 85(2), otherwise on a solo basis. To the effects of CRR and this template, minority interests are, for the subsidiaries specified above, the AT1 instruments (plus related retained earnings and share premium accounts) owned by persons other than the undertakings included in the CRR consolidation. The amount to be reported shall include the effects of any transitional provision. It shall be the eligible amount on the date of reporting. 230 TIER 2 CAPITAL
Article 71 of CRR
240 OF WHICH: QUALIFYING TIER 2 CAPITAL
Articles 82 and 83 of CRR
This column shall only be provided for the subsidiaries reported on an individual basis that are fully consolidated, which are institutions, except subsidiaries referred to in article 87 (2) of CRR. Each subsidiary shall be considered on a sub-consolidated basis for the purpose of all the calculations required in article 87 of CRR, if relevant, in accordance with article 87(2) of CRR, otherwise on a solo basis. To the effects of CRR and this template, minority interests are, for the subsidiaries specified above, the T2 instruments (plus related retained earnings and share premium accounts) owned by persons other than the undertakings included in the CRR consolidation. The amount to be reported shall include the effects of any transitional provision, i.e. it has to be the eligible amount in the date of reporting. 250-400 INFORMATION ON THE CONTRIBUTION OF ENTITIES TO SOLVENCY OF THE GROUP 250-290 CONTRIBUTION TO RISKS The information reported in the following columns shall be according to the solvency rules applicable to the reporting institution. 250 TOTAL RISK EXPOSURE AMOUNT The sum of the columns 260 to 290 shall be reported. 260 CREDIT; COUNTERPARTY CREDIT; DILUTION RISKS, FREE DELIVERIES AND SETTLEMENT/DELIVERY RISK

67
The amount to be reported shall be the risk weighted exposure amounts for credit risk and own funds requirements of settlement/delivery risk as per CRR, excluding any amount related to transactions with other entities included in the Group consolidated solvency ratio computation. 270 POSITION, FX AND COMMODITY RISKS Risk exposure amounts for market risks are to be computed at each entity level following CRR. Entities shall report the contribution to the total risk exposure amounts for position, FX and commodity risk of the group. The sum of amounts reported here corresponds to the amount reported in row 520 “TOTAL RISK EXPOSURE AMOUNTS FOR POSITION, FOREIGN EXCHANGE AND COMMODITY RISKS” of the consolidated report. 280 OPERATIONAL RISK In case of AMA, the reported risk exposure amounts for operational risk include the effect of diversification. Fixed overheads shall be included in this column. 290 OTHER RISK EXPOSURE AMOUNTS The amount to be reported in this column corresponds to the risk exposure amount not especially listed above. 300-400 CONTRIBUTION TO OWN FUNDS This part of the template does not intend to impose that institutions perform a full computation of the total capital ratio at the level of each entity. Columns 300 to 350 shall be reported for those consolidated entities which contribute to own funds by minority interest, qualifying Tier 1 capital and / or qualifying own funds. Subject to the threshold defined in the last paragraph of Part II, chapter 2.3 above, columns 360 to 400 shall be reported for all consolidated entities which contribute to the consolidated own funds. Own funds brought to an entity by the rest of entities included within the scope of the reporting entity shall not to be taken into account, only the net contribution to the group own funds shall be reported in this column, that is mainly the own funds raised from third parties and accumulated reserves. The information reported in the following columns shall be according to the solvency rules applicable to the reporting institution. 300-350 QUALIFYING OWN FUNDS INCLUDED IN CONSOLIDATED OWN FUNDS The amount to be reported as “QUALIFYING OWN FUNDS INCLUDED IN CONSOLIDATED OWN FUNDS” shall be the amount as derived from Title II of Part Two of CRR, excluding any fund brought in by other group entities. 300 QUALIFYING OWN FUNDS INCLUDED IN CONSOLIDATED OWN FUNDS
Article 87 of CRR

68
310 QUALIFYING TIER 1 INSTRUMENTS INCLUDED IN CONSOLIDATED TIER 1 CAPITAL
Article 85 of CRR
320 MINORITY INTERESTS INCLUDED IN CONSOLIDATED COMMON EQUITY TIER 1 CAPITAL
Article 84 of CRR
The amount to be reported is the amount of minority interests of a subsidiary that is included in consolidated CET1 according to CRR. 330 QUALIFYING TIER 1 INSTRUMENTS INCLUDED IN CONSOLIDATED ADDITIONAL TIER 1 CAPITAL
Article 86 of CRR
The amount to be reported is the amount of qualifying T1 capital of a subsidiary that is included in consolidated AT1 according to CRR. 340 QUALIFYING OWN FUNDS INSTRUMENTS INCLUDED IN CONSOLIDATED TIER 2 CAPITAL
Article 88 of CRR
The amount to be reported is the amount of qualifying own funds of a subsidiary that is included in consolidated T2 according to CRR. 350 MEMORANDUM ITEM: GOODWILL (-) / (+) NEGATIVE GOODWILL 360-400 CONSOLIDATED OWN FUNDS
Article 18 CRR
The amount to be reported as “CONSOLIDATED OWN FUNDS” is the amount as derived from the balance sheet, excluding any fund brought in by other group entities. 360 CONSOLIDATED OWN FUNDS 370 OF WHICH: COMMON EQUITY TIER 1 380 OF WHICH: ADDITIONAL TIER 1 390 OF WHICH: CONRIBUTIONS TO CONSOLIDATED RESULT The contribution of each entity to the consolidated result (profit or loss (-)) is reported. This includes the results attributable to minority interests. 400 OF WHICH: (-) GOODWILL / (+) NEGATIVE GOODWILL Goodwill or negative goodwill of the reporting entity on the subsidiary is reported here. 410-480 CAPITAL BUFFERS The structure of the reporting of capital buffers for the GS template follows the general structure of the template CA4, using the same reporting concepts. When reporting the

69 capital buffers for the GS template, the relevant amounts shall be reported in accordance with the provisions applicable to determine the buffer requirement for the consolidated situation of a group. Therefore, the reported amounts of capital buffers represent the contributions of each entity to group capital buffers. The amounts reported shall be based on the national transposition measures of CRD and on CRR, including any transitional provisions provided for therein. 410 COMBINED BUFFER REQUIREMENT
Article 128 point (6) of CRD
420 CAPITAL CONSERVATION BUFFER
Article 128 point (1) and 129 of CRD
According to Article 129 (1) the capital conservation buffer is an additional amount of Common Equity Tier 1 capital. Due to the fact that the capital conservation buffer rate of 2.5% is stable, an amount shall be reported in this cell. 430 INSTITUTION SPECIFIC COUNTERCYCLICAL CAPITAL BUFFER
Article 128 point (2), Article 130 and 135-140 of CRD
In this cell the concrete amount of the countercyclical buffer shall be reported. 440 CONSERVATION BUFFER DUE TO MACRO-PRUDENTIAL OR SYSTEMIC RISK IDENTIFIED AT THE LEVEL OF A MEMBER STATE
Article 458 (2) point d (iv) of CRR
In this cell the amount of the conservation buffer due to macro-prudential or systemic risk identified at the level of a Member State, which can be requested according to Article 458 of CRR in addition to the capital conservation buffer shall be reported. 450 SYSTEMIC RISK BUFFER Articles 128 point (5), 133 and 134 of CRD In this cell the amount of the systemic risk buffer shall be reported. 470 GLOBAL SYSTEMICALLY IMPORTANT INSTITUTION BUFFER Articles 128 point (3) and 131 of CRD In this cell the amount of the Global Systemically Important Institution buffer shall be reported. 480 OTHER SYSTEMICALLY IMPORTANT INSTITUTION BUFFER Articles 128 point (4) and 131 of CRD In this cell the amount of the Other Systemically Important Institution buffer shall be reported.

70
3. Credit Risk Templates
3.1. General remarks
38. There are different sets of templates for the Standardised approach and the IRB
approach for credit risk. Additionally, separate templates for the geographical breakdown of positions subject to credit risk shall be reported if the relevant threshold as set out in Article 5(a)(4) is exceeded.
3.1.1. Reporting of CRM techniques with substitution effect
39. Article 235 of CRR describes the computation procedure of the exposure which
is fully protected by unfunded protection.
40. Article 236 of CRR describes the computation procedure of exposure which is
fully protected by unfunded protection in the case of full protection / partial protection — equal seniority.
41. Articles 196, 197 and 200 of CRR regulate the funded credit protection.
42. Reporting of exposures to obligors (immediate counterparties) and protection
providers which are assigned to the same exposure class shall be done as an inflow as well as an outflow to the same exposure class.
43. The exposure type does not change because of unfunded credit protection.
44. If an exposure is secured by an unfunded credit protection, the secured part is
assigned as an outflow e.g. in the exposure class of the obligor and as an inflow in the exposure class of the protection provider. However, the type of the exposure does not change due to the change of the exposure class.
45. The substitution effect in the COREP reporting framework shall reflect the risk
weighting treatment effectively applicable to the covered part of the exposure. As such, the covered part of the exposure is risk weighted according to the SA approach and shall be reported in the CR SA template.
3.1.2. Reporting of Counterparty Credit Risk
46. Exposures stemming from Counterparty Credit Risk positions shall be reported
in templates CR SA or CR IRB independent from whether they are Banking Book items or Trading Book items.
3.2. C 07.00 - Credit and counterparty credit risks and free deliveries: Standardised Approach to Capital Requirements (CR SA)
3.2.1. General remarks
47. The CR SA templates provide the necessary information on the calculation of
own funds requirements for credit risk according to the standardised approach. In particular, they provide detailed information on:

71 a) the distribution of the exposure values according to the different, exposure types, risk weights and exposure classes ; b) the amount and type of credit risk mitigation techniques used for mitigating the risks.
3.2.2. Scope of the CR SA template
48. According to Article 112 of CRR each SA exposure shall be assigned to one of
the 16 SA exposure classes in order to calculate the own funds requirements.
49. The information in CR SA is required for the total exposure classes and individually for each of the exposure classes as defined for the standardised approach. The
total figures as well as the information of each exposure class are reported in a separate dimension.
50. However the following positions are not within the scope of CR SA:
(a) Exposures assigned to exposure class ‘items representing securitisation positions’ according to Article 112 (m) of CRR which shall be reported in the CR SEC templates. (b) Exposures deducted from own funds.
51. The scope of the CR SA template covers the following own funds requirements:
(a) Credit risk in accordance with Chapter 2 (Standardised Approach) of Title II of
Part Three of CRR in the banking book, among which Counterparty credit risk in
accordance with Chapter 6 (Counterparty credit risk) of Title II of Part Three of CRR in the banking book; (b) Counterparty credit risk in accordance with Chapter 6 (Counterparty credit risk) of Title II of Part Three of CRR in the trading book; (c) Settlement risk arising from free deliveries in accordance with Article 379 of CRR in respect of all the business activities.
52. The scope of the template are all exposures for which the own funds requirements are calculated according to part 3 title II chapter 2 of CRR in conjunction with
part 3 title II chapter 4 and 6 of CRR. Institutions that apply Article 94 (1) of CRR
also need to report their trading book positions in this template when they apply part 3 title II chapter 2 of CRR to calculate the own funds requirements thereof (part 3 title II chapter 2 and 6 and title V of CRR). Therefore the template provides not only detailed information on the type of the exposure (e.g. on balance sheet/ off balance sheet items), but also information on the allocation of risk weights within the respective exposure class.
53. In addition CR SA includes memorandum items in rows 290 to 320 in order to
collect further information about exposures secured by mortgages on immovable property and exposures in default.

72
54. These memorandum items shall only be reported for the following exposure classes:
(a) Central governments or central banks (Article 112 point (a) of CRR) (b) Regional governments or local authorities (Article 112 point (b) of CRR) (c) Public sector entities (Article 112 point (c) of CRR) (d) Institutions (Article 112 point (f) of CRR) (e) Corporates (Article 112 point (g) of CRR) (f) Retail (Article 112 point (h) of CRR).
55. The reporting of the memorandum items affect neither the calculation of the risk
weighted exposure amounts of the exposure classes according to Article 112 points a) to c) and f) to h) of CRR nor of the exposure classes according to Article 112 points i) and j) of CRR reported in CR SA.
56. The memorandum rows provide additional information about the obligor structure of the exposure classes 'in default' or 'secured by immovable property'. Exposures shall be reported in these rows where the obligors would have been reported in
the exposure classes ‘Central governments or central banks’, ‘Regional governments or local authorities’, ‘Public sector entities’, ‘Institutions’, ‘Corporates’ and ‘Retail’ of CR SA, if those exposures were not assigned to the exposure classes 'in default' or 'secured by immovable property'. However the figures reported are the same as used to calculate the risk weighted exposure amounts in the exposure classes ‘in default’ or ‘secured by immovable property.
57. E.g. if an exposure, the risk exposure amounts of which are calculated subject to
Article 127 of CRR and the value adjustments are less than 20%, then this information is reported in CR SA, row 320 in the total and in the exposure class ‘in default’. If this exposure, before it defaulted, was an exposure to an institution then this
information shall also be reported in row 320 of exposure class 'institutions'.
3.2.3. Assignment of exposures to exposure classes under the Standardised Approach
58. In order to ensure a consistent categorisation of exposures into the different exposure classes as defined in Article 112 of CRR the following sequential approach
shall be applied:
(a) In the first step the Original exposure pre conversion factors is classified into the corresponding (original) exposure class as referred to in Article 112 of CRR, without prejudice to the specific treatment (risk weight) that each specific exposure shall receive within the assigned exposure class. (b) In a second step the exposures may be redistributed to other exposure classes due to the application of credit risk mitigation (CRM) techniques with substitution effects on the exposure (e.g. guarantees, credit derivatives, financial collateral simple method) via inflows and outflows.

73
59. The following criteria apply for the classification of the Original exposure pre
conversion factors into the different exposure classes (first step) without prejudice to the subsequent redistribution caused by the use of CRM techniques with substitution effects on the exposure or to the treatment (risk weight) that each specific exposure shall receive within the assigned exposure class.
60. For the purpose of classifying the original exposure pre conversion factor in the
first step, the CRM techniques associated to the exposure shall not be considered (note that they shall be considered explicitly in the second phase) unless a protection effect is intrinsically part of the definition of an exposure class as it is the case in the exposure class mentioned in Article 112 point (i) of CRR (exposures secured by mortgages on immovable property).
61. Article 112 of CRR does not provide criteria for disjoining the exposure classes.
This might imply that one exposure could potentially be classified in different exposure classes if no prioritisation in the assessment criteria for the classification is provided. The most obvious case arises between exposures to institutions and corporate with a short-term credit assessment (Article 112 point (n) of CRR) and exposures to institutions (Article 112 point (f) of CRR)/ exposures to corporates (Article 112 point (g) of CRR). In this case it is clear that there is an implicit prioritisation in CRR since it shall be assessed first if a certain exposure fit for being assigned to Short-term exposures to institutions and corporate and only afterwards do the same process for exposures to institutions and exposures to corporates. Otherwise it is obvious that the exposure class mentioned in Article 112 point (n) of CRR shall never be assigned an exposure. The example provided is one of the most obvious examples but not the only one. It is worth noting that the criteria used for establishing the exposure classes under the standardised approach are different (institutional categorisation, term of the exposure, past due status, etc.) which is the underlying reason for non disjoint groupings.
62. For a homogeneous and comparable reporting it is necessary to specify prioritisation assessment criteria for the assignment of the Original exposure pre conversion
factor by exposure classes, without prejudice to the specific treatment (risk weight) that each specific exposure shall receive within the assigned exposure class. The prioritisation criteria presented below using a decision tree scheme are based on the assessment of the conditions explicitly laid down in CRR for an exposure to fit in a certain exposure class and, if it is the case, on any decision on the part of the reporting institutions or the supervisor on the applicability of certain exposure classes. As such, the outcome of the exposure assignment process for reporting purposes would be in line with CRR provisions. This does not preclude institutions to apply other internal assignment procedures that may also be consistent with all relevant CRR provisions and its interpretations issued by the appropriate fora.
63. An exposure class shall be given priority to others in the assessment ranking in
the decision tree (i.e. it shall be first assessed if an exposure can be assigned to it, without prejudice to the outcome of that assessment) if otherwise no exposures would potentially be assigned to it. This would be the case when in the absence of prioritisation criteria one exposure class would be a subset of others. As such the criteria graphically depicted in the following decision tree would work on a sequential process.

74
64. With this background the assessment ranking in the decision tree mentioned below would follow the following order:
1. Securitisation positions;
2. Items associated with particular high risk;
3. Equity exposures
4. Exposures in default;
5. Exposures in the form of units or shares in collective investment undertakings (‘CIU’)/ Exposures in the form of covered bonds (disjoint exposure classes);
6. Exposures secured by mortgages on immovable property;
7. Other items;
8. Exposures to institutions and corporates with a short-term credit assessment;
9. All other exposure classes (disjoint exposure classes) which include Exposures to central
governments or central banks; Exposures to regional governments or local authorities; Exposures to public sector entities; Exposures to multilateral development banks; Exposures to international organisations; Exposures to institutions; Exposures to corporate and Retail exposures.
65. In the case of exposures in the form of units or shares in collective investment
undertakings and where the look through approach (Article 132 (3) to (5) of CRR) is used, the underlying individual exposures shall be considered and classified into their corresponding risk weight line according to their treatment, but all the individual exposures shall be classified within the exposure class of exposures in the form of units or shares in collective investment undertakings (‘CIU’).
66. In the case of “nth” to default credit derivatives specified in Article 134 (6) of
CRR, if they are rated, they shall be directly classified as securitisation positions. If they are not rated, they shall be considered in the “Other items” exposure class. In this latter case the nominal amount of the contract shall be reported as the Original exposure pre conversion factors in the line for “Other risk weights” (the risk weight used shall be that specified by the sum indicated under Article 134 (6) of CRR.
67. In a second step, as a consequence of credit risk mitigation techniques with substitution effects, exposures shall be reallocated to the exposure class of the protection
provider.

75
DECISION TREE ON HOW TO ASSIGN THE ORIGINAL EXPOSURE PRE CONVERSION FACTORS TO THE EXPOSURE CLASSES OF THE STANDARDISED APPROACH ACCORDING TO CRR Original exposure pre conversion factors Does it fit for being assigned to the exposure class of Article 112 (m)? YES Securitisation positions NO Does it fit for being assigned to the exposure class of Article 112point (k)? YES Items associated with particular high risk (also see Article 128) NO Does it fit for being assigned to the exposure class of Article 112 point (p)? YES Equity exposures (also see Article 133) NO Does it fit for being assigned to the exposure class of Article 112 point (j)? YES Exposures in default NO Does it fit for being assigned to the exposure classes of Article 112 points (l) and (o)? YES Exposures in the form of units or shares in collective investment undertakings (CIU) Exposures in the form of covered bonds (also see Article 129) These two exposure classes are disjoint among themselves (see comments on

76 the look-through approach in the answer above). Therefore the assignment to one of them is straightforward. NO Does it fit for being assigned to the exposure class of Article 112 point (i)? YES Exposures secured by mortgages on immovable property (also see Article 124) NO Does it fit for being assigned to the exposure class of Article 112 point (q)? YES Other items NO Does it fit for being assigned to the exposure class of Article 112 point (n)? YES Exposures to institutions and corporates with a short-term credit assessment NO The exposure classes below are disjoint among themselves. Therefore the assignment to one of them is straightforward. Exposures to central governments or central banks Exposures to regional governments or local authorities Exposures to public sector entities Exposures to multilateral development banks Exposures to international organisations Exposures to institutions Exposures to corporates Retail exposures

77
3.2.4. Clarifications on the scope of some specific exposure classes referred to in Article 112
of CRR
3.2.4.1. Exposure Class “Institutions”
68. Reporting of intra-group exposures according to Article 113 (6) to (7) of CRR
shall be done as follows:
69. Exposures which fulfil the requirements of Article 113 (7) of CRR shall be reported in the respective exposure classes where they would be reported if they were
no intra-group exposures.
70. According Article 113 (6) and (7) of CRR “an institution may, subject to the
prior approval of the competent authorities, decide not to apply the requirements of paragraph 1 of this Article to the exposures of that institution to a counterparty which is its parent undertaking, its subsidiary, a subsidiary of its parent undertaking or an undertaking linked by a relationship within the meaning of Article 12(1) of Directive 83/349/EEC.” This means that intra-group counterparties are not necessarily institutions but also undertakings which are assigned to other exposure classes, e.g. ancillary services undertakings or undertakings within the meaning of Article 12 (1) of Directive 83/349/EEC. Therefore intra-group exposures shall be reported in the corresponding exposure class.
3.2.4.2. Exposure Class “Covered Bonds”
71. The assignment of SA exposures to the exposure class “covered bonds” shall be
done as follows:
72. Bonds as defined in Article 52 (4) of Directive 2009/65/EC shall fulfil the requirements of Article 129 (1) to (2) of CRR to be classified in the exposure class
“Covered Bonds”. The fulfilment of those requirements has to be checked in each case. Nevertheless, bonds according to Article 52 (4) of Directive 2009/65/EC and issued before 31 December 2007, are also assigned to the exposure class “Covered Bonds” because of Article 129 (6) of CRR.
3.2.4.3. Exposure class “Collective Investment Undertakings”
73. Where the possibility according to Article 132 (5) of CRR is used, exposures in
the form of units or shares in CIUs shall be reported as on balance sheet items according to Article 111 (1) sentence 1 of CRR.
3.2.5. Instructions concerning specific positions
Columns
010 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE PRE CONVERSION FACTORS
Exposure value according to Article 111 of CRR without taking into account value adjustments and provisions, conversion factors and the effect of credit risk mitigation techniques with the following qualifications stemming from Article 111 (2) of CRR:

78
For Derivative instruments, repurchase transactions, securities or commodities lending or borrowing transactions, long settlement transactions and margin lending transactions subject to part 3 title II chapter 6 of CRR or subject to Article 92 (3) point (f) of CRR, the original exposure shall correspond to the Exposure Value for Counterparty Credit Risk calculated according to the methods laid down in part 3 title II chapter 6 of CRR. Exposure values for leases are subject to Article 134 (7) of CRR. In case of on-balance sheet netting laid down in Article 219 of CRR the exposure values shall be reported according to the received cash collateral. In the case of master netting agreements covering repurchase transactions and / or securities or commodities lending or borrowing transactions and/ or other capital market driven transactions subject to part 3 title II chapter 6 of CRR, the effect of Funded Credit Protection in the form of master netting agreements as under Article 220 (4) of CRR shall be included in column 010. Therefore, in the case of master netting agreements covering repurchase transactions subject to the provisions in part 3 title II chapter 6 of CRR, E* as calculated under Articles 220 and 221 of CRR shall be reported in column 010 of the CR SA template. 030 (-) Value adjustments and provision associated with the original exposure
Article 24 and 111 of CRR
Value adjustments and provisions for credit losses made in accordance with the accounting framework to which the reporting entity is subject to. 040 Exposure net of value adjustments and provisions Sum of columns 010 and 030. 050 - 100 CREDIT RISK MITIGATION (CRM) TECHNIQUES WITH SUBSTITUTION EFFECTS ON THE EXPOSURE Credit risk mitigation techniques as defined in Article 4 (57) of CRR that reduce the credit risk of an exposure or exposures via the substitution of exposures as defined below in Substitution of the exposure due to CRM. If collateral has an effect on the exposure value (e.g. if used for credit risk mitigation techniques with substitution effects on the exposure) it shall be capped at the exposure value. Items to be reported here:

collateral, incorporated according to Financial Collateral Simple Method;
eligible unfunded credit protection.
Please also see instructions of point 3.1.1.
050 - 060 Unfunded credit protection: adjusted values (Ga)
Article 235 of CRR
Article 239 (3) of CRR defines the adjusted value Ga of an unfunded credit protection.

79
050 Guarantees
Article 203 of CRR
Unfunded Credit Protection as defined in Article 4 (59) of CRR different from Credit Derivatives. 060 Credit derivatives
Article 204 of CRR.
070 – 080 Funded credit protection
These columns refer to funded credit protection according to Article 4 (58) of CRR and Articles 196, 197 and 200 of CRR. The amounts shall not include master netting agreements (already included in Original Exposure pre conversion factors). Credit Linked Notes and on-balance sheet netting positions resulting from eligible onbalance sheet netting agreements according to Articles 218 and 219 of CRR shall be treated as cash collateral. 070 Financial collateral: simple method
Article 222 (1) to (2) of CRR.
080 Other funded credit protection
Article 232 of CRR.
090 - 100 SUBSTITUTION OF THE EXPOSURE DUE TO CRM Articles 222 (3), Article 235 (1) to (2) and Article 236 of CRR. Outflows correspond to the covered part of the Original Exposure pre conversion factors, that is deducted from the obligor's exposure class and subsequently assigned to the protection provider's exposure class. This amount shall be considered as an Inflow into the protection provider's exposure class. Inflows and outflows within the same exposure classes shall also be reported. Exposures stemming from possible in- and outflows from and to other templates shall be taken into account. 110 NET EXPOSURE AFTER CRM SUBSTITUTION EFFECTS PRE CONVERSION FACTORS Amount of the exposure net of value adjustments after taking into account outflows and inflows due to CREDIT RISK MITIGATION (CRM) TECHNIQUES WITH SUBSTITUTION EFFECTS ON THE EXPOSURE 120-140 CREDIT RISK MITIGATION TECHNIQUES AFFECTING THE EXPOSURE AMOUNT. FUNDED CREDIT PROTECTION, FINANCIAL COLLATERAL COMPREHENSIVE METHOD Articles 223, 224, 225, 226, 227 and 228 of CRR. It also includes credit linked notes (Article 218 of CRR) Credit Linked Notes and on-balance sheet netting positions resulting from eligible onbalance sheet netting agreements according to Articles 218 and 219 of CRR are treated as cash collateral.

80
The effect of the collateralization of the Financial Collateral Comprehensive Method applied to an exposure, which is secured by eligible financial collateral, is calculated according to Articles 223, 224, 225, 226, 227 and 228 of CRR. 120 Volatility adjustment to the exposure
Article 223 (2) to (3) of CRR.
The amount to be reported is given by the impact of the volatility adjustment to the exposure (Eva-E) = EHe 130 (-) Financial collateral adjusted value (Cvam)
Article 239 (2) of CRR.
For trading book operations includes financial collateral and commodities eligible for trading book exposures according to Article 299 (2) points (c) to (f) of CRR. The amount to be reported corresponds to Cvam= C(1-Hc-Hfx)(t-t)/(T-t*). For a definition of C, Hc, Hfx, t, T and t* see part 3 title II chapter 4 section 4 and 5 of CRR. 140 (-) Of which: Volatility and maturity adjustments
Article 223 (1) of CRR and Article 239 (2) of CRR.
The amount to be reported is the joint impact of volatility and maturity adjustments (Cvam-C) = C*[(1-Hc-Hfx)(t-t)/(T-t*)-1], where the impact of volatility adjustment is (Cva-C) = C*[(1-Hc-Hfx)-1] and the impact of maturity adjustments is (Cvam-Cva)= C*(1-Hc-Hfx)[(t-t)/(T-t*)-1] 150 Fully adjusted exposure value (E*)
Article 220 (4), Article 223 (2) to (5) and Article 228 (1) of CRR.
160 - 190 Breakdown of the fully adjusted exposure value of off-balance sheet items by conversion factors
Article 111 (1) and Article 4 (56) of CRR. See also Article 222 (3) and Article 228 (1)
of CRR.
The figures reported shall be the fully adjusted exposure values before application of the conversion factor. 200 Exposure value
Article 111 of CRR and Part 3 title II chapter 4 section 4 of CRR.
Exposure value after taking into account value adjustments, all credit risk mitigants and credit conversion factors that is to be assigned to risk weights according to Article 113 and part 3 title II chapter 2 section 2 of CRR. 210 Of which: Arising from Counterparty Credit Risk For Derivative instruments, repurchase transactions, securities or commodities lending or borrowing transactions, long settlement transactions and margin lending transactions subject to part 3 title II chapter 6 of CRR, the exposure value for Counterparty Credit Risk calculated according to the methods laid down in part 3 title II chapter 6 sections 2, 3, 4, 5 of CRR. 215 Risk weighted exposure amount pre SME-supporting factor

81
Article 113 (1) to (5) of CRR without taking into account the SME-supporting factor
according to Article 501 of CRR.
220 Risk weighted exposure amount after SME-supporting factor
Article 113 (1) to (5) of CRR taking into account the SME-supporting factor according
to Article 500 of CRR.
230 Of which: with a credit assessment by a nominated ECAI
Article 112 a) to d), f), g), l), n) o) and q) of CRR
240 Of which: with a credit assessment derived from central government
Article 112 b) to d), f), g), l) and o) of CRR
Rows Instructions
010 Total exposures
015 of which: Defaulted exposures in exposure classes “items associated with a particular high risk” and “equity exposures”Article 127 CRR This row shall only be reported in exposure classes ‘Items associated with a particular high risk’ and ‘Equity exposures’. If an exposure is either listed in Article 128 (2) of CRR or meets the criteria set in Articles 128 (3) or 133 of CRR, it shall be assigned to the exposure class “Items associated with particular high risk” or “Equity exposures”. Consequently, there shall be no other allocation, even if the exposure is defaulted according to Article 127 of CRR. 020 of which: SME All exposures to SME shall be reported here. 030 of which: Exposures subject to the SME-supporting factor Only exposures which meet the requirements of Article 501 CRR shall be reported here. 040 of which: Secured by mortgages on immovable property - Residential property
Article 125 of CRR.
Only reported in exposure class 'Secured by mortgages on immovable property' 050 of which: Exposures under the permanent partial use of the standardised approach Exposures treated under Article 150(1) of CRR 060 of which: Exposures under the standardised approach with prior supervisory permission to carry out a sequential IRB implementation Exposures treated under Article 148(1) of CRR 070-130 BREAKDOWN OF TOTAL EXPOSURES BY EXPOSURE TYPES Reporting institution´s “banking book” positions shall be broken-down, following the criteria provided below, into on-balance sheet exposures subject to credit risk, off-balance sheet exposures subject to credit risk and exposures subject to counterparty credit risk. Reporting institution´s “trading book” counterparty credit risk positions according to Article 92 (3) point (f) and Article 299 (2) of CRR are assigned to the exposures subject to

82 counterparty credit risk. Institutions that apply Article 94 (1) of CRR also break down their “trading book” positions following the criteria provided below, into on-balance sheet exposures subject to credit risk, off-balance sheet exposures subject to credit risk and exposures subject to counterparty credit risk. 070 On balance sheet exposures subject to credit risk Assets referred to in Article 24 of CRR not included in any other category. Exposures, which are on-balance sheet items and which are included as Securities Financing Transactions, Derivatives & Long Settlement Transactions or from Contractual Cross Product Netting shall be reported in rows 090, 110 and 130, and therefore shall not be reported in this row. Free deliveries according to Article 379 (1) of CRR (if not deducted) do not constitute an on-balance sheet item, but nevertheless shall be reported in this row. Exposures arising from assets posted to a CCP according to Article 4 (90) of CRR and default fund exposures according to Article 4 (89) of CRR shall be included if not reported in row 030. 080 Off balance sheet exposures subject to credit risk Off-balance sheet positions comprise those items listed in Annex I of CRR. Exposures, which are off-balance sheet items and which are included as Securities Financing Transactions, Derivatives & Long Settlement Transactions or from Contractual Cross Product Netting shall be reported in rows 040, 060 and, therefore, not reported in this row. Exposures arising from assets posted to a CCP according to Article 4 (90) of CRR and default fund exposures according to Article 4 (89) of CRR shall be included if they are considered as off-balance sheet items. 090-130 Exposures / Transactions subject to counterparty credit risk 090 Securities Financing Transactions Securities Financing Transactions (SFT), as defined in paragraph 17 of the Basel Committee document "The Application of Basel II to Trading Activities and the Treatment of Double Default Effects", includes: (i) Repurchase and reverse repurchase agreements defined in Article 4 (82) of CRR as well as securities or commodities lending and borrowing transactions; (ii) margin lending transactions as defined in Article 272 (3) of CRR. 100 Of which: centrally cleared through a QCCP
Article 306 of CRR for qualifying CCPs according to Articles 4 (88) in conjunction with
Article 301 (2) of CRR.
Trade exposures to a CCP according to Article 4 (91) of CRR 110 Derivatives and Long Settlement Transactions Derivatives comprise those contract listed in Annex II of CRR. Long Settlement Transactions as defined in Article 272 (2) of CRR. Derivatives and Long Settlement Transactions which are included in a Cross Product Netting and therefore reported in row 130, shall not be reported in this row. 120 Of which: centrally cleared through a QCCP

83
Article 306 of CRR for qualifying CCPs according to Articles 4 (88) in conjunction with
Article 301 (2) of CRR
Trade exposures to a CCP according to Article 4 (91) of CRR 130 From Contractual Cross Product Netting Exposures that due to the existence of a contractual cross product netting (as defined in
Article 272 (11) of CRR) cannot be assigned to either Derivatives & Long Settlement
Transactions or Securities Financing Transactions, shall be included in this row. 140-280 BREAKDOWN OF EXPOSURES BY RISK WEIGHTS 140 0 % 150 2 %
Article 306 (1) of CRR
160 4 %
Article 305 (3) of CRR
170 10 %
180 20 %
190 35 %
200 50 %
210 70%
Article 232 (3) point (c) of CRR.
220 75 %
230 100 %
240 150 %
250 250 %
Articles 133 (2) and 48(4) CRR
260 370 %
Article 471 of CRR

84
270 1250 %
Articles 133 (2), 379 of CRR
280 Other risk weights
This row is not available for exposure classes Government, Corporates, Institutions and Retail. For reporting those exposures not subject to the risk weights listed in the template.
Article 113 (1) to (5) of CRR.
Unrated nth to default credit derivatives under the Standardized Approach (Article 134 (6) of CRR) shall be reported in this row under the exposure class "Other items". See also Article 124 (2) and Article 152 (2) point (b) of CRR. 290-320 Memorandum Items See also the explanation of the purpose of the memorandum items in the general section of the CR SA. 290 Exposures secured by mortgages on commercial immovable property
Article 112 point (i) of CRR
This is a memorandum item only. Independent from the calculation of risk exposure amounts of exposures secured by commercial immovable property according to Article 124 and 126 of CRR the exposures shall be broken down and reported in this row based on the criteria whether the exposures are secured by commercial real estate. 300 Exposures in default subject to a risk weight of 100%
Article 112 point (j) of CRR.
Exposures included in the exposure class “exposures in default” which shall be included in this exposure class if they were not in default. 310 Exposures secured by mortgages on residential property
Article 112 point (i) of CRR.
This is a memorandum item only. Independent from the calculation of risk exposure amounts of exposures secured by mortgages on residential property according to Article 124 and 125 of CRR the exposures shall be broken down and reported in this row based on the criteria whether the exposures are secured by real estate property. 320 Exposures in default subject to a risk weight of 150%
Article 112 point (j) of CRR.
Exposures included in the exposure class “exposures in default” which shall be included in this exposure class if they were not in default.

85
3.3. Credit and counterparty credit risks and free deliveries: IRB Approach to Own funds
Requirements (CR IRB)
3.3.1. Scope of the CR IRB template
74. The scope of the CR IRB template covers own funds requirements for:
i. Credit risk in the banking book, among which:
 Counterparty credit risk in the banking book;  Dilution risk for purchased receivables;
ii. Counterparty credit risk in the trading book;
iii. Free deliveries resulting from all business activities..
75. The scope of the template refers to the exposures for which the risk weighted
exposure amounts are calculated according to Articles 151 to 157 Part Three Title II
Chapter 3 CRR (IRB approach).
76. The CR IRB template does not cover the following data:
i. Equity exposures, which are reported in the CR EQU IRB template;
ii. Securitisation positions, which are reported in the CR SEC and/or CR SEC Details templates;
iii. “Other non-obligation assets”, according to Article 147 (2) point (g) CRR. The
risk weight for this exposure class has to be set at 100 % at any time except for cash in hand, equivalent cash items and exposures that are residual values of leased assets, according to Article 156 CRR. The risk weighted exposure amounts for this exposure class are reported directly in the CA-Template;
iv. Credit valuation adjustment risk, which is reported on the CVA Risk template;
The CR IRB template does not require a geographical breakdown of IRB exposures by residence of the counterparty. This breakdown is reported in the template CR GB.
77. In order to clarify whether the institution uses its own estimates for LGD and/or
credit conversion factors the following information shall be provided for each reported exposure class:
"NO" = in case the supervisory estimates of LGD and credit conversion factors are used (Foundation IRB) "YES" = in case own estimates of LGD and credit conversion factors are used (Advanced IRB) In any case, for the reporting of the retail portfolios "YES" has to be reported.

86
In case an institution uses own estimates of LGDs to calculate risk weighted exposure amounts for a part of its IRB exposures as well as uses supervisory LGDs to calculate risk weighted exposure amounts for the other part of its IRB exposures, an CR IRB Total for F-IRB positions and one CR IRB Total for A-IRB positions has to be reported.
3.3.2. Breakdown of the CR IRB template
78. The CR IRB consists of two templates. CR IRB 1 provides a general overview
of IRB exposures and the different methods to calculate total risk exposure amounts as well as a breakdown of total exposures by exposure types. CR IRB 2 provides a breakdown of total exposures assigned to obligor grades or pools. The templates CR IRB 1 and CR IRB 2 shall be reported separately for the following exposure and subexposure classes:
1) Total
(The Total template must be reported for the Foundation IRB and, separately for the Advanced IRB approach.)
2) Central banks and central governments
(Article 147 (2) (a) CRR)
3) Institutions
(Article 147 (2) point (b) CRR)
4.1) Corporate – SME
(Article 147 (2) point (c) CRR
4.2) Corporate – Specialised lending
(Article 147 (8) CRR)
4.3) Corporate – Other
(All corporates according to article 147 (2) point (c), not reported under 4.1 and 4.2). 5.1) Retail – Secured by immovable property SME (Exposures reflecting Article 147 (2) point (d) in conjunction with Article 154 (3) CRR which are secured by immovable property). 5.2) Retail – Secured by immovable property non-SME (Exposures reflecting Article 147 (2) point (d) CRR which are secured by immovable property and not reported under 5.1). 5.3) Retail – Qualifying revolving (Article 147 (2) point (d) in conjunction with Article 154 (4) CRR). 5.4) Retail – Other SME (Article 147 (2) point (d) not reported under 5.1 and 5.3). 5.5) Retail – Other non – SME (Article 147 (2) point (d) CRR which were not reported under 5.2 and 5.3).
3.3.3. C 08.01 - Credit and counterparty credit risks and free deliveries: IRB Approach to Capital Requirements (CR IRB 1)
3.3.3.1 Instructions concerning specific positions
Columns Instructions

87
010 INTERNAL RATING SYSTEM/ PD ASSIGNED TO THE OBLIGOR GRADE OR POOL (%) The PD assigned to the obligor grade or pool to be reported shall be based on the provisions laid down in Article 180 of CRR. For each individual grade or pool, the PD assigned to the specific obligor grade or pool shall be reported. For figures corresponding to an aggregation of obligor grades or pools (e.g. total exposures) the exposure weighted average of the PDs assigned to the obligor grades or pools included in the aggregation shall be provided. The exposure value (column 110) shall be used for the calculation of the exposureweighted average PD. For each individual grade or pool the PD assigned to the specific obligor grade or pool shall be reported. All reported risk parameters shall be derived from the risk parameters used in the internal rating system approved by the respective competent authority. It is neither intended nor desirable to have a supervisory master scale. If the reporting institution applies a unique rating system or is able to report according to an internal master scale, this scale is used. Otherwise, the different rating systems shall be merged and ordered according to the following criteria: Obligor grades of the different rating systems shall be pooled and ordered from the lower PD assigned to each obligor grade to the higher. Where the institution uses a large number of grades or pools, a reduced number of grades or pools to be reported may be agreed with the competent authorities. Institutions shall contact their competent authority in advance, if they want to report a different number of grades in comparison with the internal number of grades. For the purposes of weighting the average PD the exposure value reported in column 110 is used. All exposures, including defaulted exposures are to be considered for the purpose of the calculation of the exposure weighted average PD (e.g. for “total exposure”). Defaulted exposures are those assigned to the last rating grade/s with a PD of 100 %. 020 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE PRE CONVERSION FACTORS Institutions report the exposure value before taking into account any value adjustments, provisions, effects due to credit risk mitigation techniques or credit conversion factors. The original exposure value shall be reported in accordance with Article 24 of CRR and
Article 166 (1) and (2) and (4) to (7) of CRR.
The effect resulting from Article 166 (3) of CRR (effect of on balance sheet netting of loans and deposits) is reported separately as Funded Credit Protection and therefore shall not reduce the Original Exposure. 030 OF WHICH: LARGE FINANCIAL SECTOR ENTITIES AND UNREGULATED FINANCIAL ENTITIES Breakdown of the original exposure pre conversion factor for all exposures defined according to Article 142 (4) and (5) CRR subject to the higher correlation according to Article 153 (2) CRR.

88
040-080 CREDIT RISK MITIGATION (CRM) TECHNIQUES WITH SUBSTITUTION EFFECTS ON THE EXPOSURE Credit risk mitigation techniques as defined in article 4 (57) of CRR that reduce the credit risk of an exposure or exposures via the substitution of exposures as defined below in “SUBSTITUTION OF THE EXPOSURE DUE TO CRM”. 040-050 UNFUNDED CREDIT PROTECTION Unfunded credit protection: Values as they are defined in Article 4 (59) of CRR. If collateral has an effect on the exposure (e.g. if used for credit risk mitigation techniques with substitution effects on the exposure) it shall be capped at the exposure value. 040 GUARANTEES:
When own estimates of LGD are not used, the Adjusted Value (Ga) as defined in Article 236 of CRR shall be provided. When Own estimates of LGD are used, (Article 183 of CRR, except paragraph 3), the relevant value used in the internal model shall be reported. Guarantees shall be reported in column 040 when the adjustment is not made in the LGD. When the adjustment is made in the LGD, the amount of the guarantee shall be reported in column 150. Regarding exposures subject to the double default treatment, the value of unfunded credit protection is re-ported in column 220. 050 CREDIT DERIVATIVES:
When own estimates of LGD are not used, the Adjusted Value (Ga) as defined in Article 216 of CRR shall be provided. When own estimates of LGD are used (Article 183 of CRR), the relevant value used in the internal modelling shall be reported. When the adjustment is made in the LGD, the amount of the credit derivatives shall be reported in column 160 Regarding exposures subject to the double default treatment the value of unfunded credit protection shall be reported in column 220. 060 OTHER FUNDED CREDIT PROTECTION If collateral has an effect on the exposure (e.g. if used for credit risk mitigation techniques with substitution effects of the exposure), it shall be capped at the exposure value. When own estimates of LGD are not used, Article 232 of CRR shall be applied. When own estimates of LGD are used, those credit risk mitigants that comply with the criteria in Article 212 of CRR shall be reported. The relevant value used in the internal model shall be reported. To be reported in column 060 when the adjustment is not made in the LGD. When an adjustment is made in the LGD the amount shall be reported in column 170.

89
070-080 SUBSTITUTION OF THE EXPOSURE DUE TO CRM Outflows correspond to the covered part of the Original Exposure pre conversion factors, that is deducted from the obligor's exposure class and, when relevant, obligor grade or pool, and subsequently assigned to the protection provider's exposure class and, when relevant, obligor grade or pool. This amount shall be considered as an Inflow into the protection provider's exposure class and, when relevant, obligor grades or pools. Inflows and outflows within the same exposure classes and, when relevant, obligor grades or pools shall also be considered. Exposures stemming from possible in- and outflows from and to other templates shall be taken into account. 090 EXPOSURE AFTER CRM SUBSTITUTION EFFECTS PRE CONVERSION FACTORS Exposure assigned in the corresponding obligor grade or pool and exposure class after taking into account outflows and inflows due to CRM techniques with substitution effects on the exposure. 100, 120 Of which: Off Balance Sheet Items See CR-SA instructions 110 EXPOSURE VALUE The value in accordance with Article 166 of CRR and Article 230 (1) sentence 2 of CRR are reported. For the instruments as defined in Annex I, the credit conversion factors (Article 166 (8) to (10) of CRR) irrespective the approach chosen by the institution, are applied. For rows 040-060 (securities financing transactions, derivatives and long settlement transactions and exposures from contractual cross-product netting) subject to part 3 title II chapter 6 of CRR, the Exposure Value is the same as the value for Counterparty Credit Risk calculated according to the methods laid down in part 3 title II chapter 6 sections 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7 of CRR. These values are reported in this column and not column 130 ‘Of which:
arising from counterparty credit risk’.
130 Of which: Arising from counterparty Credit Risk See CR SA instructions.
140 OF WHICH: LARGE FINANCIAL SECTOR ENTITIES AND UNREGULATED FINANCIAL ENTITIES Breakdown of the exposure value for all exposures defined according to Article 142 (4) and (5) CRR subject to the higher correlation according to Article 153 (2) CRR.

90
150-210 CREDIT RISK MITIGATION TECHNIQUES TAKEN INTO ACCOUNT IN LGD ESTIMATES EXCLUDING DOUBLE DEFAULT TREATMENT CRM techniques that have an impact on LGDs as a result of the application of the substitution effect of CRM techniques shall not be included in these columns. Where own estimates of LGD are not used: Articles 228 (2), 230 (1) and (2), 231 of CRR Where own estimates of LGD are used:

Regarding unfunded credit protection, for exposures to central government and central
banks, institutions and corporates: Article 161 paragraph 3 of CRR. For retail exposures
Article 164 (2) of CRR.
Regarding funded credit protection collateral taken into account in the LGD estimates
according to points (e) and (f) of Article 181(1) of CRR.
150 GUARANTEES
See instructions to column 040.
160 CREDIT DERIVATIVES
See instructions to column 050.
170 OWN ESTIMATES OF LGDS ARE USED: OTHER FUNDED CREDIT PROTECTION The relevant value used in the internal modelling of the institution. Those credit risk mitigants that comply with the criteria in Article 212 of CRR. 180 ELIGIBLE FINANCIAL COLLATERAL For trading book operations includes financial instruments and commodities eligible for trading book exposures according to Article 299 paragraph 2 point. (c) to (f) of CRR Credit linked Notes and on -balance sheet netting according to Part 3 Title II Chapter 4 Section 4 of CRR are treated as cash collateral. When own estimates of LGD are not used: values in accordance with Article 193 (1) to (4) and Article 194 (1) of CRR. The adjusted value (Cvam) as set out in Article 223 (2) of CRR is reported. When own estimates of LGD are used: financial collateral taken into account in the LGD estimates according to Article 181 (1) points (e) and (f) of CRR. The amount to be reported shall be the estimated market value of the collateral. 190-210 OTHER ELIGIBLE COLLATERAL Where own estimates of LGD are not used: Article 199 (1) to (8) of CRR and Article 229 of CRR . Where own estimates of LGD are used: other collateral taken into account in the LGD estimates according to Article 181 (1) points (e) and (f) of CRR. 190 REAL ESTATE

91
Where own estimates of LGD are not used, values in accordance with Article 199 (2) to (4) of CRR shall be reported. Leasing of real estate property is also included (see Article 199 (7) of CRR). See also Article 229 of CRR. When own estimates of LGD are used the amount to be reported shall be the estimated market value. 200 OTHER PHYSICAL COLLATERAL Where own estimates of LGD are not used, values in accordance with Article 199 (6) and (8) of CRR shall be reported. Leasing of property different from real estate is also included (see Article 199 (7) of CRR). See also Article 229 (3) of CRR. Where own estimates of LGD are used the amount to be reported shall be the estimated market value of collateral. 210 RECEIVABLES When own estimates of LGD are not used, values in accordance with Articles 199 (5), 229 (2) of CRR are reported. When own estimates of LGD are used, the amount to be reported shall be the estimated market value of collateral. 220 SUBJECT TO DOUBLE DEFAULT TREATMENT: UNFUNDED CREDIT PROTECTION Guarantees and credit derivatives covering exposures subject to the double default treatment reflecting Articles 202 and 217 (1) of CRR. See also columns 040 ‘Guarantees’ and 050 ‘Credit derivatives’. 230 EXPOSURE WEIGHTED AVERAGE LGD (%) All the impact of CRM techniques on LGD values as specified in Part 3 Title II Chapters 3 and 4 of CRR shall be considered. In the case of exposures subject to the double default treatment the LGD to be reported shall correspond to the one selected according to Article 161 (4) of CRR. For defaulted exposures, provisions laid down in Article 181 (1) point (h) of CRR shall be considered. The definition of exposure value as in Column 110 shall be used for the calculation of the exposure-weighted averages. All effects shall be considered (so the floor applicable to mortgages shall be included in the reporting). For institutions applying the IRB approach but not using their own estimates of LGD the risk mitigation effects of financial collateral are reflected in E*, the fully adjusted value of the exposure, and then reflected in LGD* according to Article 228 (2) CRR. The exposure weighted average LGD associated to each PD “obligor grade or pool” shall result from the average of the prudential LGDs, assigned to the exposures of that PD grade/pool, weighted by the respective exposure value of Column 110. If own estimates of LGD are applied Article 175 and Article 181 (1) and (2) of CRR shall be considered.

92
In the case of exposures subject to the double default treatment the LGD to be reported shall correspond to the one selected according to Article 161 (4) of CRR. The calculation of the exposure weighted average LGD shall be derived from the risk parameters really used in the internal rating system approved by the respective competent authority. Data shall not be reported for specialized lending exposures referred to in article 153 (5). Exposure and the respective LGD´s for large regulated financial sector entities and unregulated financial entities shall not be included in the calculation of column 230, they shall only be included in the calculation of column 240. 240 EXPOSURE WEIGHTED AVERAGE LGD (%) FOR LARGE FINANCIAL SECTOR ENTITIES AND UNREGULATED FINANCIAL ENTITIES Exposure weighted average LGD (%) for all exposures defined according to Article 142 (4) and (5) CRR subject to the higher correlation according to Article 153 (2) CRR. 250 EXPOSURE-WEIGHTED AVERAGE MATURITY VALUE (DAYS) The value reported reflects Article 162 of CRR. The exposure value (Column 110) shall be used for the calculation of the exposure-weighted averages. The average maturity is reported in days. This data shall not be reported for the exposure values for which the maturity is not an element in the calculation of risk weighted exposure amounts. This means that this column shall not be filled in for the exposure class “retail”. 255 RISK WEIGHTED EXPOSURE AMOUNT PRE SME-SUPPORTING FACTOR For Central governments and Central Banks, Corporate and Institutions see Article 153 (1) and (3) of CRR. For Retail see Article 154 (1) of CRR. The SME-supporting factor according to Article 501 of CRR shall not be taken into account. 260 RISK WEIGHTED EXPOSURE AMOUNT AFTER SME-SUPPORTING FACTOR For Central governments and Central Banks, Corporate and Institutions see Article 153 (1) and (3) of CRR. For Retail see Article 154 (1) of CRR. The SME-supporting factor according to Article 501 of CRR shall be taken into account. 270 OF WHICH: LARGE FINANCIAL SECTOR ENTITIES AND UNREGULATED FINANCIAL ENTITIES Breakdown of the risk weighted exposure amount after SME supporting factor for all exposures defined according to Article 142 (4) and (5) CRR subject to the higher correlation according to Article 153 (2) CRR. 280 EXPECTED LOSS AMOUNT For the definition of Expected Loss see Article 5 (3) of CRR and, for calculation see Article 158 of CRR. The expected loss amount to be reported shall be based on the risk parameters really used in the internal rating system approved by the respective competent authority.

93
290 (-) VALUE ADJUSTMENTS AND PROVISIONS
Value Adjustments as well as specific and general provisions under Article 159 CRR are reported. General provisions shall be reported by assigning the amount pro rata - according to the expected loss of the different obligor grades. 300 NUMBER OF OBLIGORS Articles 172 (1) and (2) of CRR. For all exposure classes with the exception of the exposure class retail and the cases mentioned in Article 172 (1) lit. e, second sentence CRR, the institution shall report the number of legal entities /obligors which were separately rated, regardless of the number of different loans or exposures granted. Within the exposure class retail or if separate exposures to the same obligor are assigned to different obligor grades in accordance with Article 172 (1) lit. e, second sentence CRR in other exposure classes, the institution shall report the number of exposures which were separately assigned to a certain rating grade or pool. In case Article 172 (2) of CRR applies, an obligor may be considered in more than one grade. As this column deals with an element of the structure of the rating systems, it relates to the original exposures pre conversion factor assigned to each obligor grade or pool without taking into account the effect of CRM techniques (in particular redistribution effects). Rows Instructions 010 TOTAL EXPOSURES 015 of which: Exposures subject to SME-supporting factor Only exposures which meet the requirements of Article 501 CRR shall be reported here. 020-060 BREAKDOWN OF TOTAL EXPOSURES BY EXPOSURE TYPES:
020 On balance sheet items subject to credit risk Assets referred to in Article 24 of CRR not included in any other category. Exposures, which are on-balance sheet items and which are included as Securities Financing Transactions, Derivatives & Long Settlement Transactions or from Contractual Cross Product Netting shall be reported in rows 040-060 and, therefore, not reported in this row. Free deliveries according to Article 379 (1) of CRR (if not deducted) do not constitute an on-balance sheet item, but nevertheless shall be reported in this row. Exposures arising from assets posted to a CCP according to Article 4 (91) of CRR and default fund exposures according to Article 4 (89) of CRR shall be included if not reported in row 030. 030 Off balance sheet items subject to credit risk Off-balance sheet positions comprise those items listed in Annex I of CRR.

94
Exposures, which are off-balance sheet items and which are included as Securities Financing Transactions, Derivatives & Long Settlement Transactions or from Contractual Cross Product Netting shall be reported in rows 040-060 and, therefore, not reported in this row. Exposures arising from assets posted to a CCP according to Article 4 (91) of CRR and default fund exposures according to Article 4 (89) of CRR shall be included if they are considered as off-balance sheet items. 040-060 Exposures / Transactions subject to counterparty credit risk 040 Securities Financing Transactions Securities Financing Transactions (SFT), as defined in paragraph 17 of the Basel Committee document "The Application of Basel II to Trading Activities and the Treatment of Double Default Effects", includes: (i) Repurchase and reverse repurchase agreements defined in Article 4 (82) of CRR as well as securities or commodities lending and borrowing transactions and (ii) margin lending transactions as defined in Article 272 (3) of CRR. Securities Financing Transactions, which are included in a Cross Product Netting and therefore reported in row 060, shall not be reported in this row. 050 Derivatives and Long Settlement Transactions Derivatives comprise those contracts listed in Annex II of CRR. Derivatives and Long Settlement Transactions which are included in a Cross Product Netting and therefore reported in row 060 shall not be reported in this row. 060 From Contractual Cross Product Netting See CR SA instructions 070 EXPOSURES ASSIGNED TO OBLIGOR GRADES OR POOLS: TOTAL For exposures to corporates, institutions and Central governments and Central Banks see
Article 142 (1) point (6) and Article 170 (1) point c) of CRR.
For retail exposures see Article 170 (3) point b) of CRR. For Exposures arising from purchased receivables see Article 166 (6) of CRR. Exposures for dilution risk of purchased receivables shall not be reported by obligor grades or pools and shall be reported in row 180. Where the institution uses a large number of grades or pools, a reduced number of grades or pools to be reported may be agreed with the competent authorities. A master scale is not used. Instead, institutions shall determine the scale to be used themselves. 080 SPECIALIZED LENDING SLOTTING CRITERIA: TOTAL
Article 153 (5) of CRR. This only applies to the corporates, institutions and central governments and central banks exposure classes.
090-150 BREAKDOWN BY RISK WEIGHTS OF TOTAL EXPOSURES UNDER SPECIALIZED LENDING SLOTTING CRITERIA:
120 Of which: In category 1

95
Article 153 (5) table 1 of CRR.
160 ALTERNATIVE TREATMENT: SECURED BY REAL ESTATE Articles 193 (1) and (2), 194 (1) to (7) and 230 (3) of CRR. 170 EXPOSURES FROM FREE DELIVERIES APPLYING RISK WEIGHTS UNDER THE ALTERNATIVE TREATMENT OR 100% AND OTHER EXPOSURES SUBJECT TO RISK WEIGHTS Exposures arising from free deliveries for which the alternative treatment referred to in
Article 379 (2) first subparagraph, last sentence of CRR is used or for which a 100% risk
weight is applied according to Article 379 (2) last subparagraph of CRR. Unrated nth to default credit derivatives under Article 153 (8) of CRR and any other exposure subject to risk weights not included in any other row shall be reported in this row. 180 DILUTION RISK: TOTAL PURCHASED RECEIVABLES See Article 4 (53) of CRR for a definition of dilution risk. For calculation of risk weight for dilution risk see Article 157 (1) of CRR. According to Article 166 (6) of CRR the exposure value of purchased receivables shall be the outstanding amount minus the risk weighted exposure amounts for dilution risk prior to credit risk mitigation.
3.3.4. C 08.02 - Credit and counterparty credit risks and free deliveries: IRB approach to capital requirements (breakdown by obligor grades or pools (CR IRB 2 template)
Column Instructions
005 Obligor grade (row identifier)
This is a row identifier and shall be unique for each row on a particular sheet of the table. It shall follow the numerical order 1, 2, 3, etc. 010-300 Instructions for each of these columns are the same as for the corresponding numbered columns in table CR IRB 1. Row Instructions 010-001 – 010- NNN Values reported in these rows must be in ordered from the lower to the higher according to the PD assigned to the obligor grade or pool. PD of obligors in default shall be 100%. Exposures subject to the alternative treatment for real estate collateral (only available when not using own estimates for the LGD) shall not be assigned according to the PD of the obligor and not reported in this template.

96
3.4. Credit and counterparty credit risks and free deliveries: Information with geographical
breakdown
79. All institutions shall submit information aggregated at a total level. Additionally,
institutions fulfilling the threshold set in Article 5 (a) (4) of this Regulation shall submit information broken down by country regarding the domestic country as well as any non-domestic country. The threshold is only applicable to Table 1 and Table
2. Exposures to supranational organisations shall be assigned to the geographical area
“other countries”.
80. The term ‘residence of the obligor’ refers to the country of incorporation of the
obligor. This concept can be applied on an immediate-obligor basis and on an ultimate-risk basis. Hence, CRM techniques with substitution effects can change the allocation of an exposure to a country. Exposures to supranational organisations shall not be assigned to the country of residence of the institution but to the geographical area “Other countries” irrespective of the exposure class where the exposure to supranational organisations is assigned.
81. Data regarding ‘original exposure pre conversion factors’ shall be reported referring to the country of residence of the immediate obligor. Data regarding ‘exposure value’ and ‘Risk weighted exposure amounts’ shall be reported as of the country
of residence of the ultimate obligor.
3.4.1. C 09.01 – Geographical breakdown of exposures by residence of the obligor: SA exposures (CR GB 1)
3.4.1.1. Instructions concerning specific positions
Columns
010 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE PRE CONVERSION FACTORS
Same definition as for column 010 of CR SA template 020 Defaulted exposures Original exposure pre conversion factors for those exposures which have been classified as “exposures in default” and for defaulted exposures assigned to the exposure classes “exposures associated with particularly high risk” or “equity exposures”. This ‘memorandum item’ provides additional information about the obligor structure of defaulted exposures. Exposures classified as “exposures in default” in accordance with
Article 112 point (j) CRR shall be reported where the obligors would have been
reported if those exposures were not assigned to the exposure classes 'exposures in default'. This information is a ‘memorandum item’ – hence does not affect the calculation of risk weighted exposure amounts of exposure classes “exposures in default”, “exposures associated with particularly high risk” or “equity exposures” according to Article 112 points (j), (k) respectively (p) of CRR. 040 Observed new defaults for the period

97
The amount of original exposures which have moved into exposure class “Exposures in default” during the 3-month period since the last reporting reference date shall be reported against the exposure class to which the obligor originally belonged. 050 General credit risk adjustments Credit risk adjustments according to Article 110 of CRR. This item shall include the general credit risk adjustments that are eligible for inclusion in T2 capital, before the application of the cap referred to in Article 62 (c) of CRR. The amount to be reported shall be gross of tax effects. 055 Specific credit risk adjustments Credit risk adjustments according to Article 110 of CRR. 060 Write-offs Write-offs include both reductions of the carrying of impaired financial assets recognised directly in profit or loss [IFRS 7.B5.(d).(i)] and reductions in the amounts of the allowance accounts charged against the impaired financial assets [IFRS 7.B5.(d).(ii)]. 070 Credit risk adjustments/write-offs for observed new defaults Sum of credit risk adjustments and write-offs for those exposures which were classified as “defaulted exposures” during the 3-month period since the last data submission. 075 Exposure value Same definition as for column 200 of CR SA template 080 RISK WEIGHTED EXPOSURE AMOUNT PRE SME-SUPPORTING FACTOR Same definition as for column 215 of CR SA template 090 RISK WEIGHTED EXPOSURE AMOUNT AFTER SME-SUPPORTING FACTOR Same definition as for column 220 of CR SA template Rows 010 Central governments or central banks
Article 112 point (a) of CRR.
020 Regional governments or local authorities
Article 112 point (b) of CRR.
030 Public sector entities
Article 112 point (c) of CRR.

98
040 Multilateral developments banks
Article 112 point (d) of CRR.
050 International organisations
Article 112 point (e) of CRR.
060 Institutions
Article 112 point (f) of CRR.
070 Corporates
Article 112 point (g) of CRR.
075 of which: SME
Same definition as for row 020of CR SA template 080 Retail
Article 112 point (h) of CRR.
085 of which: SME
Same definition as for row 020of CR SA template 090 Secured by mortgages on immovable property
Article 112 point (i) of CRR.
095 of which: SME
Same definition as for row 020of CR SA template 100 Exposures in default
Article 112 point (j) of CRR.
110 Items associated with particularly high risk
Article 112 point (k) of CRR.
120 Covered bonds
Article 112 point (l) of CRR.
130 Claims on institutions and corporates with a short-term credit assessment
Article 112 point (n) of CRR.
140 Collective investments undertakings (CIU)
Article 112 point (o) of CRR.
150 Equity exposures
Article 112 point (p) of CRR.

99
160 Other exposures
Article 112 point (q) of CRR.
170 Total exposures
3.4.2. C 09.02 – Geographical breakdown of exposures by residence of the obligor: IRB exposures (CR GB 2)
3.4.2.1. Instructions concerning specific positions
Columns
010 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE PRE CONVERSION FACTORS
Same definition as for column 020 of CR IRB template 030 Of which defaulted Original exposure value for those exposures which have been classified as “defaulted exposures” according to CRR article 178. 040 Observed new defaults for the period The amount of original exposures which have moved into exposure class “Exposures in default” during the 3-month period since the last reporting reference date shall be reported against the exposure class to which the obligor originally belonged. 050 General credit risk adjustments Credit risk adjustments according to Article 110of CRR. 055 Specific credit risk adjustments Credit risk adjustments according to Article 110 of CRR. 060 Write-offs Write-offs include both reductions of the carrying of impaired financial assets recognised directly in profit or loss [IFRS 7.B5.(d).(i)] and reductions in the amounts of the allowance accounts charged against the impaired financial assets [IFRS 7.B5.(d).(ii)]. 070 Credit risk adjustments/write-offs for observed new defaults Sum of credit risk adjustments and write-offs for those exposures which were classified as “defaulted exposures” during the 3-month period since the last data submission. 080 INTERNAL RATING SYSTEM/ PD ASSIGNED TO THE OBLIGOR GRADE OR POOL (%) Same definition as for column 010 of CR IRB template 090 EXPOSURE WEIGHTED AVERAGE LGD (%)

100
Same definition as for columns 230 and 240 of CR IRB template: the exposure weighted average LGD (%) shall refer to all exposures, including exposures to large financial sector entities and unregulated financial entities. Provisions laid down in Article 181 (1) point h) of CRR shall apply. Data shall not be reported for specialized lending exposures referred to in article 153 (5). 100 Of which: defaulted Exposure weighted LGD for those exposures which have been classified as “defaulted exposures” according to Article 178 of CRR. 105 Exposure value Same definition as for column 110 of CR IRB template. 110 RISK WEIGHTED EXPOSURE AMOUNT PRE SME-SUPPORTING FACTOR Same definition as for column 255 of CR IRB template 120 Of which defaulted Risk weighted exposure amount for those exposures which have been classified as “defaulted exposures” according to Article 178 of CRR. 125 RISK WEIGHTED EXPOSURE AMOUNT AFTER SME-SUPPORTING FACTOR Same definition as for column 260 of CR IRB template 130 EXPECTED LOSS AMOUNT Same definition as for column 280 of CR IRB template Rows 010 Central banks and central governments (Article 147 (2) (a) CRR) 020 Institutions (Article 147 (2) point (b) CRR) 030 Corporates (All corporates according to article 147 (2) point (c).) 042 Of which: Specialized lending (excl. SL subject to slotting criteria) (Article 147 (8) a CRR) Data shall not be reported for specialized lending exposures referred to in article 153 (5). 045 Of which: Specialized lending subject to slotting criteria

101
Articles 147(8) lit. a and 153(5) CRR
050 Of which: SME
(Article 147 (2) point (c) CRR)
060 Retail
All Retail exposures according to Article 147 (2) point (d) 070 Retail – Secured by real estate property Exposures reflecting Article 147 (2) point (d) CRR which are secured by real estate. 080 SME Retail exposures reflecting Article 147 (2) point (d) in conjunction with Article 153 (3) CRR which are secured by real estate. 090 non-SME Retail exposures reflecting Article 147 (2) point (d) CRR which are secured by real estate. 100 Retail – Qualifying revolving (Article 147 (2) point (d) in conjunction with Article 154 (4) CRR). 110 Other Retail Other retail exposures according to Article 147 (2) point (d) not reported in rows 070 - 100. 120 SME Other retail exposures reflecting Article 147 (2) point (d) in conjunction with Article 153 (3) CRR. 130 non-SME Other retail exposures reflecting Article 147 (2) point (d) CRR. 140 Equity Equity exposures reflecting Article 147 (2) point (e) CRR. 150 Total exposures

102
3.4.3. C 09.04 – Breakdown of credit exposures relevant for the calculation of the countercyclical buffer by country and institution-specific countercyclical buffer rate (CCB)
3.4.3.1. General remarks
82. This table aims at receiving more information regarding the elements of the institution-specific countercyclical capital buffer. The information required refers to
the own funds requirements determined in accordance with Part Three, Title II and Title IV of CRR and the geographical location for credit exposures, securitisation exposures and trading book exposures relevant for the calculation of the institution specific counter-cyclical capital buffer (CCB) in accordance with Article 140 CRD (relevant credit exposures).
83. Information in template C 09.04 shall be reported for the ‘Total’ of relevant
credit exposures across all jurisdictions where these exposures are located and individually for each of the jurisdictions in which relevant credit exposures are located. The total figures as well as the information of each jurisdiction shall be reported in a separate dimension.
84. The threshold set in Article 5 (a) (4) of this Regulation shall not apply for the
reporting of this breakdown.
85. In order to determine the geographical location, the exposures are allocated on
an immediate obligor basis as provided for in Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) No 1152/2014 of 4 June 2014 with regard to regulatory technical standards on the identification of the geographical location of the relevant credit exposures for calculating institution-specific countercyclical capital buffer rates. Therefore CRM techniques do not change the allocation of an exposure to its geographical location for the purpose of reporting information set out in this template.
3.4.3.2. Instructions concerning specific positions
Columns
010 Amount
The value of the relevant credit exposures and their associated own-funds requirements determined in accordance with the instructions for the respective row. 020 Percentage 030 Qualitative Information This information shall only be reported for the country of residence of the institution (the jurisdiction corresponding to its home Member State) and the ‘Total’ of all countries. Institutions shall report either {y} or {n} in accordance with the instructions for the relevant row.

103
Rows
010-020 Relevant credit exposures – Credit risk Relevant credit exposures defined in accordance with Article 140(4) (a) CRD. 010 Exposure value under the Standardised Approach Exposure value determined in accordance with Article 111 CRR for relevant credit exposures defined in accordance with Article 140(4) (a) CRD. The exposure value of securitisation positions in the banking book shall be excluded from this row and reported in row 055. 020 Exposure value under the IRB Approach Exposure value determined in accordance with Article 166 CRR for relevant credit exposures defined in accordance with Article 140(4) (a) CRD. The exposure value of securitisation positions in the banking book shall be excluded from this row and reported in row 055. 030-040 Relevant credit exposures – Market risk Relevant credit exposures defined in accordance with Article 140(4) (b) CRD. 030 Sum of long and short positions of trading book exposures for standardised approaches Sum of net long and net short positions according to Article 327 CRR of relevant credit exposures defined in accordance with Article 140(4) (b) CRD under Part Three, Title IV, Chapter 2 CRR:

exposures to debt instruments other than securitisation,
exposures to securitisation positions in the trading book,
exposures to correlation trading portfolios,
exposures to equity securities, and
exposures to CIUs if capital requirements are calculated according to Article
348 CRR.
040 Value of trading book exposures under internal model approaches For relevant credit exposures defined in accordance with Article 140(4)(b) CRD under Part Three, Title IV, Chapter 2 and Chapter 5 CRR, the sum of the following shall be reported:
Fair value of non-derivative positions, that represent relevant credit exposures
as defined in Article 140(4) (b) CRD, determined in accordance with Article 104 CRR.
Notional value of derivatives, that represent relevant credit exposures as defined in accordance with Article 140(4) (b) CRD.
055 Relevant credit exposures – Securitisation positions in the banking book Exposure value determined in accordance with Article 248 CRR for relevant credit exposures defined in accordance with Article 140(4) (c) CRD.

104
070-110 Own funds requirements and weights
070 Total own funds requirements for CCB
The sum of rows 080, 090 and 100.
080 Own funds requirements for relevant credit exposures – Credit risk Own funds requirements determined in accordance with Part Three, Title II, Chapter 1 to 4 and Chapter 6 CRR for relevant credit exposures, defined in accordance with Article 140(4) (a) of CRD, in the country in question. Own fund requirements for securitisation positions in the banking book shall be excluded from this row and reported in row 100. The own-funds requirements are 8% of the risk-weighted exposure amount determined according to the provisions of Part Three, Title II, Chapter 1 to 4 and Chapter 6 of CRR. 090 Own funds requirements for relevant credit exposures – Market risk Own funds requirements determined in accordance with Part Three, Title IV, Chapter 2 of CRR for specific risk, or in accordance with Part Three, Title IV, Chapter 5 of CRR for incremental default and migration risk for relevant credit exposures, defined in accordance with Article 140(4)(b) of CRD, in the country in question. The own funds requirements for relevant credit exposures under the market risk framework include, among others, the own fund requirements for securitisation positions under Part Three, Title IV, Chapter 2 CRR and the own funds requirements for exposures to Collective Investment Undertakings determined in accordance with Article 348 CRR. 100 Own funds requirements for relevant credit exposures – Securitisation positions in the banking book Own funds requirements determined in accordance with Part Three, Title II, Chapter 5 CRR for relevant credit exposures defined in accordance with Article 140(4) (c) CRD in the country in question. The own-funds requirements are 8% of the risk-weighted exposure amount determined according to the provisions of Part Three, Title II, Chapter 5 CRR. 110 Own funds requirements weights The weight applied to the countercyclical buffer rate in each country is calculated as a ratio of own fund requirements, determined as follows:

Numerator: The total own funds requirements that relates to the relevant
credit exposures in the country in question [r070; c010 country sheet ],
Denominator: The total own funds requirements that relate to all credit exposures relevant for the calculation of the countercyclical buffer in accordance with
Article 140(4) of CRD [r070; c010; ’Total’].
Information on the Own fund requirements weights shall not be reported for the ‘Total’ of all countries.

105
120-140 Countercyclical buffer rates
120 Countercyclical capital buffer rate set by the Designated Authority Countercyclical capital buffer rate set for the country in question by the Designated Authority of that country in accordance with Article 136, 137, 139, 140 (2) lit. a) and c) and 140 (3) lit. b) CRD. This row shall be left empty when no countercyclical buffer rate was set for the country in question by the Designated Authority of that country. Countercyclical capital buffer rates that were set by the Designated Authority, but are not yet applicable in the country in question at the reporting reference date shall not be reported. Information on the Countercyclical capital buffer rate set by the Designated Authority shall not be reported for the ‘Total’ of all countries. 130 Countercyclical capital buffer rate applicable for the country of the institution Countercyclical capital buffer rate applicable for the country in question which was set by the Designated Authority of the country of residence of the institution, in accordance with Article 137, 138, 139 and Article 140(2) b) and (3) lit. a) CRD. Countercyclical capital buffer rates that are not yet applicable at the reporting reference date shall not be reported. Information on the Countercyclical capital buffer rate applicable in the country of the institution shall not be reported for the ‘Total’ of all countries. 140 Institution-specific countercyclical capital buffer rate Institution-specific countercyclical capital buffer rate, determined in accordance with Article 140(1) CRD. The institution-specific countercyclical capital buffer rate is calculated as the weighted average of the countercyclical buffer rates that apply in the jurisdictions where the relevant credit exposures of the institution are located or are applied for the purposes of Article 140 by virtue of Article 139 (2) or (3) CRD. The relevant countercyclical buffer rate is reported in [r120; c020; country sheet], or [r130; c020; country sheet] as applicable. The weight applied to the countercyclical buffer rate in each country is the share of own funds requirements in total own funds requirements, and is reported in [r110; c020; country sheet]. Information on the institution-specific countercyclical capital buffer rate shall only be reported for the ‘Total’ of all countries and not for each country separately. 150 - 160 Use of the 2% threshold 150 Use of 2 % threshold for general credit exposure In accordance with Article 2 (5) (b) of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) No 1152/2014, foreign general credit risk exposures, whose aggregate does not exceed 2% of the aggregate of the general credit, trading book and securitisation exposures of that institution, may be allocated to the institutions’ home member state. The

106 aggregate of the general credit, trading book and securitisation exposures is calculated by excluding the general credit exposures located in accordance with Article 2 (5) point (a) and Article 2 (4) of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) No 1152/2014. If the institution makes use of this derogation, it shall indicate ‘y’ in the table for the jurisdiction corresponding to its home Member State and for the ‘Total’ of all countries. If an institution does not make use of this derogation, it shall indicate ‘n’ in the respective cell. 160 Use of 2 % threshold for trading book exposure In accordance with Article 3 (3) of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) No 1152/2014, institutions may allocate trading book exposures to their home Member State, if the total trading book exposures do not exceed 2% of their total general credit, trading book and securitisation exposures. If the institution makes use of this derogation, it shall indicate ‘y’ in the table for the jurisdiction corresponding to its home Member State and for the ‘Total’ of all countries. If an institution does not make use of this derogation, it shall indicate ‘n’ in the respective cell.
3.5. C 10.01 and C 10.02 – Equity exposures under the internal ratings based approach (CR
EQU IRB 1 and CR EQU IRB 2)
3.5.1. General remarks
86. The CR EQU IRB template consists of two templates: CR EQU IRB 1 provides
a general overview of IRB exposures of the equity exposure class and the different methods to calculate total risk exposure amounts. CR EQU IRB 2 provides a breakdown of total exposures assigned to obligor grades in the context of the PD/LGD approach. “CR EQU IRB” refers to both “CR EQU IRB 1” and “CR EQU IRB 2” templates, as applicable, in the following instructions.
87. The CR EQU IRB template provides information on the calculation of risk
weighted exposure amounts for credit risk (Article 92 (3) point (a) of CRR) according to the IRB method (Part Three, Title II, Chapter 3 of CRR) for equity exposures referred to in Article 147(2) point (e) of CRR.
88. According to Article 147 (6) of CRR, the following exposures shall be assigned
to the equity exposure class:
(a) non-debt exposures conveying a subordinated, residual claim on the assets or income of the issuer; or (b) debt exposures and other securities, partnerships, derivatives, or other vehicles, the economic substance of which is similar to the exposures specified in point (a).

107
89. Collective investment undertakings treated according to the simple risk weight
approach as referred to in Article 152 of CRR shall also be reported in the CR EQU IRB template.
90. In accordance with Article 151(1) of CRR, institutions shall provide the CR EQU
IRB template when applying one of the three approaches referred to in Article 155 of CRR:

the Simple Risk Weight approach,
the PD/LGD approach, or
the Internal Models approach.
Moreover, institutions applying the IRB approach shall also report in the CR EQU IRB template risk-weighted exposure amounts for those equity exposures which attract a fixed risk-weight treatment (without however being explicitly treated according to the Simple Risk Weight approach or the (temporary or permanent) partial use of the credit risk standardised approach (e.g. equity exposures attracting a risk-weight of 250% in accordance with Article 48(4) of CRR, respectively a risk-weight of 370% in accordance with Article 471(2) of CRR))).

The following equity claims shall not be reported in the CR EQU IRB template:

Equity exposures in the trading book (in case where institutions are not exempted from calculating own funds requirements for trading book positions according to Article 94 of CRR).
Equity exposures subject to the partial use of the standardised approach (Article 150 of CRR),
including:
Grandfathered equity exposures according to Article 495(1) of CRR,
Equity exposures to entities whose credit obligations are assigned a 0% risk weight under the
Standardised Approach, including those publicly sponsored entities where a 0% risk weight can be applied (Article 150(1) point (g) of CRR),
Equity exposures incurred under legislated programmes to promote specified sectors of the
economy that provide significant subsidies for the investment to the institution and involve some form of government oversight and restrictions on the equity investments (Article 150(1) point (h) of CRR).
Equity exposures to ancillary services undertakings whose risk weighted exposure amounts
may be calculated according to the treatment of “other non credit-obligation assets” (in accordance with Article 155(1) of CRR).
Equity claims deducted from own funds in accordance with Articles 46 and 48 of CRR.
3.5.2. Instructions concerning specific positions (applicable to both CR EQU IRB 1 and CR
EQU IRB 2)
Columns
005 OBLIGOR GRADE (ROW IDENTIFIER)

108
The obligor grade is a row identifier and shall be unique for each row in the table. It shall follow the numerical order 1, 2, 3, etc. 010 INTERNAL RATING SYSTEM PD ASSIGNED TO THE OBLIGOR GRADE (%) Institutions applying the PD/LGD approach report in column 010 the probability of default (PD) calculated in accordance with the provisions referred to in Article 165(1) of CRR. The PD assigned to the obligor grade or pool to be reported shall be in line with the minimum requirements as laid down in Part Three, Title II, Chapter 3, Section 6 of CRR. For each individual grade or pool, the PD assigned to that specific obligor grade or pool shall be reported. All reported risk parameters shall be derived from the risk parameters used in the internal rating system approved by the respective competent authority. For figures corresponding to an aggregation of obligor grades or pools (e.g. “total exposures”) the exposure weighted average of the PDs assigned to the obligor grades or pools included in the aggregation shall be provided. All exposures, including defaulted exposures are to be considered for the purpose of the calculation of the exposure weighted average PD. For the calculation of the exposureweighted average PD, the exposure value taking into account unfunded credit protection (column 060) shall be used for weighting purposes. 020 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE PRE CONVERSION FACTORS Institutions report in column 020 the original exposure value (pre conversion factors). According to the provisions laid down in Article 167 of CRR, the exposure value for equity exposures shall be the accounting value remaining after specific credit risk adjustments. The exposure value of off-balance sheet equity exposures shall be its nominal value after specific credit risk adjustments. Institutions also include in column 020 off balance sheet items referred to in Annex I of CRR assigned to the equity exposure class (e.g. “the unpaid portion of partly-paid shares”). Institutions applying the Simple Risk Weight approach or the PD/LGD approach (as referred to in Article 165(1) also consider the offsetting provisions referred to in Article 155(2) of CRR. 030- 040 CREDIT RISK MITIGATION (CRM) TECHNIQUES WITH SUBSTITUTION EFFECTS ON THE EXPOSURE UNFUNDED CREDIT PROTECTION GUARANTEES CREDIT DERIVATIVES Irrespective of the approach adopted for the calculation of risk weighted exposure amounts for equity exposures, institutions may recognize unfunded credit protection obtained on equity exposures (Article 155(2),(3) and (4) of CRR). Institutions applying the Simple Risk Weight approach or the PD/LGD approach report in

109 columns 030 and 040 the amount of unfunded credit protection under the form of guarantees (column 030) or credit derivatives (column 040) recognised in accordance with the methods set out in Part Three, Title II, Chapter 4 of CRR. 050 CREDIT RISK MITIGATION (CRM) TECHNIQUES WITH SUBSTITUTION EFFECTS ON THE EXPOSURE SUBSTITUTION OF THE EXPOSURE DUE TO CRM (-) TOTAL OUTFLOWS Institutions report in column 050 the part of the original exposure pre conversion factors covered by unfunded credit protection recognised in accordance with the methods set out in Part Three, Title II, Chapter 4 of CRR. 060 EXPOSURE VALUE Institutions applying the Simple Risk Weight approach or the PD/LGD approach report in column 060 the exposure value taking into account substitution effects stemming from unfunded credit protection (Article 155(2) and (3), Article 167 of CRR). As a reminder, in the case of equity off-balance sheet exposures, the exposure value shall be the nominal value after specific credit risk adjustments (Article 167 of CRR). 070 EXPOSURE WEIGHTED AVERAGE LGD (%) Institutions applying the PD/LGD approach report in column 070 of the CR EQU IRB 2 template the exposure weighted average of the LGDs assigned to the obligor grades or pools included in the aggregation; the same applies for row 020 of the CR EQU IRB template. The exposure value taking into account unfunded credit protection (column 060) shall be used for the calculation of the exposureweighted average LGD. Institutions shall take into accounts the provisions laid down in Article 165(2) of CRR. 080 RISK WEIGHTED EXPOSURE AMOUNT Institutions report risk-weighted exposure amounts for equity exposures in column 080, calculated in accordance with the provisions laid down in Article 155 of CRR. In case where institutions applying the PD/LGD approach do not have sufficient information to use the definition of default set out in Article 178 of CRR, a scaling factor of 1.5 shall be assigned to the risk weights when calculating risk weighted exposure amounts (Article 155(3) of CRR). With regard to the input parameter M (Maturity) to the risk-weight function, the maturity assigned to equity exposures equals 5 years (Article 165(3) of CRR). 090 MEMORANDUM ITEM: EXPECTED LOSS AMOUNT Institutions report in column 090 the expected loss amount for equity exposures calculated in accordance with Article 158(4), (7), (8) and (9) of CRR.

110
92. In accordance with Article 155 of CRR, institutions may employ different approaches (Simple Risk Weight approach, PD/LGD approach or Internal Models approach) to different portfolios when they use these different approaches internally.
Institutions shall also report in the CR EQU IRB 1 template risk-weighted exposure amounts for those equity exposures which attract a fixed risk-weight treatment (without however being explicitly treated according to the Simple Risk Weight approach or the (temporary or permanent) partial use of the credit risk Standardised approach). Rows CR EQU IRB 1 - row 020, PD/LGD APRROACH: TOTAL Institutions applying the PD/LGD approach (Article 155(3) of CRR) shall report the required information in row 020 of the CR EQU IRB 1 template. CR EQU IRB 1 - rows 050- 090 SIMPLE RISK WEIGHT APPROACH: TOTAL BREAKDOWN OF TOTAL EXPOSURES UNDER THE SIMPLE RISK WEIGHT APRROACH BY RISK WEIGHTS:
Institutions applying the Simple Risk Weight approach (Article 155(2) of CRR) shall report the required information according to the characteristics of the underlying exposures in rows 050 to 090. CR EQU IRB 1 - row 100 INTERNAL MODELS APPROACH Institutions applying the Internal Models approach (Article 155(4) of CRR) shall report the required information in row 100. CR EQU IRB 1 - row 110 EQUITY EXPOSURES SUBJECT TO RISK WEIGHTS Institutions applying the IRB approach shall report risk weighted exposure amounts for those equity exposures which attract a fixed risk weight treatment (without however being explicitly treated according to the Simple Risk Weight approach or the (temporary or permanent) partial use of the credit risk standardised approach). As an example,

the risk weighted exposure amount of equity positions in financial sector entities treated in accordance with Article 48(4) of CRR, as well as
equity positions risk-weighted with 370% in accordance with Article 471 (2)
CRR shall be reported in row 110.
CR EQU IRB
2
BREAKDOWN OF TOTAL EXPOSURES UNDER THE PD/LGD
APRROACH BY OBLIGOR GRADES:
Institutions applying the PD/LGD approach (Article 155(3) of CRR) shall report the required information in the CR EQU IRB 2 template. In case where institutions using the PD/LGD approach apply a unique rating system or are able to report according to an internal master scale, they report in CR EQU IRB 2 the rating grades or pools associated to this unique rating system /

111 masterscale. In any other case, the different rating systems shall be merged and ordered according to the following criteria: Obligor grades or pools of the different rating systems shall be pooled together and ordered from the lower PD assigned to each obligor grade or pool to the higher.
3.6. C 11.00 – Settlement/Delivery Risk (CR SETT)
3.6.1. General remarks
93. This template requests information on both trading and non-trading book transactions which are unsettled after their due delivery dates, and their corresponding
own funds requirements for settlement risk according to Articles 92(3) Point c) ii) and 378 of CRR.
94. Institutions report in the CR SETT template information on the settlement/delivery risk in connection with debt instruments, equities, foreign currencies and commodities held in their trading or non-trading book.
95. According to Article 378 of CRR, repurchase transactions, securities or commodities lending and securities or commodities borrowing in connection with debt
instruments, equities, foreign currencies and commodities are not subject to settlement/delivery risk. Note however that, derivatives and long settlement transactions unsettled after their due delivery dates are nevertheless subject to own funds requirements for settlement/delivery risk as determined in Article 378 of CRR.
96. In the case of unsettled transactions after the due delivery date, institutions calculate the price difference to which they are exposed. This is the difference between
the agreed settlement price for the debt instrument, equity, foreign currency or commodity in question and its current market value, where the difference could involve a loss for the institution.
97. Institutions multiply this difference by the appropriate factor of Table 1 of Article 378 of CRR to determine the corresponding own funds requirements.
98. According to Article 92(4) Point (b), the own funds requirements for settlement/delivery risk shall be multiplied by 12.5 to calculate the risk exposure amount.
99. Note that own funds requirements for free deliveries as laid down in Article 379
of CRR are not within the scope of the CR SETT template; the latter shall be reported in the credit risk templates (CR SA, CR IRB).
3.6.2. Instructions concerning specific positions
Columns
010 UNSETTLED TRANSACTIONS AT SETTLEMENT PRICE

112
In accordance with Article 378 of CRR, institutions report in this column 010 the unsettled transactions after their due delivery date at the respective agreed settlement prices. All unsettled transactions shall be included in this column 010, irrespective of whether or not they are at a gain or at a loss after the due settlement date. 020 PRICE DIFFERENCE EXPOSURE DUE TO UNSETTLED TRANSACTIONS In accordance with Article 378 of CRR, institutions report in column 020 the price difference between the agreed settlement price and its current market value for the debt instrument, equity, foreign currency or commodity in question, where the difference could involve a loss for the institution. Only unsettled transactions at a loss after the due settlement date shall be reported in column 020 030 OWN FUNDS REQUIREMENTS Institutions report in column 030 the own funds requirements calculated in accordance with Article 378 of CRR. 040 TOTAL SETTLEMENT RISK EXPOSURE AMOUNT In accordance with Article 92(4) point (b) of CRR, institutions multiply their own funds requirements reported in column 030 by 12.5 in order to obtain the settlement risk exposure amount. Rows 010 Total unsettled transactions in the Non-trading Book Institutions report in row 010 aggregated information in relation with settlement/delivery risk for non-trading book positions (in accordance with Articles 92(3) Point c) ii) and 378 of CRR). Institutions report in 010/010 the aggregated sum of unsettled transactions after their due delivery dates at the respective agreed settlement prices. Institutions report in 010/020 the aggregated information for price difference exposure due to unsettled transactions at a loss. Institutions report in 010/030 the aggregated own funds requirements derived from summing the own funds requirements for unsettled transactions by multiplying the “price difference” reported in column 020 by the appropriate factor based on the number of working days after due settlement date (categories referred to in
Table 1 of Article 378 of CRR).
020 to
060
Transactions unsettled up to 4 days (Factor 0%) Transactions unsettled between 5 and 15 days (Factor 8%)

113
Transactions unsettled between 16 and 30 days (Factor 50 %) Transactions unsettled between 31 and 45 days (Factor 75%) Transactions unsettled for 46 days or more (Factor 100%) Institutions report the information in relation with settlement/delivery risk for non-trading book positions according to the categories referred to in Table 1 of
Article 378 of CRR in rows 020 to 060.
No own funds requirements for settlement/delivery risk are required for transactions unsettled less than 5 working days after the due settlement date. 070 Total unsettled transactions in the Trading Book Institutions report in row 070 aggregated information in relation with settlement/delivery risk for trading book positions (in accordance with Articles 92(3) Point c) ii) and 378 of CRR). Institutions report in 070/010 the aggregated sum of unsettled transactions after their due delivery dates at the respective agreed settlement prices. Institutions report in 070/020 the aggregated information for price difference exposure due to unsettled transactions at a loss. Institutions report in 070/030 the aggregated own funds requirements derived from summing the own funds requirements for unsettled transactions by multiplying the “price difference” reported in column 020 by an appropriate factor based on the number of working days after due settlement date (categories referred to in
Table 1 of Article 378 of CRR).
080 to
120
Transactions unsettled up to 4 days (Factor 0%) Transactions unsettled between 5 and 15 days (Factor 8%) Transactions unsettled between 16 and 30 days (Factor 50 %) Transactions unsettled between 31 and 45 days (Factor 75%) Transactions unsettled for 46 days or more (Factor 100%) Institutions report the information in relation with settlement/delivery risk for trading book positions according to the categories referred to in Table 1 of Article 378 of CRR in rows 080 to 120. No own funds requirements for settlement/delivery risk are required for transactions unsettled less than 5 working days after the due settlement date.

114
3.7. C 13.01 - Credit Risk – Securitisations (CR SEC)
3.7.1. General remarks
100.In case the institution acts as originator, the information in this template shall be required for all securitisations for which a significant risk transfer is recognised. In case the institution acts as investor, all exposures shall be reported. 101.The information to be reported is contingent on the role of the institution as for the securitisation. As such, specific reporting items shall be applicable for originators, sponsors and investors. 102.This template gathers joint information on both traditional and synthetic securitisations held in the banking book.
3.7.2. Instructions concerning specific positions
Columns
0010 TOTAL AMOUNT OF SECURITISATION EXPOSURES ORIGINATED Originator institutions shall report the outstanding amount at the reporting date of all current securitisation exposures originated in the securitisation transaction, irrespective of who holds the positions. As such, on-balance sheet securitisation exposures (e.g. bonds, subordinated loans) as well as off-balance sheet exposures and derivatives (e.g. subordinated credit lines, liquidity facilities, interest rate swaps, credit default swaps, etc.) that have been originated in the securitisation shall be reported. In the case of traditional securitisations where the originator does not hold any position, the originator shall not consider that securitisation in the reporting of this template. For this purpose securitisation positions held by the originator shall include early amortisation provisions in a securitisation of revolving exposures, as defined under Article 242(16) of CRR. 0020-0040 SYNTHETIC SECURITISATIONS: CREDIT PROTECTION TO THE SECURITISED EXPOSURES Articles 251 and 252 of CRR. Maturity mismatches shall not be taken into account in the adjusted value of the credit risk mitigation techniques involved in the securitisation structure. 0020 (-) FUNDED CREDIT PROTECTION (CVA)

115
The detailed calculation procedure of the volatility-adjusted value of the collateral (CVA) which shall be reported in this column is established in Article 223(2) of CRR. 0030 (-) TOTAL OUTFLOWS: UNFUNDED CREDIT PROTECTION ADJUSTED VALUES (G*) Following the general rule for “inflows” and “outflows” the amounts reported under this column shall appear as “inflows” in the corresponding credit risk template (CR SA or CR IRB) and exposure class relevant for the protection provider (i.e. the third party to which the tranche is transferred by means of unfunded credit protection). The calculation procedure of the ‘foreign exchange risk’- adjusted nominal amount of the credit protection (G*) is established in Article 233(3) of CRR. 0040 NOTIONAL AMOUNT RETAINED OR REPURCHASED OF CREDIT PROTECTION All tranches which have been retained or bought back, e.g. retained first loss positions, shall be reported with their nominal amount. The effect of supervisory haircuts in the credit protection shall not be taken into account when computing the retained or repurchased amount of credit protection. 0050 SECURITISATION POSITIONS: ORIGINAL EXPOSURE PRE CONVERSION FACTORS Securitisation positions held by the reporting institution, calculated according to Article 248(1) and (2) of CRR, without applying credit conversion factors, gross of value adjustments and provisions and any non-refundable purchase price discounts on the securitised exposures according Art. 248 (1) (d) of CRR and gross of value adjustments and provisions on the securitisation position. Netting is only relevant with respect to multiple derivative contracts provided to the same SSPE, covered by an eligible netting agreement. In synthetic securitisations, the positions held by the originator in the form of on-balance sheet items and/or investor’s interest shall be the result of the aggregation of columns 0010 to 0040. 0060 (-) VALUE ADJUSTMENTS AND PROVISIONS
Article 248 of CRR. Value adjustments and provisions to be reported in this
column shall only refer to securitisation positions. Value adjustments of securitised exposures shall not be considered. 0070 EXPOSURE NET OF VALUE ADJUSTMENTS AND PROVISIONS

116
Securitisation positions according to Article 248 (1) and (2) of CRR, net of of value adjustments and provisions, without applying conversion factors and gross of any non-refundable purchase price discounts on the securitised exposures according Art. 248 (1) (d) of CRR and net of value adjustments and provisions on the securitisation position. 0080-0110 CREDIT RISK MITIGATION (CRM) TECHNIQUES WITH SUBSTITUTION EFFECTS ON THE EXPOSURE
Article 4(1)(57) of CRR, Part Three, Title II, Chapter 4 of CRR and Article
249 of CRR.
Institutions shall report in these columns information on credit risk mitigation techniques that reduce the credit risk of an exposure or exposures via the substitution of exposures (as indicated below for Inflows and Outflows). If collateral has an effect on the exposure value (e.g. if used for credit risk mitigation techniques with substitution effects on the exposure) it shall be capped at the exposure value. Items to be reported here:

collateral, incorporated according to Financial Collateral Simple
Method;
eligible unfunded credit protection.
0080 (-) UNFUNDED CREDIT PROTECTION: ADJUSTED VALUES (GA) Unfunded credit protection as defined in Article 4(1)(59), Article 234, 235 and 236 of CRR. 0090 (-) FUNDED CREDIT PROTECTION Funded credit protection as defined in Article 4(1)(58) of CRR, Art. 249 (2) para 1 of CRR and regulated in Articles 195, 197 and 200. Credit linked notes and on-balance sheet netting according to Articles 218 – 236 CRR shall be treated as cash collateral. 0100-0110 SUBSTITUTION OF THE EXPOSURE DUE TO CRM:
Inflows and outflows within the same exposure classes and, when relevant, risk weights or obligor grades shall be reported. 0100 (-) TOTAL OUTFLOWS Articles 222(3), 235 (1) and (2) and 236 of CRR. Outflows shall correspond to the covered part of the ‘Exposure net of value adjustments and provisions’, that is deducted from the obligor's exposure

117 class and, when relevant, risk weight or obligor grade, and subsequently assigned to the protection provider's exposure class and, when relevant, risk weight or obligor grade. This amount shall be considered as an Inflow into the protection provider's exposure class and, when relevant, risk weights or obligor grades. 0110 TOTAL INFLOWS Securitisation positions which are debt securities and are eligible financial collateral according to Article 197 (1) of CRR and where the Financial Collateral Simple Method is used, shall be reported as inflows in this column. 0120 NET EXPOSURE AFTER CRM SUBSTITUTION EFFECTS PRE CONVERSION FACTORS Exposure assigned in the corresponding risk weight and exposure class after taking into account outflows and inflows due to ‘Credit risk mitigation (CRM) techniques with substitution effects on the exposure’. 0130 (-) CREDIT RISK MITIGATION TECHNIQUES AFFECTING THE AMOUNT OF THE EXPOSURE: FUNDED CREDIT PROTECTION FINANCIAL COLLATERAL COMPREHENSIVE METHOD ADJUSTED VALUE (CVAM) Articles 223, 224, 225, 226, 227 and 228 of CRR. It also includes credit linked notes (Article 218 of CRR). 0140 FULLY ADJUSTED EXPOSURE VALUE (E*) Securitisation positions according to Article 248 of CRR, therefore without applying the conversion factors laid down in Article 248(1) point b) of CRR. 0150 OF WHICH: SUBJECT TO A CCF OF 0%
Article 248(1) point b) of CRR. In this respect, Article 4(1)(56) of CRR
defines conversion factor.
For reporting purposes, fully adjusted exposure values (E*) shall be reported for the 0% conversion factor. 0160 (-)NON REFUNDABLE PURCHASE PRICE DISCOUNT According to article 248 (1) (d) of CRR, an originator institution may deduct from the exposure value of a securitisation position which is assigned 1 250 % risk weight any non-refundable purchase price discounts connected with such underlying exposures to the extent that such discounts have caused the reduction of own funds.

118
0170 (-) SPECIFIC CREDIT RISK ADJUSTMENTS ON UNDERLYING EXPOSURES According to article 248 (1) (d) of CRR, an originator institution may deduct from the exposure value of a securitisation position which is assigned 1 250 % risk weight or is deducted from Common Equity Tier 1 the amount of the specific credit risk adjustments on the underlying exposures in accordance with Article 110 of the CRR. 0180 EXPOSURE VALUE Securitisation positions according to Article 248 of CRR. 0190 (-) EXPOSURE VALUE DEDUCTED FROM OWN FUNDS According to articles 244(1) point (b), 245(1) point (b) and 253 (1) of CRR, in case of a securitisation position in respect of which a 1250% risk weight applies, institutions may, as an alternative to including the position in their calculation of risk-weighted exposure amounts, deduct from own funds the exposure value of the position. 0200 EXPOSURE VALUE SUBJECT TO RISK WEIGHTS Exposure value minus the exposure value deducted from own funds. 0210 SEC-IRBA
Article 254 (1) (a) of CRR
0220-0260 BREAKDOWN BY RW BANDS
SEC-IRBA exposures broken down by risk-weight bands.
0270 OF WHICH: CALCULATED UNDER ARTICLE 255 (4) (PURCHASED RECEIVABLES)
Article 255 (4) of CRR. For this purpose, retail exposures shall be treated
as purchased retail receivables and non-retail exposures as purchased corporate receivables. 0280 SEC-SA
Article 254 (1) (b) of CRR
0290-0340 BREAKDOWN BY RW BANDS
SEC-SA exposures broken down by risk-weight bands.
For the RW=1250% (W unknown), Article 261 (2) (b) foresees that where the institution does not know the delinquency status for more than 5 % of

119 underlying exposures in the pool, the position in the securitisation shall be risk-weighted at 1250 %. 0350 SEC-ERBA
Article 254 (1) (c) of CRR.
0360-0570 BREAKDOWN BY CREDIT QUALITY STEPS (SHORT/LONG TERM CREDIT QUALITY STEPS)
Article 263 of CRR.
SEC-ERBA Securitisation positions with an inferred rating according to Article 254(2) of CRR shall be reported as positions with a rating. Exposure values subject to risk weights shall be broken down according to short and long-term and credit quality steps (CQS) as envisaged for the SEC-ERBA Article 263 and 264 of the CRR (Tables 1, 2, 3 and 4). 0580-0630 BREAKDOWN BY REASON FOR APPLICATION OF SEC-ERBA For each securitisation position, institutions shall consider one of the following options in columns 0580-0620. 0580 AUTO LOANS, AUTO LEASES AND EQUIPMENT LEASES
Article 254 (2) (c) of CRR. All auto loans, auto leases and equipment leases
shall be reported in this column, even if they qualify for Article 254 (2) (a) or (b) of CRR. 0590 SEC-ERBA OPTION
Article 254 (3) of CRR.
0600 POSITIONS SUBJECT TO ART. 254(2)(a) CRR
Article 254 (2) (a) of CRR.
0610 POSITIONS SUBJECT TO ART. 254(2)(b) CRR
Article 254 (2) (b) of CRR.
0620 POSITIONS SUBJECT TO ART. 254 (4) OR 258 (2) CRR Securitisation positions subject to SEC-ERBA where the application of SEC-IRBA or SEC-SA has been precluded by the competent authorities as described in Article 254 (4) or 258 (2) of CRR. 0630 FOLLOWING THE HIERARCHY OF APPROACHES

120
Securitisation positions where SEC-ERBA is applied by following the hierarchy of approaches described in Article 254 (1) of CRR. 0640 INTERNAL ASSESSMENT APPROACH
Article 254(5) of CRR on the ‘Internal Assessment Approach’ (IAA) for
positions in ABCP programmes.
0650-0690 BREAKDOWN BY RW BANDS
Internal Assessment Approach exposures broken down by risk-weight bands.
0700 OTHER (RW=1250%)
According to article 254 (7), in case none of the previous approaches is applied, a risk weight of 1 250 % shall be assigned to securitisation positions. 0710-0860 RISK-WEIGHTED EXPOSURE AMOUNT Total risk-weighted exposure amount calculated according to Part Three, Title II, Chapter 5, Section 3 of CRR prior to adjustments due to maturity mismatches or infringement of due diligence provisions, and excluding any risk weighted exposure amount corresponding to exposures redistributed via outflows to another template. 0840 IAA: AVERAGE RISK WEIGHT (%) The exposure-weighted average risk weights of the securitisation positions shall be reported in this column. 0860 RWEA OF WHICH: SYNTHETIC SECURITISATIONS For synthetic securitisations with maturity mismatches, the amount to be reported in this column shall ignore any maturity mismatch. 0870 ADJUSTMENT TO THE RISK-WEIGHTED EXPOSURE AMOUNT DUE TO MATURITY MISMATCHES Maturity mismatches in synthetic securitisations RW*-RW(SP), as defined in Article 252 of CRR, shall be included, except in the case of tranches subject to a risk weighting of 1250% where the amount to be reported shall be zero. RW(SP) shall not only include the risk weighted exposure amounts reported under column 0650 but also the risk weighted exposure amounts corresponding to exposures redistributed via outflows to other templates. 0880 OVERALL EFFECT (ADJUSTMENT) DUE TO INFRINGEMENT OF CHAPTER 2 OF REGULATION (EU) 2017/2402

121
According to article 270a of CRR, whenever certain requirements are not met by the institution, competent authorities impose a proportionate additional risk weight of no less than 250% of the risk weight (capped at 1250%) which would apply to the relevant securitisation positions under
Part Three, Title II, Chapter 5, Section 3 of CRR.
0890 BEFORE CAP
Total risk-weighted exposure amount calculated according to Part Three, Title II, Chapter 5, Section 3 of CRR, before applying the limits specified in Articles 267 and 268 of CRR. 0900 (-) REDUCTION DUE TO RISK WEIGHT CAP According to article 267 of CRR, an institution which has knowledge at all times of the composition of the underlying exposures may assign the senior securitisation position a maximum risk weight equal to the exposureweighted-average risk weight that would be applicable to the underlying exposures as if the underlying exposures had not been securitised. 0910 (-) REDUCTION DUE TO OVERALL CAP According to article 268 of CRR, an originator institution, a sponsor institution or other institution using the SEC-IRBA or an originator institution or sponsor institution using the SEC-SA or the SEC-ERBA may apply a maximum capital requirement for the securitisation position it holds equal to the capital requirements that would be calculated under Chapter 2 or 3 in respect of the underlying exposures had they not been securitised. 0920 TOTAL RISK-WEIGHTED EXPOSURE AMOUNT Total risk-weighted exposure amount calculated according to Part Three, Title II, Chapter 5, Section 3 of CRR as specified in Article 247 (6) of CRR. 0930 MEMORANDUM ITEM: RISK WEIGHTED EXPOSURE AMOUNT CORRESPONDING TO THE OUTFLOWS FROM SECURITISATIONS TO OTHER EXPOSURE CLASSES Risk weighted exposure amount stemming from exposures redistributed to the risk mitigant provider, and therefore computed in the corresponding template, that are considered in the computation of the cap for securitisation positions. 103.The template is divided into three major blocks of rows which gather data on the originated / sponsored / retained or purchased exposures by originators, investors and sponsors. For each of them, the information shall be broken down by on-balance

122 sheet items and off-balance sheet items and derivatives, as well as if it is subject to differentiated capital treatment or not. 104.Positions treated according to the SEC-ERBA and unrated positions (exposures at reporting date) shall be broken down according to the credit quality steps applied at inception (last block of rows). Originators, sponsors as well as investors shall report this information. Rows 0010 TOTAL EXPOSURES Total exposures refer to the total amount of outstanding securitisations and resecuritisations. This row summarises all the information reported by originators, sponsors and investors in subsequent rows. 0020 SECURITISATIONS Total amount of outstanding securitisation positions according to definition in
Article 4(1)(62) of CRR which are not re-securitisations according to definition
in Article 4(1)(63) of CRR..
0030 QUALIFYING FOR DIFFERENTIATED CAPITAL TREATMENT Articles 254 (1) (a) (b), (c), (2), (3), (4), (6), 259, 260, 261, 262, 263, 264, 265, 266, 269, 270 CRR. Total amount of securitisation positions which fulfil the criteria of Article 243 or 270 of CRR and therefore qualify for differentiated capital treatment. 0040 STS EXPOSURES Total amount of STS securitisation positions according to the criteria set in Article 243 of CRR. 0050 SENIOR POSITION IN SMEs SECURITISATIONS Total amount of senior securitisation positions in SMEs according to the criteria set in Article 270 of CRR. 0060, 0120, 0170, 0240, 0290, 0360 and 0410 NOT QUALIFYING FOR DIFFERENTIATED CAPITAL TREATMENT Articles 254 (1) (a) (b), (c), (2), (3), (4), (6), 259, 261, 263, 265, 266, 269 CRR. Total amount of securitisation positions which do not qualify for differentiated capital treatment.

123
0070,
0190,
0310 and
0430
RE-SECURITISATIONS
Total amount of outstanding re-securitisations according to definitions in Article 4(1)(63) and (64) of CRR. 0080 ORIGINATOR: TOTAL EXPOSURES This row summarises information-balance items and off-balance sheet items and derivatives of those securitisation and re-securitisation positions for which the institution plays the role of originator, as defined by Article 4(1)(13) of CRR. 0090- 0130, 0210-0250 and 0330- 0370 SECURITISATIONS: ON-BALANCE SHEET ITEMS According to article 248 (1) (a) of CRR, the exposure value of an on-balance sheet securitisation position shall be its accounting value remaining after any relevant specific credit risk adjustments on the securitisation position have been applied in accordance with Article 110. On-balance sheet items shall be broken down to capture information regarding application of differentiated capital treatment according to Article 243 of CRR in rows 0100 and 0120 and respective the total amount of senior securitisation positions according to Article 242 (6) of CRR in rows 0110 and 0130. 0100, 0220 and 0340 QUALIFYING FOR DIFFERENTIATED CAPITAL TREATMENT Total amount of securitisation positions which fulfil the criteria of Article 243 of CRR and therefore qualify for differentiated capital treatment. 0110, 0130, 0160, 0180, 0230, 0250, 0280, 0300, 0350, 0370, 400 and 420 OF WHICH: SENIOR EXPOSURES Total amount of senior securitisation positions according to the definition in
Article 242 (6) of CRR.
0140-
0180,
0260-0300 and 0380-
0420
SECURITISATIONS: OFF-BALANCE SHEET ITEMS AND DERIVATIVES These rows gather information on off-balance sheet items and derivatives securitisation positions subject to a conversion factor under the securitisation framework. The exposure value of an off-balance sheet securitisation position shall be its nominal value, less any specific credit risk adjustment of that securitisation position, multiplied by a 100% conversion factor unless otherwise specified.

124
Off-balance sheet securitisation positions arising from a derivative instrument listed in Annex II of CRR, shall be determined in accordance to Part Three, Title II, Chapter 6 of CRR. The exposure value for the counterparty credit risk of a derivative instrument listed in Annex II of CRR, shall be determined in accordance to Part Three, Title II, Chapter 6 of CRR. For liquidity facilities, credit facilities and servicer cash advances, institutions shall provide the undrawn amount. For interest rate and currency swaps the exposure value (according to Article 248(1) of CRR) shall be provided. Off-balance sheet items and derivatives shall be broken down to capture information regarding application of differentiated capital treatment according to Article 270 of CRR in rows 0150 and 0170 and respective the total amount of senior securitisation positions according to Article 242 (6) of CRR in rows 0160 and
0180. The same legal references as for rows 0100 to 0130 apply.
0150,
0270 and
0390
QUALIFYING FOR DIFFERENTIATED CAPITAL TREATMENT Total amount of securitisation positions which fulfil the criteria of Article 243 or Article 270 of CRR and therefore qualify for differentiated capital treatment. 0200 INVESTOR: TOTAL EXPOSURES This row summarises information-balance and off-balance sheet items and derivatives of those securitisation and re-securitisation positions for which the institution plays the role of investor. For the purposes of this template investor shall be understood as an institution that holds a securitisation position in a securitisation transaction for which it is neither originator nor sponsor. 0320 SPONSOR: TOTAL EXPOSURES This row summarizes information-balance and off-balance sheet items and derivatives of those securitisation and re-securitisation positions for which the institution plays the role of a sponsor, as defined by Article 4(1)(14) of CRR. If a sponsor is also securitising its own assets, it shall fill in the originator's rows with the information regarding its own securitised assets. 0440-0670 BREAKDOWN OF OUTSTANDING POSITIONS ACCORDING TO CQS AT INCEPTION These rows gather information on outstanding positions (at reporting date) for which a credit quality step was determined (envisaged in Articles 263 and 264 of CRR, Tables 1, 2, 3 and 4) at origination date (inception). For securitisations positions treated under IAA, the CQS should be the one at the time an IAA rating was first assigned. In the absence of this information, the earliest CQS-equivalent data available shall be reported.

125
These rows are only to be reported for columns 0180-0210, 0280, 0350-0640, 0700-0720, 0740, 0760-0830 and 0850.
3.9. Detailed information on securitisations (SEC DETAILS)
3.9.1. Scope of the SEC DETAILS template
109.These templates gather information on a transaction basis (versus the aggregate information reported in CR SEC, MKR SA SEC, MKR SA CTP, CA1 and CA2 templates) on all securitisations the reporting institution is involved in. The main features of each securitisation, such as the nature of the underlying pool and the own funds requirements shall be reported. 110.These template are to be reported for:
a. Securitisations originated / sponsored by the reporting institution, including where it holds no position in the securitisation. In cases where institutions hold at least one position in the securitisation, regardless of whether there has been a significant risk transfer or not, institutions shall report information on all the positions they hold (either in the banking book or trading book). Positions held include those positions retained due to Article 6 of the Regulation (EU) 2017/2402 and in case of the transitional provisions in Article 43 (6) of the Regulation (EU) 2017/2402 applies,
Article 405 of CRR in the version applicable on 31 December 2018b.
Securitisations, the ultimate underlying of which are financial liabilities originally issued by the reporting institution and (partially) acquired by a securitisation vehicle. This underlying could include covered bonds or other liabilities and shall be identified as such in column 160. b. Positions held in securitisations where the reporting institution is neither originator nor sponsor (i.e. investors and original lenders). 111.These templates shall be reported by consolidated groups and stand-alone institutions1 located in the same country where they are subject to own funds requirements. In case of securitisations involving more than one entity of the same consolidated group, the entity-by-entity detail breakdown shall be provided. 112.On account of Article 5 of the Regulation (EU) 2017/2402 (Securitisation Regulation), which establishes that institutions investing in securitisation positions shall acquire a great deal of information on them in order to comply with due diligence requirements the reporting scope of the template is applied to a limited extent to investors. In particular, they shall report columns 010-040; 070-110; 161; 190; 290- 300-; 310-470.

1 ‘Stand alone institutions’ are neither part of a group, nor consolidate themselves in the same country where they are subject to own funds requirements.

126
113.Institutions playing the role of original lenders (not performing also the role of originators or sponsors in the same securitisation) shall generally report the template to the same extent as investors.
3.9.2 Breakdown of the SEC DETAILS template
113a. The SEC DETAILS consists of two templates. SEC DETAILS provides a general overview of the securitisations and SEC DETAILS 2 provides a breakdown of the same securitisations by approach applied. 113b. Securitisation positions in the trading book shall only be reported in columns 005-020, 420, 430, 431, 432, 440 and 450-470. For columns 420, 430 and 440 institutions shall take into account the RW corresponding to the own funds requirement of the net position.
3.9.3 C 14.00 – Detailed information on securitisations (SEC DETAILS)
Columns
005 ROW NUMBER
The row number is a row identifier and shall be unique for each row in the table. It shall follow the numerical order 1, 2, 3, etc. 010 INTERNAL CODE Internal (alpha-numerical) code used by the institution to identify the securitisation. The internal code shall be associated to the identifier of the securitisation transaction. 020 IDENTIFIER OF THE SECURITISATION (Code/Name) Code used for the legal registration of the securitisation transaction or, if not available, the name by which the securitisation transaction is known in the market, or within the institution in the case of an internal or private securitisation. When the International Securities Identification Number -ISIN- is available (i.e. for public transactions) the characters that are common to all tranches of the securitisation shall be reported in this column. 021 INTRA-GROUP, PRIVATE OR PUBLIC SECURITISATION? This column identifies whether the securitisation is an intra-group, private or public securitisation, Institutions shall report one of the following abbreviations:

‘PRI’ for Private
‘INT’ for Intra-group
‘PUB’ for Public.

127
110 ROLE OF THE INSTITUTION: (ORIGINATOR / SPONSOR / ORIGINAL LENDER / INVESTOR) Institutions shall report the following abbreviations:

‘O’ for Originator;
‘S’ for Sponsor;
‘I’ for Investor.
‘L’ for Original Lender;
Originator and Sponsor as defined in Article 4(1)(13) (Originator) and Article 4(1)(14) (Sponsor) of CRR. Investors are assumed to be those institutions to which provisions in Article 5 of the Regulation (EU) 2017/2402. In case of the transitional provisions in Article 43 (5) of the Regulation (EU) 2017/2402 applies, Article 406 and 407 of CRR in the version applicable on 31 December 2018. 030 IDENTIFIER OF THE ORIGINATOR (Code/Name) The LEI code applicable to the originator, or, if not available, the code given by the supervisory authority to the originator or, if that is not available, the name of the institution itself shall be reported for this column. In the case of multi-seller securitisations, where the reporting institution is involved as originator, sponsor or original lender, the reporting institution shall provide the identifier of all the entities within its consolidated group that are involved (as originator, sponsor or original lender) in the transaction. If the code is not available or is not known by the reporting institution, the name of the institution shall be reported. In the case of multi-seller securitisations, where the reporting institution holds a position in the securitisation as an investor, it shall provide the identifier of all the different originators involved in the securitisation, or, if not available, the names of the different originators. If the names are not known by the reporting institution, it shall report that the securitisation is ‘multi-seller’. 040 SECURITISATION TYPE: (TRADITIONAL / SYNTHETIC / ABCP PROGRAMME / ABCP TRANSACTION) Institutions shall report the following abbreviations:
‘AP’ for ABCP programme;
‘AT’ for ABCP transaction;
‘T’ for Traditional;
‘S’ for Synthetic.
The definitions of ‘Asset Backed Commercial Paper Programme’, ‘Asset Backed Commercial Paper Transaction’, ‘traditional securitisation’ and ‘synthetic securitisation’ are provided in Articles 242(11), (12), (13) and (14) of the CRR.

128
051 ACCOUNTING TREATMENT: SECURITISED EXPOSURES ARE KEPT OR REMOVED FROM THE BALANCE SHEET? Institutions as originators, sponsors and original lenders shall report one of the following abbreviations:

‘K’ if entirely recognised
‘P’ if partially derecognised
‘R’ if entirely derecognised
‘N’ if not applicable.
This column summarises the accounting treatment of the transaction. Significant risk transfer (SRT) under Articles 244 and 245 of CRR does not affect the accounting treatment of the transaction under the relevant accounting framework. In case of the securitisations of liabilities originators shall not report this column. Option ‘P’ (partially removed) shall be reported when the securitised assets are recognised in the balance sheet to the extent of the reporting entity’ continuing involvement in accordance with IFRS 9.3.2.16 – 3.2.21. 060 SOLVENCY TREATMENT: SECURITISATION POSITIONS SUBJECT TO OWN FUNDS REQUIREMENTS? Originators, only, shall report the following abbreviations:
‘N’ not subject to own funds requirements;
‘B’ banking book;
‘T’ trading book;
‘A’ partly in both books.
Articles 109, 244 and 245 of CRR.
This column summarises the solvency treatment of the securitisation scheme by the originator. It indicates whether own funds requirements are computed according to securitised exposures or securitisation positions (banking book/trading book). If own funds requirements are based on securitised exposures (for not being significant risk transfer) the computation of own funds requirements for credit risk shall be reported in the CR SA template, for those securitised exposures for whichthe Standardised Approach is used, or in the CR IRB template, for those securitised exposures for which the Internal Ratings Based Approach is used by the institution. Conversely, if own funds requirements are based on securitisation positions held in the banking book (for being significant risk transfer) the computation of own funds requirements for credit risk shall be reported in the CR SEC template. In the case of securitisation positions held in the trading book the computation of own funds requirements for market risk shall be reported in the MKR SA TDI (standardised general position risk) and in the MKR SA SEC or MKR SA CTP (standardised specific position risk) or in the MKR IM (internal models) templates.

129
In the case of the securitisations of liabilities originators shall not report this column. 061 SIGNIFICANT RISK TRANSFER Originators, only, shall report the following abbreviations:

'N' Not applied for SRT and the firm risk weights its securitised exposures
'A' Achieved SRT under Articles 244 (2) (a) or 245 (2) (a) of CRR.
'B' Achieved SRT under Articles 244 (2) (b) or 245 (2) (b) of CRR
'C' Achieved SRT under Articles 244 (3) (a) or 245 (3) (a) of CRR.
'D' Applying a 1250% RW or deducting retained positions according to Articles 244 (1) (b) or 245 (1) (b) of CRR..
This column summarises whether the originator has applied to treat securitisations schemes on the basis of having achieved significant transferand by which method. The achievement of SRT will determine the appropriate solvency treatment by the originator. 070 SECURITISATION OR RE-SECURITISATION? According to definitions of ‘securitisation’ and ‘re-securitisation’ are provided in Article 4(1)(61) to (64) of CRR, report the type of underlying using the following abbreviations:
'S' for securitisation;
'R' for re-securitisation.
075 STS SECURITISATION
Article 18 of Regulation (EU) 2017/2402
Report one of the following abbreviations
Y – Yes
N – No
446 SECURITISATION QUALIFYING FOR DIFFERENTIATED CAPITAL TREATMENT Articles 243 and 270 of CRR. Institutions shall report one of the following abbreviations Y – Yes N – No ‘Yes’ shall be reported both in case of STS securitisations qualifying for the differentiated capital treatment in accordance with Article 243 of the CRR and in case of senior positions in (non-STS) SME securitisations eligible for this treatment in accordance with Article 270 of the CRR. 080-100 RETENTION

130
Article 6 of the Regulation (EU) 2017/2402. In case of the transitional provisions
in Article 43 (6) of the Regulation (EU) 2017/2402 applies, Article 405 of CRR in the version applicable on 31 December 2018., 080 TYPE OF RETENTION APPLIED For each securitisation scheme originated, the relevant type of retention of net economic interest as envisaged in Article 6 of Regulation (EU) 2017/2402 shall be reported:
A - Vertical slice (securitisation positions): “retention of no less than 5% of the nominal value of each of the tranches sold or transferred to the investors”. V - Vertical slice (securitised exposures): retention of no less than 5% of the credit risk of each of the securitised exposures, if the credit risk thus retained with respect to such securitised exposures always ranks pari passu with, or is subordinated to, the credit risk that has been securitised with respect to those same exposures. B - Revolving exposures: ”in the case of securitisations of revolving exposures, retention of the originator’s interest of no less than 5% of the nominal value of the securitised exposures”. C- On-balance sheet: “retention of randomly selected exposures, equivalent to no less than 5% of the nominal amount of the securitised exposures, where such exposures would otherwise have been securitised in the securitisation, provided that the number of potentially securitised exposures is no less than 100 at origination”. D- First loss: “retention of the first loss tranche and, if necessary, other tranches having the same or a more severe risk profile than those transferred or sold to investors and not maturing any earlier than those transferred or sold to investors, so that the retention equals in total no less than 5% of the nominal value of the securitised exposures”. E – Exempted. This code shall be reported for those securitisations affected by provisions in Article 6(6) of CRR. U – In breach or unknown. This code shall be reported when the reporting does not know with certain which type of retention is being applied or in case of noncompliance. 090 % OF RETENTION AT REPORTING DATE The retention of material net economic interest by the originator, sponsor or original lender of the securitisation shall be not less than 5% (at origination date). This column shall not be reported in cases where codes ‘E’ (exempted) or ‘N’ (not applicable) are reported under column 080 (Type of retention applied).

131
100 COMPLIANCE WITH THE RETENTION REQUIREMENT?
Institutions shall report the following abbreviations:
Y - Yes;
N - No.
This column shall not be reported in case where codes ‘E’ (exempted) is reported under column 080 (Type of retention applied). 120-130 NON ABCP PROGRAMMES Because of their special character because they comprise of several single securitisation positions, ABCP programmes (defined in Article 242(11) of CRR) shall be exempted from reporting in columns 120, 121 and 130. 120 ORIGINATION DATE (mm/yyyy) The month and year of the origination date (i.e. cut-off or closing date of the pool) of the securitisation shall be reported according to the following format:
‘mm/yyyy’.
For each securitisation scheme the origination date cannot change between reporting dates. In the particular case of securitisation schemes backed by open pools, the origination date shall be the date of the first issuance of securities. This piece of information shall be reported even when the reporting entity does not hold any positions in the securitisation. 121 DATE OF LATEST ISSUANCE (mm/yyyy) The month and year of the date of the latest issuance of securities in the securitisation shall be reported according to the following format: ‘mm/yyyy’. The Regulation (EU) 2017/2402 (Securitisation Regulation) only applies to securitisations the securities of which are issued on or after 1 January 2019. The date of the latest issuance of securities determines whether each securitisation scheme is in scope of the Securitisation Regulation. This information shall be reported even when the reporting entity does not hold any positions in the securitisation. 130 TOTAL AMOUNT OF SECURITISED EXPOSURES AT ORIGINATION DATE This column gathers the amount (according to original exposures pre conversion factors) of the securitised portfolio at the origination date. In case of securitisation schemes backed by open pools the amount referring to the origination date of the first issuance of securities shall be reported. In the case of traditional securitisations no other assets of the securitisation pool shall be

132 included. In the case of multi-seller securitisation schemes (i.e. with more than one originator) only the amount corresponding to the reporting entity’s contribution in the securitised portfolio shall be reported. In the case of the securitisation of liabilities only the amounts issued by the reporting entity shall be reported. This information shall be reported even when the reporting entity does not hold any positions in the securitisation. 140-225 SECURITISED EXPOSURES Columns 140 to 225 request information on several features of the securitised portfolio by the reporting entity. 140 TOTAL AMOUNT Institutions shall report the value of the securitised portfolio at reporting date, i.e. the outstanding amount of the securitised exposures. In the case of traditional securitisations no other assets of the securitisation pool shall be included. In the case of multi-seller securitisation schemes (i.e. with more than one originator) only the amount corresponding to the reporting entity’s contribution in the securitised portfolio shall be reported. In the case of securitisation schemes backed by closed pools (i.e. the portfolio of securitised assets cannot be enlarged after the origination date) the amount will progressively be reduced. This information shall be reported even when the reporting entity does not hold any positions in the securitisation. 150 INSTITUTION'S SHARE (%) Institution’s share (percentage with two decimals) at reporting date in the securitised portfolio. The figure to be reported in this column is, by default, 100% except for multi-seller securitisation schemes. In that case the reporting entity shall report its current contribution to the securitised portfolio (equivalent to column 140 in relative terms). This information shall be reported even when the reporting entity does not hold any positions in the securitisation. 160 TYPE This column gathers information on the type of assets (‘Residential mortgages’ to ‘Other wholesale exposures’) or liabilities (‘Covered bonds’ and ‘Other liabilities’) of the securitised portfolio. The institution shall report one of the following options, considering the highest EAD:
Retail:
Residential mortgages;
Credit card receivables;
Consumer loans;
Loans to SMEs (treated as retail);

133
Other retail exposures.
Wholesale:
Commercial mortgages;
Leasing;
Loans to corporates
Loans to SMEs (treated as corporates);
Trade receivables;
Other wholesale exposures.
Liabilites:
Covered bonds;
Other liabilities.
In case the pool of securitised exposures is a mix of the previous types, the institution shall indicate the most important type. In case of re-securitisations, the institution shall refer to the ultimate underlying pool of assets. Type ‘Other liabilities’ includes treasury bonds and credit linked notes. For securitisation schemes backed by closed pools the type cannot change between reporting dates. 171 % OF IRB IN APPROACH APPLIED This column gathers information on the approach(es) that at the reporting date the institution would apply to the securitised exposures. Institutions shall report the percentage of the securitised exposures, measured by exposure value, to which the Internal Ratings Based Approach applies at the reporting date. This information shall be reported even when the reporting entity does not hold any positions in the securitisation. Nevertheless, this column shall not apply to securitisations of liabilities. 180 NUMBER OF EXPOSURES
Article 259(4) of CRR.
This column shall be compulsory for those institutions using the SEC-IRBA approach to the securitisation positions (and, therefore, reporting more than 95% in column 171). The institution shall report the effective number of exposures. This column shall not be reported in case of securitisation of liabilities or when the own funds requirements are based on the securitised exposures (in case of securitisation of assets). This column shall not be reported when the reporting institution does not hold any positions in the securitisation. This column shall not be reported by investors. 181 EXPOSURES IN DEFAULT ‘W’ (%)

134
Article 261(2) of CRR.
Even if the institution is not applying the SEC-SA approach to the securitisation positions, the institution shall report the ‘W’ factor (relating to the underlying exposures in default) which is to be calculated as indicated in Article 261(2) of CRR. 190 COUNTRY Institutions shall report the code (ISO 3166-1 alpha-2) of the country of origin of the ultimate underlying of the transaction, i.e. the country of the immediate obligor of the original securitised exposures (look through). In case the pool of the securitisation consists of different countries, the institution shall indicate the most important country. If no country exceeds a 20 % threshold based on the amount of assets/liabilities, then ‘other countries’ shall be reported. 201 LGD (%) The exposure-weighted average loss-given-default (LGD) shall only be reported by those institutions applying the SEC-IRBA (and, therefore, reporting 95% or more in column 170). The LGD is to be calculated as indicated in Article 259(5) of CRR. This column shall not be reported in case of securitisation of liabilities or when the own funds requirements are based on the securitised exposures (in case of securitisation of assets). 202 EL (%) The exposure-weighted average expected loss (EL) of the securitised assets shall only be reported by those institutions applying the SEC-IRBA (and, therefore, reporting 95% or more in column 171). In the case of SA securitised assets the EL reported shall be the specific credit risk adjustment as defined in Art 111 of the CRR. The EL shall be calculated as indicated in Section 3, Chapter 3 of Title II, Part Three of CRR. This column shall not be reported in case of securitisation of liabilities or when the own funds requirements are based on the securitised exposures (in case of securitisation of assets). 203 UL (%) The exposure-weighted average unexpected loss (UL) of the securitised assets shall only be reported by those institutions applying the SEC-IRBA (and, therefore, reporting 95% or more in column 170). The UL of assets equals the riskweighted exposure amount (RWEA) times 8%. RWEA shall be calculated as indicated in Section 2, Chapter 3 of Title II, Part Three of CRR. This column shall not be reported in case of securitisation of liabilities or when the own funds requirements are based on the securitised exposures (in case of securitisation of assets). 204 EXPOSURE-WEIGHTED AVERAGE MATURITY OF ASSETS

135
The exposure-weighted average maturity (WAM) of the securitised assets at the reporting date shall be reported by all institutions regardless of the approach used for calculating capital requirements. Institutions shall calculate the maturity of each asset as indicated in Article 162(2)(a) and (f) of CRR, without applying the 5 year cap. 210 (-) VALUE ADJUSTMENTS AND PROVISIONS Value adjustments and provisions (Article 159 of CRR) for credit losses made in accordance with the accounting framework to which the reporting entity is subject. Value adjustments shall include any amount recognised in profit or loss for credit losses of financial assets since their initial recognition in the balance sheet (including losses due to credit risk of financial assets measured at fair value that shall not be deducted from the exposure value) plus the discounts on exposures purchased when in default according to Article 166(1) of CRR. Provisions include accumulated amounts of credit losses in off-balance sheet items. This column gathers information on the value adjustments and provisions applied to the securitised exposures. This column shall not be reported in case of securitisation of liabilities. This information shall be reported even when the reporting entity does not hold any positions in the securitisation. 221 OWN FUNDS REQUIREMENTS BEFORE SECURITISATION (%) KIRB This column shall only be reported by those institutions applying the SEC-IRBA (and, therefore, reporting 95% or more in column 171) and gathers information on KIRB, as defined in Article 255 (2) to (5) of CRR. KIRB shall be expressed, as a percentage (with two decimals). This column shall not be reported in case of securitisation of liabilities. In case of the securitisation of assets, this information shall be reported even when the reporting entity does not hold any positions in the securitisation. 222 % OF RETAIL EXPOSURES IN IRB POOLS IRB pools shall be defined as in Art 242 (7) of CRR, provided that the institution is able to calculate KIRB in accordance with Section 3 of the CRR on a minimum of 95 % of the underlying exposure amount (Art 259 (2) of CRR). 223 OWN FUNDS REQUIREMENTS BEFORE SECURITISATION (%) Ksa Even if the institution is not applying the SEC-SA approach to the securitisation positions, the institution shall report this column. This column gathers information on KSA, as defined in Article 255 (6) of CRR. KSA shall be expressed, as a percentage (with two decimals).

136
This column shall not be reported in case of securitisation of liabilities. In case of the securitisation of assets, this information shall be reported even when the reporting entity does not hold any positions in the securitisation. 225 MEMORANDUM ITEMS 225 CREDIT RISK ADJUSTMENTS DURING THE CURRENT PERIOD
Article 110 of the CRR.
230-304 SECURITISATION STRUCTURE
This block of columns gathers information on the structure of the securitisation according to on/off balance sheet positions, tranches (senior/mezzanine/ first loss) and maturity at reporting date. In the case of multi-seller securitisations only the amount corresponding or attributed to the reporting institution shall be reported. 230-252 ON-BALANCE SHEET ITEMS This block of columns gathers information-balance sheet items broken down by tranches (senior/mezzanine/first loss). 230-232 SENIOR 230 AMOUNT The amount of senior securitisation positions as defined in Article 242 (6) of CRR. 231 ATTACHMENT POINT (%) The attachment point (%) as defined in Article 256 (1) of CRR. 232 and 252 CQS Credit quality steps (CQS) as envisaged for institutions applying SEC-ERBA. Articles 263 and 264 Tables of CRR. These columns shall be reported for all rated transactions despite of the approach applied. 240-242 MEZZANINE 240 AMOUNT The amount to be reported includes:

mezzanine positions as defined in Article 242 (18) of the CRR;
additional positions which are not subject to Articles 242 (6), (17) or (18) of
the CRR.
241 NUMBER OF TRANCHES

137
Number of mezzanine tranches.
242 CQS OF THE MOST SUBORDINATED ONE
CQS of the most subordinated mezzanine tranche, as defined in Articles 263 and 264 of CRR. 250-252 FIRST LOSS 250 AMOUNT The amount of first loss positions as defined in Article 242 (17) of the CRR. 251 DETACHMENT POINT (%) The detachment point (%) is defined in Article 256 (2) of CRR. 260-280 OFF-BALANCE SHEET ITEMS AND DERIVATIVES This block of columns gathers information on off-balance sheet items and derivatives broken down by tranches (senior/mezzanine/first loss). The same criteria of classification among tranches used for on-balance sheet items shall be applied here. 290-300 MATURITY 290 FIRST FORESEEABLE TERMINATION DATE The likely termination date of the whole securitisation in the light of its contractual clauses and the currently expected financial conditions. Generally, it would be the earliest of the following dates:
(i) the date when a clean-up call (defined in Article 242(1) of CRR) might first be exercised taking into account the maturity of the underlying exposure(s) as well as their expected pre-payment rate or potential re-negotiation activities; (ii) the date on which the originator may first exercise any other call option embedded in the contractual clauses of the securitisation which would result in the total redemption of the securitisation. The day, month and year of the first foreseeable termination date shall be reported. The exact day shall be reported if this data is available, otherwise the first day of the month shall be reported. 291 ORIGINATOR’S CALL OPTIONS INCLUDED IN TRANSACTION Type of call relevant for the first foreseeable termination date:

Clean-up call option meeting the requirements of Article 244(4)(g) of the
CRR
Other clean-up call option

138

Other type of call option.
300 LEGAL FINAL MATURITY DATE
The date upon which all principal and interest of the securitisation must be legally repaid (based on the transaction documentation). The day, month and year of the legal final maturity date shall be reported. The exact day shall be reported if this data is available, otherwise the first day of the month shall be reported. 302-304 MEMORANDUM ITEMS 302 ATTACHMENT POINT OF RISK SOLD (%) Originators, only, shall report the attachment point of the most subordinated tranche sold to, in case of traditional securitisations, or protected by, in case of synthetic securitisations, third parties. 303 DETACHMENT POINT OF RISK SOLD (%) Originators, only, shall report the detachment point of the most senior tranche sold to, in case of traditional securitisations, or protected by, in case of synthetic securitisations, third parties. 304 RISK TRANSFER CLAIMED BY ORIGINATOR INSTITUTION (%) Originators, only, shall report the Expected Loss (EL) plus the Unexpected loss (UL) of the securitised assets transferred to third parties as a percentage of the total EL plus UL. It should be reported the EL and UL of the underlying exposures, which is then allocated via the securitisation waterfall to the respective tranches of the securitisation. In the case of SA banks, EL should be understood as the specific credit risk adjustment of the securitised assets and the UL should be understood as the capital requirement of the securitised exposures.
3.9.4. C 14.01 – Detailed information on securitisations (SEC DETAILS 2)
113c. The template SEC DETAILS 2 shall be reported separately for the following approaches:
1) SEC-IRBA
2) SEC-SA
3) SEC-ERBA
4) 1250%

139
Columns
005 ROW NUMBER
The row number is a row identifier and shall be unique for each row in the table. It shall follow the numerical order 1, 2, 3, etc. 010 INTERNAL CODE Internal (alpha-numerical) code used by the institution to identify the securitisation. The internal code shall be associated to the identifier of the securitisation transaction. 020 IDENTIFIER OF THE SECURITISATION (Code/Name) Code used for the legal registration of the securitisation position, or transaction in case of several positions that can be reported in the same row, or, if not available, the name by which the securitisation position or transaction is known in the market, or within the institution in the case of an internal or private securitisation. When the International Securities Identification Number -ISIN- is available (i.e. for public transactions) the characters that are common to all tranches of the securitisation shall be reported in this column. 310-400 SECURITISATION POSITIONS: ORIGINAL EXPOSURE PRE CONVERSION FACTORS This block of columns gathers information on the securitisation positions according to on/off balance sheet positions and the tranches (senior/mezzanine/ first loss) at reporting date. 310-330 ON-BALANCE SHEET ITEMS The same criteria of classification among tranches used for columns 230, 240 and 250 shall be applied here. 340-361 OFF-BALANCE SHEET ITEMS AND DERIVATIVES The same criteria of classification among tranches used for columns 260 to 280 shall be applied here. 351 and 361 RW CORRESPONDING TO PROTECTION PROVIDER / INSTRUMENT % RW of the eligible guarantor or % RW of the corresponding instrument that provides guarantee according to Article 249 of CRR. 370-400 MEMORANDUM ITEMS: OFF-BALANCE SHEET ITEMS AND DERIVATIVES PRE CONVERSION FACTORS

140
This block of columns gathers additional information on the total off-balance sheet items and derivatives (which are already reported under a different breakdown in columns 340-361). 370 DIRECT CREDIT SUBSTITUTES (DCS) This column applies to those securitisation positions held by the originator and guaranteed with direct credit substitutes (DCS). According to Annex I of CRR the following full risk off-balance sheet items are regarded as DCS:

Guarantees having the character of credit substitutes.
Irrevocable standby letters of credit having the character of credit substitutes.
380 IRS / CRS
IRS stands for Interest Rate Swaps, whereas CRS stands for Currency Rate Swaps. These derivatives are listed in Annex II of CRR. 390 LIQUIDITY FACILITIES Liquidity facilities (LF), defined in Article 242(3) of CRR. 400 OTHER remaining off-balance sheet items. 411 EXPOSURE VALUE This information is closely related to column 0180 in the CR SEC template. 420 (-) EXPOSURE VALUE DEDUCTED FROM OWN FUNDS This information is closely related to column 0190 in the CR SEC template. A negative figure shall be reported in this column. 430 TOTAL RISK WEIGHTED EXPOSURE AMOUNT BEFORE CAP This column gathers information on the risk weighted exposure amount before cap applicable to the securitisation positions (i.e. in case of securitisation schemes with significant risk transfer). In case of securitisation schemes without significant risk transfer (i.e. risk weighted exposure amount computed according securitised exposures) no data shall be reported in this column. In the case of the securitisations of liabilities this column shall not be reported. In the case of securitisations in the trading book, the RWEA concerning the specific risk shall be reported. See column 570 of MKR SA SEC, or columns

141
410 and 420 (the relevant for the own funds requirement) of MKR SA CTP, respectively. 431 (-) REDUCTION DUE TO RISK WEIGHT CAP
Article 267 of the CRR.
432 (-) REDUCTION DUE TO OVERALL CAP
Article 268 of the CRR.
440 TOTAL RISK WEIGHTED EXPOSURE AMOUNT AFTER CAP This column gathers information on the risk weighted exposure amount after caps applicable to the securitisation positions (i.e. in case of securitisation schemes with significant risk transfer). In case of securitisation schemes without significant risk transfer (i.e. own funds requirements computed according securitised exposures) no data shall be reported in this column. In the case of the securitisations of liabilities this column shall not be reported. In the case of securitisations in the trading book, the RWEA concerning the specific risk shall be reported. See column 600 of MKR SA SEC, or column 450 of MKR SA CTP, respectively. 447-448 MEMORANDUM ITEMS 447 RISK WEIGHTED EXPOSURE AMOUNT UNDER SEC-ERBA
Article 263 and 264 of CRR. This column shall only be reported for rated transactions before cap and it shall not be reported for transactions under SECERBA.
448 RISK WEIGHTED EXPOSURE AMOUNT UNDER SEC-SA
Article 261 and 262 of CRR. This column shall be reported before cap and it
shall not be reported for transactions under SEC-SA.
450-470 SECURITISATION POSITIONS - TRADING BOOK 450 CTP OR NON-CTP?
Institutions shall report the following abbreviations:
C - Correlation Trading Portfolio (CTP);
N - Non-CTP
460-470 NET POSITIONS - LONG/SHORT
See columns 050 / 060 of MKR SA SEC or MKR SA CTP, respectively.

142
4. Operational Risk Templates
4.1 C 16.00 – Operational Risk (OPR)
4.1.1 General Remarks
114.This template provides information on the calculation of own funds requirements according to Articles 312 to 324 of CRR for Operational Risk under the Basic Indicator Approach (BIA), the Standardised Approach (TSA), the Alternative Standardised Approach (ASA) and the Advanced Measurement Approaches (AMA). An institution cannot apply TSA and ASA for the business lines retail banking and commercial banking at the same time at solo level 115.Institutions using the BIA, TSA and/or ASA shall calculate their own funds requirement, based on the information at financial year end. When audited figures are not available, institutions may use business estimates. If audited figures are used, institutions shall report the audited figures which are expected to remain unchanged. Deviations from this "unchanged" principle are possible, for instance if during that period the exceptional circumstances, such as recent acquisitions or disposals of entities or activities, are met. 116.If an institution can justify its competent authority that – due to exceptional circumstances such as a merger or a disposal of entities or activities – using a three year average to calculating the relevant indicator would lead to a biased estimation for the own funds requirement for operational risk,, the competent authority may permit the institution to modify the calculation in a way that would take into account such events. Also the competent authority may on its own initiative, require an institution to modify the calculation. Where an institution has been in operation for less than three years it may use forward looking business estimates in calculating the relevant indicator, provided that it starts using historical data as soon as they are available. 117.By columns, this template presents information, for the three most recent years, on the amount of the relevant indicator of the banking activities subject to operational risk and on the amount of loans and advances (the latter only applicable in the case of ASA). Next, information on the amount of own funds requirement for operational risk is reported. If applicable, it must be detailed which part of this amount is due to an allocation mechanism. Regarding AMA, memorandum items are added to present a detail of the effect of the expected loss, diversification and mitigation techniques on own funds requirement for operational risk. 118.By rows, information is presented by method of calculation of the operational risk own funds requirement detailing business lines for TSA and ASA. 119.This template shall be submitted by all institutions subject to operational risk own funds requirement.
4.1.2. Instructions concerning specific positions
Columns

143
010-
030
RELEVANT INDICATOR
Institutions using the relevant indicator to calculate the own funds requirement for operational risk (BIA, TSA and ASA) report relevant indicator for the respective years in columns 010 to 030. Moreover, in the case of a combined use of different approaches as referred in Article 314 of CRR, institutions also report, for information purposes, relevant indicator for the activities subject to AMA. It is also the case for all other AMA banks. Hereafter, the term "relevant indicator" refers to "the sum of the elements" at the end of the financial year as defined in Article 316 point 1, Table1 of CRR. If the institution has less than 3 years of data on “relevant indicator” available, the available historical data (audited figures) shall be assigned by priority to the corresponding columns in the table. If, for instance, historical data for only one year is available, it shall be reported in column 030. If it seems reasonable, the forward looking estimates shall then be included in column 020 (estimate of next year) and column 010 (estimate of year +2). Furthermore if there are no historical data on "relevant indicator" available the institution may use forward-looking business estimates. 040- 060 LOANS AND ADVANCES (IN THE CASE OF ASA APPLICATION) These columns shall be used to report the amounts of the loans and advances for business lines “Commercial banking” and “Retail banking”, as referred to in Article 319 (1) point (b) of CRR. These amounts shall be used to calculate the alternative relevant indicator that leads to the own funds requirements corresponding to the activities subject to ASA (Article 319 (1) point a) of CRR). For the "commercial banking" business line, securities held in the non-trading book shall also be included. 070 OWN FUND REQUIREMENT The own fund requirement is calculated according to the approach used, following Articles 312 to 324 of CRR The resulting amount is reported in column 070. 071 TOTAL OPERATIONAL RISK EXPOSURE AMOUNT
Article 92 (4) of CRR. Own funds requirements in column 070 multiplied
by 12.5.
080 OF WHICH: DUE TO AN ALLOCATION MECHANISM
Article 18 (1) of CRR (related to the inclusion, in the application referred to in
Article 312 (2) of CRR) of the methodology used for allocating operational risk
capital between the different entities of the group and of whether and how diversification effects are intended to be factored in the risk measurement system used by a EU parent credit institution and its subsidiaries or jointly by the subsidiaries of an EU parent financial holding company or EU parent mixed financial holding company.

144
090-
120
AMA MEMORANDUM ITEMS TO BE REPORTED IF APPLICABLE 090 OWN FUNDS REQUIREMENT BEFORE ALLEVIATION DUE TO EXPECTED LOSS, DIVERSIFICATION AND RISK MITIGATION TECHNIQUES The own funds requirement reported in column 090 is the one of column 070 but calculated before taking into account the alleviation effects due to expected loss, diversification and risk mitigation techniques (see below). 100 (-) ALLEVIATION OF OWN FUNDS REQUIREMENTS DUE TO THE EXPECTED LOSS CAPTURED IN BUSINESS PRACTICES In column 100 the alleviation of own funds requirements due to expected loss captured in internal business practices (as referred to in Article 322 (2) point a) of CRR) is reported. 110 (-) ALLEVIATION OF OWN FUNDS REQUIREMENTS DUE TO DIVERSIFICATION The diversification effect in column 110 is the difference between the sum of own funds requirements calculated separately for each operational risk class (i.e. a “perfect dependence” situation) and the diversified own funds requirement calculated by taking into account correlations and dependencies (i.e. assuming less than “perfect dependence” between the risk classes). The “perfect dependence” situation occurs in the “default case”, that is when the institution does not use explicit correlations structure between the risk classes, hence the AMA capital is computed as the sum of the individual operational risk measures of the chosen risk classes. In this case the correlation between the risk classes is assumed of 100% and the value in the column has to be set to zero. Conversely, when the institution computes an explicit correlations structure between risk classes, it has to include in this column the difference between the AMA capital as stemming from the “default case” and that obtained after applying the correlations structure between the risk classes. The value reflects the “diversification capacity” of the AMA model, that is the ability of the model to capture the not simultaneous occurrence of severe operational risk loss events. In the column 110 the amount by which the assumed correlation structure decreases the AMA capital relative to the assumption of 100% correlation has to be reported. 120 (-) ALLEVIATION OF OWN FUNDS REQUIREMENT DUE TO RISK MITIGATION TECHNIQUES (INSURANCE AND OTHER RISK TRANSFER MECHANISMS) In column 120 the impact of insurance and other risk transfer mechanisms according to Article 323(1) to (5) of CRR is reported.

145
Rows
010 BANKING ACTIVITIES SUBJECT TO BASIC INDICATOR APPROACH (BIA) This row shall present the amounts corresponding to activities subject to the BIA to calculate the own funds requirement for operational risk (Articles 315 and 316 of CRR). 020 BANKING ACTIVITIES SUBJECT TO STANDARISED (TSA)/ ALTERNATIVE STANDARDISED (ASA) APPROACHES The own funds requirement calculated according to the TSA and ASA (Articles 317 to 319 of CRR) shall be reported. 030- 100 SUBJECT TO TSA In the case of using the TSA, relevant indicator for each respective year shall be distributed in rows 030 to 100 amongst the business lines defined in Article 317, Table 2 of CRR. The mapping of activities into business lines shall follow the principles described in Article 318 of CRR. 110- 120 SUBJECT TO ASA Institutions using the ASA (Article 319 of CRR) shall report for the respective years the relevant indicator separately for each business line in the rows 030 to 050 and 080 to 100 and in the rows 110 and 120 for business lines "Commercial banking" and "Retail banking". Rows 110 and 120 shall present the amount of relevant indicator of activities subject to ASA distinguishing between those corresponding to the business line “Commercial banking” and those corresponding to the business line “Retail banking” (Article 319 of CRR). There can be amounts for the rows corresponding to “Commercial banking” and “Retail banking” under the TSA (rows 060 and 070) as well as under the ASA rows 110 and 120 (e.g. if a subsidiary is subject to TSA whereas the parent entity is subject to ASA). 130 BANKING ACTIVITIES SUBJECT TO ADVANCED MEASUREMENT APPROACHES AMA The relevant data for AMA institutions (Article 312 point 2 and Article 321 to 323 of CRR) shall be reported. In the case of combined use of different approaches as indicated in Article 314 of CRR, information on relevant indicator for activities subject to AMA shall be reported. It is also the case for all other AMA banks.

146
4.2. Operational Risk: Detailed information on losses in the last year (OPR DETAILS)
4.2.1. General Remarks
120.Template C 17.01 (OPR DETAILS 1) summarises the information on the gross losses and loss recoveries registered by an institution in the last year according to event types and business lines. Template C 17.02 (OPR DETAILS 2) provides detailed information on the largest loss events in the last year. 121.Operational risk losses that are related to credit risk and are subject to own funds requirements for credit risk (boundary credit-related operational risk events) are neither considered in template C 17.01 nor template C 17.02. 122.In case of a combined use of different approaches for the calculation of own funds requirements for operational risk according to Article 314 CRR, losses and recoveries registered by an institution shall be reported in C 17.01 and C 17.02 irrespective of the approach applied to calculate own funds requirements. 123.“Gross loss” means a loss stemming from an operational risk event or event type

as referred to in Article 322(3)(b) of CRR - before recoveries of any type, without
prejudice to “rapidly recovered loss events” as defined below.
124.“Recovery’ means an independent occurrence related to the original operational risk loss that is separate in time, in which funds or inflows of economic benefits are received from first or third parties, such as insurers or other parties. Recoveries are broken down into recoveries from insurance and other risk transfer mechanisms and direct recoveries. 125.“Rapidly recovered loss events" means operational risk events that lead to losses that are partly or fully recovered within five working days. In case of a rapidly recovered loss event, only the part of the loss that is not fully recovered (i.e. the loss net of the partial rapid recovery) shall be included into the gross loss definition. As a consequence, loss events that lead to losses that are fully recovered within five working days shall not be included into the gross loss definition, as well as into the OPR DETAILS reporting at all. 126.“Date of accounting” means the date when a loss or reserve/provision was first recognized in the Profit and Loss statement, against an operational risk loss. This date logically follows the “Date of occurrence” (i.e. the date when the operational risk event happened or first began) and the “Date of discovery” (i.e. the date on which the institution became aware of the operational risk event). 127.Losses caused by a common operational risk event or by multiple events linked to an initial operational risk event generating events or losses (‘root-event’) are grouped. The grouped events shall be considered and reported as one event, and thus the related gross loss amounts respectively amounts of loss adjustments shall be summed up. 128.The figures reported in June of the respective year are interim figures, while the final figures are reported in December. Therefore the figures in June have a sixmonth reference period (i.e. from 1 January to 30 June of the calendar year) while

147 the figures in December have a twelve-month reference period (i.e. from 1 January to 31 December of the calendar year). Both for data reported as of June and December, “previous reporting reference periods” means all reporting reference periods until and including the one ending at the preceding calendar year end. 129.In order to verify the conditions envisaged by Article 5 (b) (2) (b) (i) of this Regulation, the institutions shall use the latest statistics as available in the Supervisory Disclosure webpage of the EBA to get “the sum of individual balance sheet totals of all institutions within the same Member State”. In order to verify the conditions envisaged by Article 5 (b) 2 (b) (iii), the gross domestic product at market prices as defined in point 8.89 of Annex A to Regulation (EU) No 549/2013 of the European Parliament and of the Council (ESA 2010) and published by Eurostat for the previous calendar year shall be used.
4.2.2. C 17.01: Operational risk losses and recoveries by business lines and event types in the
last year (OPR DETAILS 1)
4.2.2.1. General Remarks
130.In template C 17.01, the information is presented by distributing the losses and recoveries above internal thresholds amongst business lines (as defined in Article 317, Table 2 of CRR including the additional business line "Corporate items" as referred to in Article 322 (3) point b) CRR) and event types (as defined in Article 324 CRR), being possible that the losses corresponding to one event are distributed amongst several business lines. 131.Columns present the different event types and the totals for each business line, together with a memorandum item that shows the lowest internal threshold applied in the data collection of losses, revealing within each business line the lowest and the highest threshold if there is more than one threshold. 132.Rows present the business lines, and within each business line, information on the number of events (new events), the gross loss amount (new events), the number of events subject to loss adjustments, the loss adjustments relating to previous reporting periods, the maximum single loss, the sum of the five largest losses and the total loss recoveries (direct loss recoveries as well as recoveries from insurance and other risk transfer mechanisms). 133.For the total business lines, data on the number of events and the gross loss amount is also required for certain ranges based on set thresholds, 10,000, 20,000, 100,000, and 1,000,000. The thresholds are set in Euro amounts and are included for comparability purposes of the reported losses among institutions; therefore they do not necessarily relate with the minimum loss thresholds used for the internal loss data collection, to be reported in another section of the template.
4.2.2.2. Instructions concerning specific positions
Columns
0010-
0070
EVENT TYPES

148
Institutions report the losses in the respective columns 010 to 070 according to the event types as defined in Article 324 CRR. Institutions that calculate their own funds requirement according to BIA may report those losses for which the event type is not identified in column 080 only. 0080 TOTAL EVENT TYPES In column 080, for each business line, institutions report the total ‘number of events (new events)’, the total of ‘gross loss amount (new events)’, the total ‘number of events subject to loss adjustments’, the total of ‘loss adjustments relating to previous reporting periods’, the ‘maximum single loss’, the ‘sum of the five largest losses’, the total of ‘total direct loss recovery’ and the total of ‘total recovery from insurance and other risk transfer mechanisms’. Provided that the institution has identified the event types for all losses, column 080 shows the simple aggregation of the number of loss events, the total gross loss amounts, the total loss recovery amounts and the ‘loss adjustments relating to previous reporting periods’ reported in columns 010 to 070. The ‘maximum single loss’ reported in column 080 is the maximum single loss within a business line and identical to the maximum of the ‘maximum single losses’ reported in columns 010 to 070, provided that the institution has identified the event types for all losses. For the sum of the five largest losses, in column 080 the sum of the five largest losses within one business line is reported. 0090- 0100 MEMORANDUM ITEM: THRESHOLD APPLIED IN DATA COLLECTION Institutions report in the columns 090 and 100 the minimum loss thresholds they are using for the internal loss data collection in accordance with Article 322 (3) point c), last sentence CRR. If the institution applies only one threshold for in each business line, only the column 090 shall be filled in. In the case where there are different thresholds applied within the same regulatory business line, then the highest applicable threshold (column 100) shall be filled in as well. Rows 0010- 0880 BUSINESS LINES: CORPORATE FINANCE, TRADING AND SALES, RETAIL BROKERAGE, COMMERCIAL BANKING, RETAIL BANKING, PAYMENT AND SETTLEMENT, AGENCY SERVICES, ASSET MANAGEMENT, CORPORATE ITEMS For each business line as defined in Article 317 (4), table 2 CRR, including the additional business line "Corporate items" as referred to in Article 322 (3) point b) CRR, and for each event type, the institution shall report, according to the internal thresholds the following information: number of events (new events), gross loss amount (new events), the number of events subject to loss adjustments, loss adjustments relating to previous reporting periods, maximum single loss, sum of the five largest losses, total direct loss recovery and the total recovery from insurance and other risk transfer mechanisms.

149
For a loss event that affects more than one business line the “gross loss amount” is distributed among all the affected business lines. Institutions that calculate their own funds requirement according to BIA can report those losses for which the business line is not identified in rows 910-980 only. 0010, 0110, 0210, 0310, 0410, 0510, 0610, 0710, 0810 Number of events (new events) The number of events is the number of operational risk events for which gross losses were accounted for within the reporting reference period. The number of events shall refer to “new events”, i.e. operational risk events (i) “accounted for the first time” within the reporting reference period or (ii) “accounted for the first time” within a previous reporting reference period, if the event had not been included in any previous supervisory report, e.g. because it was identified as operational risk event only in the current reporting reference period or because the accumulated loss attributable to that event (i.e. the original loss plus / minus all loss adjustments made in previous reporting reference periods) exceeded the internal data collection threshold only in the current reporting reference period. ‘New events’ do not include operational risk events “accounted for the first time” within a previous reporting reference period, which had been included already in previous supervisory reports. 0020, 0120, 0220, 0320, 0420, 0520, 0620, 0720, 0820 Gross loss amount (new events) The gross loss amount is the gross loss amounts pertinent to operational risk events (e.g. direct charges, provisions, settlements). All losses related to a single event which are accounted for within the reporting reference period are summed up and considered as the gross loss for that event for that reporting reference period. The reported gross loss amount shall refer to “new events” as defined in the row above. For events “accounted for the first time” within a previous reporting reference period which had not been included in any previous supervisory report, the total loss accumulated until the reporting reference date (i.e. the original loss plus / minus all loss adjustments made in previous reporting reference periods) shall be reported as the gross loss at the reporting reference date. The amounts to be reported do not take into account obtained recoveries. 0030, 0130, 0230, 0330, 0430, 0530, 0630, 0730, 0830 Number of loss events subject to loss adjustments The number of loss events subject to loss adjustments isthe number of operational risk events “accounted for the first time” in previous reporting reference periods and already included in previous reports, for which loss adjustments were made in the current reporting reference period. If more than one loss adjustment was made for an event within the reporting reference period, the sum of those loss adjustments shall be counted as one adjustment in the period.

150
0040,
0140,
0240,
0340,
0440,
0540,
0640,
0740,
0840
Loss adjustments relating to previous reporting periods Loss adjustments relating to previous reporting reference periods is the sum of the following elements (positive or negative):
(i) the gross loss amounts pertinent to positive loss adjustments made within the reporting reference period (e.g. increase of provisions, linked loss events, additional settlements) of operational risk events “accounted for the first time” and reported in previous reporting reference periods; (ii) the gross loss amounts pertinent to negative loss adjustments made within the reporting reference period (e.g. due to decrease of provisions) of operational risk events “accounted for the first time” and reported in previous reporting reference periods. If more than one loss adjustment was made for an event within the reporting reference period, the amounts of all those loss adjustments are summed up, taking into account the sign of the adjustments (positive, negative). This sum is considered as the loss adjustment for that event for that reporting reference period. If, due to a negative loss adjustment, the adjusted loss amount attributable to an event falls below the internal data collection threshold of the institution, the institution shall report the total loss amount for that event accumulated until the last time when the event was reported for a December reference date (i.e. the original loss plus / minus all loss adjustments made in previous reporting reference periods) with a negative sign instead of the amount of the negative loss adjustment itself. The amounts to be reported do not take into account obtained recoveries. 0050, 0150, 0250, 0350, 0450, 0550, 0650, 0750, 0850 Maximum single loss The Maximum single loss is the larger of (i) the largest gross loss amount related to an event reported for the first time within the reporting reference period and (ii) the largest positive loss adjustment amount (as defined above) related to an event reported for the first time within a previous reporting reference period. The amounts to be reported do not take into account obtained recoveries. 0060, 0160, 0260, 0360, 0460, 0560, 0660, 0760, 0860 Sum of the five largest losses The sum of the five largest losses is the sum of the five largest amounts among (i) the gross loss amounts for events reported for the first time within the reporting reference period and (ii) the positive loss adjustment amounts (as defined for rows 040, 140, …, 840 above) relating to events reported for the first time within a previous reporting reference period. The amount which can qualify as one of the five largest ones is the amount of the loss adjustment itself, not the total loss associated with the respective event before or after the loss adjustment. The amounts to be reported do not take into account obtained recoveries.

151
0070,
0170,
0270,
0370,
0470,
0570,
0670,
0770,
0870
Total direct loss recovery
Direct recoveries are all recoveries obtained except those which are subject to
Article 323 CRR as reported in the row below.
The total direct loss recovery is the sum of all the direct recoveries and adjustments to direct recoveries accounted for within the reporting period and pertinent to operational risk events accounted for the first time within the reporting reference period or in previous reporting reference periods. 0080, 0180, 0280, 0380, 0480, 0580, 0680, 0780, 0880 Total recovery from insurance and other risk transfer mechanisms Recoveries from insurance and other risk transfer mechanisms are those recoveries which are subject to Article 323 CRR. The total recovery from insurance and other risk transfer mechanisms is the sum of all the recoveries from insurance and other risk transfer mechanisms and adjustments to such recoveries accounted within the reporting reference period and pertinent to operational risk events accounted for the first time within the reporting reference period or in previous reporting reference periods. 0910- 0980 TOTAL BUSINESS LINES For each event type (column 010 to 080), the information (Article 322 (3) lit. b), c) and e) of CRR on total business lines has to be reported. 0910- 0914 Number of Events In row 910, the number of events above the internal threshold by event types for the total business lines shall be reported. This figure may be lower than the aggregation of the number of events by business lines since the events with multiple impacts (impacts in different business lines) shall be considered as one. It may be higher, if an institution calculating its own funds requirements according to BIA cannot identify the business line(s) affected by the loss in every case. In rows 911 – 914, the number of events with a gross loss amount within the ranges defined in the pertinent rows shall be reported. Provided that the institution has assigned all its losses either to a business line listed in Article 317 (4) table 2 CRR or the business line "Corporate items" as referred to in Article 322 (3) point b) CRR respectively that it has identified the event types for all losses, the following shall apply for column 080:

The total number of events reported in rows 910 to 914 is equal to the horizontal aggregation of the number of events in the corresponding row, given
that in those figures the events with impacts in different business lines shall have already been considered as one event.
The figure reported in column 080, row 910 shall not necessarily be equal to
the vertical aggregation of the number of events which are included in column 080, given that one event can have an impact in different business lines simultaneously.

152
0920-
0924
Gross loss amount (new events)
Provided that the institution has assigned all its losses either to a business line listed in Article 317 (4) table 2 CRR or the business line "Corporate items" as referred to in Article 322 (3) point b) CRR, the gross loss amount (new events) reported in row 920 is the simple aggregation of the gross loss amounts of new events for each business line. In rows 921 – 924, the gross loss amount for events with a gross loss amount within the ranges defined in the pertinent rows shall be reported. 0930, 0935, 0936 Number of loss events subject to loss adjustments In row 930, the total of the numbers of events subject to loss adjustments as defined for rows 030, 130, …, 830 shall be reported. This figure may be lower than the aggregation of the number of events subject to loss adjustments by business lines since events with multiple impacts (impacts in different business lines) shall be considered as one. It may be higher, if an institution calculating its own funds requirements according to BIA cannot identify the business line(s) affected by the loss in every case. The number of loss events subject to loss adjustments shall be broken down into the number of events for which a positive loss adjustment was made within the reporting reference period and the number of events for which a negative loss adjustment was made within the reporting period (all reported with a positive sign). 0940, 0945, 0946 Loss adjustments relating to previous reporting periods In row 940, the total of the loss adjustment amounts relating to previous reporting periods per business lines (as defined for rows 040, 140, …, 840) shall be reported. Provided that the institution has assigned all its losses either to a business line listed in Article 317 (4) table 2 of CRR or the business line "Corporate items" as referred to in Article 322 (3) point b) of CRR, the amount reported in row 940 is the simple aggregation of the loss adjustments relating to previous reporting periods reported for the different business lines. The amount of loss adjustments shall be broken down into the amount related to events for which a positive loss adjustment was made in the reporting reference period (row 945, reported with as positive figure) and the amount related to events for which a negative loss adjustment was made within the reporting period (row 946, reported as negative figure). If, due to a negative loss adjustment, the adjusted loss amount attributable to an event falls below the internal data collection threshold of the institution, the institution shall report the total loss amount for that event accumulated until the last time when the event was reported for a December reference date (i.e. the original loss plus / minus all loss adjustments made in previous reporting reference periods) with a negative sign in row 946 instead of the amount of the negative loss adjustment itself. 0950 Maximum single loss Provided that the institution has assigned all its losses either to a business
line listed in Article 317 (4) table 2 CRR or the business line "Corporate items" as

153 referred to in Article 322 (3) point b) CRR, the maximum single loss is the maximum loss over the internal threshold for each event type and amongst all business lines. These figures may be higher than the highest single loss recorded in each business line if an event impacts different business lines. Provided that the institution has assigned all its losses either to a business line listed in Article 317 (4) table 2 CRR or the business line "Corporate items" as referred to in Article 322 (3) point b) CRR respectively that it has identified the event types for all losses, the following shall apply for column 080:

The maximum single loss reported shall be equal to the highest of the values
reported in columns 010 – 070 of this row.
If there are events having an impact in different business lines, the amount
reported in {r950, c080} may be higher than the amounts of “Maximum single loss” per business line reported in other rows of column 080. 0960 Sum of the five largest losses The sum of the five largest gross losses for each event type and amongst all business lines is reported. This sum may be higher than the highest sum of the five largest losses recorded in each business line. This sum has to be reported regardless of the number of losses. Provided that the institution has assigned all its losses either to a business line listed in Article 317 (4) table 2 CRR or the business line "Corporate items" as referred to in Article 322 (3) point b) CRR respectively that it has identified the event types for all losses, for column 080, the sum of the five largest losses shall be the sum of the five largest losses in the whole matrix, which means that it may not necessarily be equal to neither the maximum value of “sum of the five largest losses” in row 960 nor the maximum value of “sum of the five largest losses” in column 080. 0970 Total direct loss recovery Provided that the institution has assigned all its losses either to a business line listed in Article 317 (4) table 2 CRR or the business line "Corporate items" as referred to in Article 322 (3) point b) CRR, the total direct loss recovery is the simple aggregation of the total direct loss recovery for each business line. 0980 Total recovery from insurance and other risk transfer mechanisms Provided that the institution has assigned all its losses either to a business line listed in Article 317 (4) table 2 CRR or the business line "Corporate items" as referred to in Article 322 (3) point b) CRR, the total recovery from insurance and other risk transfer mechanisms is the simple aggregation of the total loss recovery from insurance and other risk transfer mechanisms for each business line.

154
4.2.3. C 17.02: Operational risk: Detailed information on the largest loss events in the last year
(OPR DETAILS 2)
4.2.3.1. General Remarks
134.In template C 17.02, information on individual loss events shall be provided (one row per event). 135.The information reported in this template shall refer to “new events”, i.e. operational risk events (a) “accounted for the first time” within the reporting reference period or (b) “accounted for the first time” within a previous reporting reference period, if the event had not been included in any previous supervisory report, e.g. because it was identified as operational risk event only in the current reporting reference period or because the accumulated loss attributable to that event (i.e. the original loss plus / minus all loss adjustments made in previous reporting reference periods) exceeded the internal data collection threshold only in the current reporting reference period.. 136.Only events entailing a gross loss amount of 100,000 € or more shall be reported. Subject to that threshold, (a) the largest event for each event type, provided that the institution has identified the event types for losses and (b) at least the ten largest of the remaining events with or without identified event type by gross loss amount shall be included in the template. (c) Events are ranked based on the gross loss attributed to them. (d) An event shall only be considered once.
4.2.3.2. Instructions concerning specific positions
Columns
0010 Event ID
The event ID is a row identifier and shall be unique for each row in the table.
Where an internal ID is available, institutions shall provide the internal ID. Otherwise, the reported ID shall follow the numerical order 1, 2, 3, etc. 0020 Date of Accounting Date of accounting means the date when a loss or reserve / provision against an operational risk loss was first recognized in the Profit and Loss statement. 0030 Date of occurrence Date of occurrence is the date when the operational risk event happened or first began.

155
0040 Date of discovery
Date of discovery is the date on which the institution became aware of the operational risk event. 0050 Event Type Event types as defined in Article 324 CRR 0060 Gross loss Gross loss related to the event as defined for rows 020, 120 etc. of template C 17.01 above 0070 Gross loss net of direct recoveries Gross loss related to the event as defined for rows 020, 120 etc. of template C 17.01 above net of direct recoveries pertinent to that loss event 0080 - 0160 Gross loss by business line The gross loss as reported in column 060 shall be allocated to the relevant business lines as defined in Articles 317 and 322 (3) point b) CRR. 0170 Legal Entity name Name of the legal entity as reported in column 010 of C 06.02 where the loss – or the greatest share of the loss, if several entities were affected – occurred. 0180 Legal Entity ID LEI code of the legal entity as reported in column 025 of C 06.02 where the loss – or the greatest share of the loss, if several entities were affected – occurred. 0190 Business Unit Business unit or corporate division of the institution where the loss – or the greatest share of the loss if several business units or corporate divisions were affected – occurred. 0200 Description Narrative description of the event, where necessary in an generalised or anonymised manner, which shall comprise at least information about the event itself and information about the drivers or causes of the event, where known.

156
5. Market Risk Templates
137.These instructions refer to the templates reporting of the calculation of own funds requirements according to the standardised approach for foreign exchange risk (MKR SA FX), commodities risk (MKR SA COM) interest rate risk (MKR SA TDI, MKR SA SEC, MKR SA CTP) and equity risk (MKR SA EQU). Additionally, instructions for the template reporting of the calculation of own funds requirements according to the internal models approach (MKR IM) are included in this part. 138.The position risk on a traded debt instrument or equity (or debt or equity derivative) shall be divided into two components in order to calculate the capital required against it. The first shall be its specific-risk component — this is the risk of a price change in the instrument concerned due to factors related to its issuer or, in the case of a derivative, the issuer of the underlying instrument. The second component shall cover its general risk — this is the risk of a price change in the instrument due (in the case of a traded debt instrument or debt derivative) to a change in the level of interest rates or (in the case of an equity or equity derivative) to a broad equity- market movement unrelated to any specific attributes of individual securities. The general treatment of specific instruments and netting procedures can be found in Articles 326 to 333 of CRR.
5.1. C 18.00 – Market Risk: Standardised Approach for Position Risks in Traded Debt Instruments (MKR SA TDI)
5.1.1. General Remarks
139.This template captures the positions and the related own funds requirements for position risks on traded debt instruments under the standardised approach (Articles 102 and 105 (1) of CRR). The different risks and methods available under CRR are considered by rows. The specific risk associated with exposures included in MKR SA SEC and MKR SA CTP only has to be reported in the Total template of the MKR SA TDI. The own funds requirements reported in those templates shall be transferred to cell {325;060} (securitisations) and {330;060} (CTP) respectively. . 140.The template has to be filled out separately for the “Total”, plus a pre-defined list of following currencies: EUR, ALL, BGN, CZK, DKK, EGP, GBP, HRK, HUF, ISK, JPY, MKD, NOK, PLN, RON, RUB, RSD, SEK, CHF, TRY, UAH, USD and one residual template for all other currencies.
5.1.2. Instructions concerning specific positions
Columns
010-
020
ALL POSITIONS (LONG AND SHORT)
Articles 102 and 105 (1) of CRR. These are gross positions not netted by instruments but excluding underwriting positions subscribed or sub-underwritten by third parties (Article 345 second sentence of CRR). Regarding the distinction between Long and Short positions, also applicable to these gross positions, see
Article 328 (2) of CRR.

157
030-
040
NET POSITIONS (LONG AND SHORT)
Articles 327 to 329 and 334 of CRR. Regarding the distinction between Long and Short positions see Article 328 (2) of CRR. 050 POSITIONS SUBJECT TO CAPITAL CHARGE Those net positions that, according to the different approaches considered in Part 3 Title IV Chapter 2 of CRR, receive a capital charge. 060 OWN FUNDS REQUIREMENTS The capital charge for any relevant position according to Part 3 Title IV Chapter 2 of CRR. 070 TOTAL RISK EXPOSURE AMOUNT
Article 92 (4) lit. b of CRR. Result of the multiplication of the own funds requirements by 12.5.
Rows
010-
350
TRADED DEBT INSTRUMENTS IN TRADING BOOK
Positions in traded debt instruments in Trading Book and their correspondent own funds requirements for position risk according to Article 92 (3) point b) (i) CRR and Part 3 Title IV Chapter 2 of CRR are reported depending on risk category, maturity and approach used. 011 GENERAL RISK. 012 Derivatives Derivatives included in the calculation of interest rate risk of trading book positions taking into account Articles 328 to 331, if applicable. 013 Other assets and liabilities Instruments other than derivatives included in the calculation of interest rate risk of trading book positions. 020- 200 MATURITY BASED APPROACH Positions in traded debt instruments subject to the maturity-based approach according to Article 339 (1) to (8) of CRR and the correspondent own funds requirements set up in Article 339 (9) of CRR. The position shall be split by zones 1, 2 and 3 and these by the maturity of the instruments. 210- 240 GENERAL RISK. DURATION BASED APPROACH Positions in traded debt instruments subject to the duration-based approach according to Article 340 (1) to (6) of CRR and the correspondent own funds requirements set up in Article 340 (7) of CRR. The position shall be split by zones 1, 2 and 3. 250 SPECIFIC RISK

158
Sum of amounts reported in rows 251, 325 and 330.
Positions in traded debt instruments subject to the specific risk capital charge and their correspondent capital charge according to Article 92 (3) lit. b and 335, 336 (1) to (3), 337 and 338 of CRR. Be also aware of last sentence in Article 327 (1) of CRR. 251- 321 Own funds requirement for non-securitisation debt instruments Sum of the amounts reported in rows 260 to 321. The own funds requirement of the n-th to default credit derivatives which are not rated externally has to be computed by summing up the risk weights of the reference entities (Article 332 (1) point e) para 1 and 2 CRR – “look-through”). Nth-to-default credit derivatives which are rated externally (Article 332 (1) point e) para 3 CRR) shall be reported separately in line 321. Reporting of positions subject to Article 336 (3) CRR:
There is a special treatment for bonds which qualify for a 10% risk weight in the banking book according to Article 129 (3) CRR (covered bonds). The specific own funds requirements is half of the percentage of the second category of table 1 of Article 336 CRR. Those positions have to be assigned to rows 280-300 according to the residual term to final maturity. If the general risk of interest rate positions is hedged by a credit derivative, Articles 346 and 347 shall be applied. 325 Own funds requirement for securitisation instruments Total own funds requirements reported in column 610 of template MKR SA SEC. It shall only be reported on Total level of the MKR SA TDI. 330 Own funds requirement for the correlation trading portfolio Total own funds requirements reported in column 450 of template MKR SA CTP. It shall only be reported on Total level of the MKR SA TDI. 350- 390 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR OPTIONS (NON-DELTA RISKS)
Article 329 (3) of CRR.
The additional requirements for options related to non-delta risks shall be reported in the method used for its calculation.

159
5.2. C 19.00 - MARKET RISK: STANDARDISED APPROACH FOR SPECIFIC RISK IN
SECURITISATIONS (MKR SA SEC)
5.2.1. General Remarks
141.This template requests information on positions (all/net and long/short) and the related own funds requirements for the specific risk component of position risk in securitisations/ re-securitisations held in the trading book (not eligible for correlation trading portfolio) under the standardised approach. 142.The MKR SA SEC template determines the own funds requirement only for the specific risk of securitisation positions according to Articles 335 in connection with 337 CRR. If securitisation positions of the trading book are hedged by credit derivatives, Articles 346 and 347 CRR apply. There is only one template for all positions of the trading book, irrespective of the fact whether the institution uses the Standardised Approach or the Internal Ratings Based Approach to determine the risk weight for each of the positions according to Part Three Title II Chapter 5 of CRR. The reporting of the own funds requirements of the general risk of these positions is conducted in the MKR SA TDI or the MKR IM template. 143.Positions which receive a risk weight of 1.250% can alternatively be deducted from CET1 (see Articles 244(1) point (b), 245(1) point (b) and 253 of CRR). If this is the case, those positions have to be reported in row 460 of CA1.
5.2.2. Instructions concerning specific positions
Columns
010-020 ALL POSITIONS (LONG AND SHORT)
Articles 102 and 105 (1) of CRR in connection with Article 337 of CRR (securitisation positions). Regarding the distinction between Long and Short positions, also applicable to these gross positions, see Article 328 (2) of CRR. 030-040 (-) POSITIONS DEDUCTED FROM OWN FUNDS (LONG AND SHORT) Articles 244(1) point (b), 245(1) point (b) and 253 of CRR. 050-060 NET POSITIONS (LONG AND SHORT) Articles 327 to 329 and 334 of CRR. Regarding the distinction between Long and Short positions see Article 328 (2) of CRR. 061-104 BREAKDOWN OF THE NET POSITIONS ACCORDING TO RISK WEIGHTS
Article 259, 260, 261, 262, 263 (Tables 1 and 2), 264 (Tables 3 and 4) and 266
of CRR. The breakdown shall be done separately for long and short positions.
402-406 BREAKDOWN OF THE NET POSITIONS ACCORDING TO APPROACHES

160
Article 254 of CRR.
402 SEC-IRBA
Article 259 and 260 of CRR.
403 SEC-SA
Article 261 and 262 of CRR.
404 SEC-ERBA
Article 263 and 264 of CRR.
405 INTERNAL ASSESSMENT APPROACH
Articles 254, 265 and 266 (5) of CRR.
406 OTHER (RW=1250%)
Article 254 (7) of CRR.
530-540 OVERALL EFFECT (ADJUSTMENT) DUE TO INFRINGEMENT OF
CHAPTER 2 OF REGULATION (EU) 2017/2402
Article 270a of CRR.
570 BEFORE CAP
Article 337 of CRR without taking into account the discretion of Article 335 of
CRR, that allows an institution to cap the product of the weight and the net position at the maximum possible default-risk related loss. 601 AFTER CAP / TOTAL OWN FUND REQUIREMENTS
Article 337 of CRR taking into account the discretion of Article 335 of CRR.
Rows
010 TOTAL EXPOSURES
Total amount of outstanding securitisations and re-securitisations (held in the trading book) reported by the institution playing the role/s of originator and/or investor and/or sponsor. 040,070 and SECURITISATIONS

161
100 Article 4(61) and (62) of CRR.
020,050,
080 and110
RE-SECURITISATIONS
Article 4(1)(63) and (64) of CRR.
041, 071 and 101 OF WHICH: QUALIFYING FOR DIFFERENTIATED CAPITAL TREATMENT Articles 254 (1) (a) (b), (c), (2), (3), (4), (6), 259, 260, 261, 262, 263, 264, 265, 266, 269, 270 CRR. Total amount of securitsation positions which fulfil the criteria of Article 243 of CRR and therefore qualify for differentiated capital treatment. 030-050 ORIGINATOR
Article 4(13) of CRR
060-080 INVESTOR
Credit institution that holds a securitisation positions in a securitisation transaction for which it is neither originator, sponsor nor original lender 090-110 SPONSOR
Article 4(14) of CRR. If a sponsor is also securitising it own assets, it shall fill
in the originator's rows with the information regarding its own securitised assets
5.3. C 20.00 - MARKET RISK: STANDARDISED APPROACH FOR SPECIFIC RISK
FOR POSITIONS ASSIGNED TO THE CORRELATION TRADING PORTFOLIO (MKR SA CTP)
5.3.1. General Remarks
144.This template requests information on positions of the CTP (comprising securitisations, nth-to-default credit derivatives and other CTP positions included according to Article 338 (3) of CRR) and the corresponding own funds requirements under the standardised approach. 145.The MKR SA CTP template determines the own funds requirement only for the specific risk of positions assigned to the Correlation Trading Portfolio according to
Article 335 of CRR in connection with Articles 338 (2) and (3) of CRR. If CTPpositions of the trading book are hedged by credit derivatives, Articles 346 and 347
of CRR apply. There is only one template for all CTP-positions of the trading book,

162 irrespective of the fact which approach institutions apply to determine the risk weight for each of the positions according to Part Three Title II Chapter 5 of CRR. The reporting of the own funds requirements of the general risk of these positions is conducted in the MKR SA TDI or the MKR IM template. 146.This structure of the template separates securitisation positions, n-th to default credit derivatives and other CTP-positions. As a result, securitisation positions shall always be reported in rows 030, 060 or 090 (depending on the role of the institution in the securitisation). N-th to default credit derivatives shall always be reported in row 110. The "other CTP-positions" are neither securitisation positions nor n-th to default credit derivatives (see definition in Article 338 (3) CRR), but they are explicitly "linked" (because of the hedging intent) to one of these two positions. 147.Positions which receive a risk weight of 1.250% can alternatively be deducted from CET1 (see 244(1) point (b), 245(1) point (b) and 253 of CRR). If this is the case, those positions have to be reported in row 460 of CA1.
5.3.2. Instructions concerning specific positions
Columns
010-020 ALL POSITIONS (LONG AND SHORT)
Articles 102 and 105 (1) of CRR in connection with positions assigned to the Correlation Trading Portfolio according to Article 338 (2) and (3) of CRR. Regarding the distinction between Long and Short positions, also applicable to these gross positions, see Article 328 (2) of CRR. 030-040 (-) POSITIONS DEDUCTED FROM OWN FUNDS (LONG AND SHORT)
Article 253 of CRR.
050-060 NET POSITIONS (LONG AND SHORT)
Articles 327 to 329 and 334 of CRR. Regarding the distinction between Long and Short positions see Article 328 (2) of CRR. 071-097 BREAKDOWN OF THE NET POSITIONS ACCORDING TO RISK WEIGHTS
Article 259, 260, 261, 262, 263 (Tables 1 and 2), 264 (Tables 3 and 4) and 266
of CRR.
402-406 BREAKDOWN OF THE NET POSITIONS ACCORDING TO APPROACHES

163
Article 254 of CRR.
402 SEC-IRBA
Article 259 and 260 of CRR.
403 SEC-SA
Article 261 and 262 of CRR.
404 SEC-ERBA
Article 263 and 264 of CRR.
405 INTERNAL ASSESSMENT APPROACH
Articles 254, 265 and 266 (5) of CRR.
406 OTHER (RW=1250%)
Article 254 (7) of CRR.
410-420 BEFORE CAP - WEIGHTED NET LONG / SHORT POSITIONS
Article 338 without taking into account the discretion of Article 335 of CRR.
430-440 AFTER CAP - WEIGHTED NET LONG / SHORT POSITIONS
Article 338 taking into account the discretion of Article 335 of CRR.
450 TOTAL OWN FUNDS REQUIREMENTS
The own funds requirement is determined as the larger of either (i) the specific risk charge that would apply just to the net long positions (column 430) or (ii) the specific risk charge that would apply just to the net short positions (column 440). Rows 010 TOTAL EXPOSURES Total amount of outstanding positions (held in the correlation trading portfolio) reported by the institution playing the role/s of originator, investor or sponsor.

164
020-
040 ORIGINATOR
Article 4 (13) of CRR
050-
070 INVESTOR
Credit institution that holds a securitisation positions in a securitisation transaction for which it is neither originator, sponsor nor original lender. 080- 100 SPONSOR
Article 4 (14) of CRR. If a sponsor is also securitising it own assets, it shall fill in
the originator's rows with the information regarding its own securitised assets 030,060 and 090 SECURITISATIONS The correlation trading portfolio comprises securitisations, n-th-to-default credit derivatives and possibly other hedging positions that meet the criteria set in Article 338 (2) and (3) of CRR. Derivatives of securitisation exposures that provide a pro-rata share as well as positions hedging CTP positions shall be included in row 'Other CTP positions'. 110 N-TH-TO-DEFAULT CREDIT DERIVATIVES N-th to default credit derivatives that are hedged by n-th-to-default credit derivatives according to Article 347 CRR shall both be reported here. The positions originator, investor and sponsor do not fit for n-th to default credit derivatives. As a consequence, the breakdown as for securitisation positions cannot be provided for n-th to default credit derivatives. 040, 070, 100 and 120 OTHER CTP POSITIONS The positions in:

Derivatives of securitisation exposures that provide a pro-rata share as well
as positions hedging CTP positions;
CTP positions hedged by credit derivatives according to Article 346 CRR;
Other positions that satisfy Article 338 (3) of CRR;
are included.
5.4. C 21.00 - Market Risk: Standardised Approach for Position Risk in Equities (MKR SA
EQU)
5.4.1. General Remarks
148.This template requests information on the positions and the corresponding own funds requirements for position risk in equities held in the trading book and treated under the standardised approach.

165
149.The template has to be filled out separately for the “Total”, plus a static, predefined list of following markets: Bulgaria, Croatia, Czech Republic, Denmark, Egypt, Hungary, Iceland, Liechtenstein, Norway, Poland, Romania, Sweden, United Kingdom, Albania, Japan, Former Yugoslav Republic of Macedonia, Russian Federation, Serbia, Switzerland, Turkey, Ukraine, USA, Euro Area plus one residual template for all other markets. For the purpose of this reporting requirement the term “market” shall be read as “country” (except for countries belonging to the Euro Area, see Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) No 525/2014).
5.4.2. Instructions concerning specific positions
Columns
010-
020
ALL POSITIONS (LONG AND SHORT)
Articles 102 and 105 (1) of CRR. These are gross positions not netted by instruments but excluding underwriting positions subscribed or sub-underwritten by third parties (Article 345 second sentence of CRR). 030- 040 NET POSITIONS (LONG AND SHORT) Articles 327, 329, 332, 341 and 345 of CRR. 050 POSITIONS SUBJECT TO CAPITAL CHARGE Those net positions that, according to the different approaches considered in Part 3 Title IV Chapter 2 of CRR, receive a capital charge. The capital charge has to be calculated for each national market separately. Positions in stock-index futures according to the second sentence of Article 344 (4) CRR shall not be included in this column. 060 OWN FUNDS REQUIREMENTS The capital charge for any relevant position according to Part 3 Title IV Chapter 2 of CRR. 070 TOTAL RISK EXPOSURE AMOUNT
Article 92 (4) lit. b of CRR. Result of the multiplication of the own funds requirements by 12.5.
Rows
010-
130
EQUITIES IN TRADING BOOK
Own funds requirements for position risk according to article 92 (3) point b) (i) CRR and Part 3 Title IV Chapter 2 Section 3 of CRR. 020- 040 GENERAL RISK

166
Positions in equities subject to general risk (Article 343 of CRR) and their correspondent own funds requirement according to Part 3 Title IV Chapter 2 Section 3 of CRR. Both breakdowns (021/022 as well as 030/040) are a breakdown related to all positions subject to general risk. Rows 021 and 022 requests information on the breakdown according to instruments. Only the breakdown in rows 030 and 040 is used as a basis for the calculation of own funds requirements. 021 Derivatives Derivatives included in the calculation of equity risk of trading book positions taking into account Articles 329 and 332, if applicable. 022 Other assets and liabilities Instruments other than derivatives included in the calculation of equity risk of trading book positions. 030 Exchange traded stock-index futures broadly diversified and subject to a particular approach Exchange traded stock-index futures broadly diversified and subject to a particular approach according to Article 344 (1) and (4) of CRR. These positions are only subject to general risk and, accordingly, must not be reported in row (050). 040 Other equities than exchange traded stock-index futures broadly diversified Other positions in equities subject to specific risk and the correspondent own funds requirements according to Article 343 and 344 (3) of CRR. 050 SPECIFIC RISK Positions in equities subject to specific risk and the correspondent own funds requirement according to Articles 342 and 344 (4) CRR. 090- 130 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR OPTIONS (NON-DELTA RISKS)
Article 329 (2) and (3) of CRR.
The additional requirements for options related to non-delta risks shall be reported in the method used for its calculation.

167
5.5. C 22.00 - Market Risk: Standardised Approaches for Foreign Exchange Risk (MKR SA
FX)
5.5.1. General Remarks
150.Institutions shall report information on the positions in each currency (reporting currency included) and the corresponding own funds requirements for foreign exchange treated under the standardised approach. The position is calculated for each currency (including euro), gold, and positions to CIUs. 151.Rows 100 to 480 of this template shall be reported even if institutions are not required to calculate own funds requirements for foreign exchange risk according to
Article 351 of CRR. In those memorandum items, all the positions in the reporting
currency are included, irrespective of the extent to which they are considered for the purposes of Article 354 CRR. Rows 130 to 480 of the memorandum items of the template shall be filled out separately for all currencies of the member states of the Union and the following currencies: USD, CHF, JPY, RUB, TRY, AUD, CAD, RSD, ALL, UAH, MKD, EGP, ARS, BRL, MXN, HKD, ICK, TWD, NZD, NOK, SGD, KRW, CNY and all other currencies.
5.5.2. Instructions concerning specific positions
Columns
020-
030
ALL POSITIONS (LONG AND SHORT)
Gross positions due to assets, amounts to be received and similar items referred to in Article 352(1) of CRR. According to Article 352(2) and subject to permission from competent authorities, positions taken to hedge against the adverse effect of the exchange rate on their ratios in accordance with Article 92(1) and positions related to items that are already deducted in the calculation of own funds shall not be reported. 040- 050 NET POSITIONS (LONG AND SHORT) Articles 352(3) and (4), first and second sentences, and 353 of CRR. The net positions are calculated by each currency, accordingly there may be simultaneous long and short positions. 060- 080 POSITIONS SUBJECT TO CAPITAL CHARGE Articles 352(4), third sentence, 353 and 354 of CRR. 060- 070 POSITIONS SUBJECT TO CAPITAL CHARGE (LONG AND SHORT) The long and short net positions for each currency are calculated by deducting the total of short positions from the total of long positions. Long net positions for each operation in a currency are added to obtain the long net position in that currency. Short net positions for each operation in a currency are added to obtain the short net position in that currency.

168
Unmatched positions in non-reporting currencies are added to positions subject to capital charges for other currencies (row 030) in column (060) or (070) depending on their short or long arrangement. 080 POSITIONS SUBJECT TO CAPITAL CHARGE (MATCHED) Matched positions for closely correlated currencies 090 OWN FUNDS REQUIREMENTS The capital charge for any relevant position according to Part 3 Title IV Chapter 3 of CRR. 100 TOTAL RISK EXPOSURE AMOUNT
Article 92 (4) lit. b of CRR. Result of the multiplication of the own funds requirements by 12.5.
Rows
010 TOTAL POSITIONS
All positions in non-reporting currencies and those positions in the reporting currency that are considered for the purposes of Article 354 CRR as well as their correspondent own funds requirements according to article 92 (3) point c) (i) and
Article 352 (2) and (4) of CRR (for conversion into the reporting currency).
020 CURRENCIES CLOSELY CORRELATED
Positions and their correspondent own funds requirements for currencies referred to in Article 354 of CRR. 025 Currencies closely correlated: of which: reporting currency Positions in the reporting currency which contribute to the calculation of the capital requirements according to Article 354 CRR 030 ALL OTHER CURRENCIES (including CIU´s treated as different currencies) Positions and their correspondent own funds requirements for currencies subject to the general procedure referred to in Articles 351 and 352 (2) and (4) of CRR. Reporting of CIU´s treated as separate currencies according to Article 353 CRR :
There are two different treatments of CIU´s treated as separate currencies for calculating the capital requirements:

169

The modified gold method, if the direction of the CIU´s investment is not
available (those CIU´s shall be added to an institution´s overall net foreign-exchange position)
If the direction of the CIU´s investment is available, those CIU´s shall be
added to the total open foreign exchange position (long or short, depending on the direction of the CIU) The reporting of those CIU´s follows the calculation of the capital requirements accordingly. 040 GOLD Positions and their correspondent own funds requirements for currencies subject to the general procedure referred to in Articles 351 and 352 (2) and (4) of CRR. 050 - 090 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR OPTIONS (NON-DELTA RISKS)
Article 352 (5) and (6) of CRR.
The additional requirements for options related to non-delta risks shall be reported in the method used for its calculation. 100- 120 Breakdown of total positions (reporting currency included) by exposure types Total positions shall be broken down according to derivatives, other assets and liabilities and off-balance sheet items. 100 Other assets and liabilities other than off-balance sheet items and derivatives Positions not included in row 110 or 120 shall be included here. 110 Off-balance sheet items Items within the scope of Article 352 CRR, irrespective of the currency of denomination, which are included in Annex I of CRR except those included as Securities Financing Transactions & Long Settlement Transactions or from Contractual Cross Product Netting. 120 Derivatives Positions valued according to Articles 352 CRR. 130- 480 MEMORANDUM ITEMS : CURRENCY POSITIONS The memorandum items of the template shall be filled out separately for All currencies of the member states of the Union and the following currencies: USD, CHF, JPY, RUB, TRY, AUD, CAD, RSD, ALL, UAH, MKD, EGP, ARS, BRL, MXN, HKD, ICK, TWD, NZD, NOK, SGD, KRW, CNY and all other currencies.

170
5.6. C 23.00 - Market Risk: Standardised Approaches for Commodities (MKR SA COM)
5.6.1. General Remarks
152.This template request information on the positions in commodities and the corresponding own funds requirements treated under the standardised approach.
5.6.2. Instructions concerning specific positions
Columns
010-
020
All POSITIONS (LONG AND SHORT)
Gross long/short positions considered positions in the same commodity according to Article 357 (1) and (4) of CRR (see also Article 359 (1) of CRR). 030- 040 NET POSITIONS (LONG AND SHORT) As defined in Article 357 (3) of CRR. 050 POSITIONS SUBJECT TO CAPITAL CHARGE Those net positions that, according to the different approaches considered in Part 3 Title IV Chapter 4 of CRR, receive a capital charge. 060 OWN FUNDS REQUIREMENTS The capital charge for any relevant position according to Part 3 Title IV Chapter 4 of CRR. 070 TOTAL RISK EXPOSURE AMOUNT
Article 92 (4) lit. b of CRR. Result of the multiplication of the own funds requirements * 12.5.
Rows
010 TOTAL POSITIONS IN COMMODITIES
Positions in commodities and their correspondent own funds requirements for market risk according to article 92 (3) point c) (iii) CRR and Part 3 Title IV
Chapter 4 of CRR.
020-
060
POSITIONS BY CATEGORY OF COMMODITY
For reporting purposes commodities are grouped in the four main groups of commodities referred to in Table 2 of Article 361 CRR. 070 MATURITY LADDER APPROACH

171
Positions in commodities subject to the Maturity Ladder approach as referred to in Article 359 of CRR. 080 EXTENDED MATURITY LADDER APPROACH Positions in commodities subject to the Extended Maturity Ladder approach as referred to in Article 361 of CRR 090 SIMPLIFIED APPROACH Positions in commodities subject to the Simplified approach as referred to in
Article 360 of CRR.
100-
140
ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR OPTIONS (NON-DELTA RISKS)
Article 358 (4) of CRR.
The additional requirements for options related to non-delta risks shall be reported in the method used for its calculation
5.7. C 24.00 - Market Risk Internal Model (MKR IM)
5.7.1. General Remarks
153.This template provides a breakdown of VaR and stressed VaR (sVaR) figures according to the different market risks (debt, equity, FX, commodities) and other information relevant for the calculation of the own funds requirements. 154.Generally the reporting depends on the structure of the model of the institutions whether they report the figures for general and specific risk separately or together. The same holds true for the decomposition of the VAR /Stress-Var into the risk categories (interest rate risk, equity risk, commodities risk and foreign exchange risk). An institution can resign to report the decompositions mentioned above if it proves that a reporting of these figures would be unduly burdensome.
5.7.2. Instructions concerning specific positions
Columns
030-
040
VaR
It means the maximum potential loss that would result from a price change with a given probability over a specified time horizon. 030 Multiplication factor (mc) x Average of previous 60 working days VaR (VaRavg) Articles 364 (1) point a) (ii) and 365 (1) of CRR.

172
040 Previous day VaR (VaRt-1)
Articles 364 (1) point a) (i) and 365 (1) of CRR.
050-
060
Stressed VaR
It means the maximum potential loss that would result from a price change with a given probability over a specified time horizon obtained by using input calibrated to historical data from a continuous 12-months period of financial stress relevant to the institution’s portfolio. 050 Multiplication factor (ms) x Average of previous 60 working days (SVaRavg) Articles 364 (1) point b) (ii) and 365 (1) of CRR. 060 Latest available (SVaRt-1) Articles 364 (1) point b) (i) and 365 (1) of CRR. 070- 080 INCREMENTAL DEFAULT AND MIGRATION RISK CAPITAL CHARGE It means the maximum potential loss that would result from a price change linked to default and migration risks calculated accordingly to Article 364 (2) point b) in connection with Part Three Title IV Chapter 5 Section 4 of CRR. 070 12 weeks average measure
Article 364 (2) point b) (ii) in connection with Part Three Title IV Chapter 5
Section 4 of CRR.
080 Last Measure
Article 364 (2) point b) (i) in connection with Part Three Title IV Chapter 5
Section 4 of CRR.
090-
110
ALL PRICE RISKS CAPITAL CHARGE FOR CTP
090 FLOOR
Article 364 (3) point (c) of CRR.
= 8% of the capital charge that would be calculated in accordance with Article 338 (1) of CRR for all positions in the ‘all price risks’ capital charge. 100- 110 12 WEEKS AVERAGE MEASURE AND LAST MEASURE
Article 364 (3) point (b).
110 LAST MEASURE

173
Article 364 (3) point (a)
120 OWN FUNDS REQUIREMENTS
Referred to in Article 364 of CRR of all risk factors taking into account correlation effects, if applicable, plus incremental default and migration risk and all price of risks for CTP but excluding the Securitization capital charges for Securitization and nth-to-default credit derivative according Article 364 (2) of CRR. 130 TOTAL RISK EXPOSURE AMOUNT
Article 92 (4) lit. b of CRR. Result of the multiplication of the own funds requirements * 12.5.
140 Number of overshootings (during previous 250 working days) Referred to in Article 366 of CRR. The number of overshootings based on which the addend is determined shall be reported. 150- 160 VaR Multiplication Factor (mc) and SVaR Multiplication Factor (ms) As referred to in Article 366 of CRR. 170- 180 ASSUMED CHARGE FOR CTP FLOOR - WEIGHTED NET LONG/ SHORT POSITIONS AFTER CAP The amounts reported and serving as the basis to calculate the floor capital charge for all price risks according to Article 364 (3) point (c) of CRR take into account the discretion of Article 335 of CRR which says that the institution may cap the product of the weight and the net position at the maximum possible default-risk related loss. Rows 010 TOTAL POSITIONS Corresponds to the part of position, foreign exchange and commodities risk referred to in Article 363 (1) of CRR linked to the risk factors specified in Article 367 (2) of CRR. Concerning the columns 030 to 060 (VAR and Stress-VAR) the figures in the total row is not equal to the decomposition of the figures for the VAR/StressVAR of the relevant risk components. Hence the decomposition are memorandum items. 020 TRADED DEBT INSTRUMENTS

174
Corresponds to the part of position risk referred to in 363 (1) of CRR linked to the interest rates risk factors as specified in Article 367 (2) of CRR. 030 TDI – GENERAL RISK General risk defined in Article 362 of CRR. 040 TDI – SPECIFIC RISK Specific risk defined in Article 362 of CRR. 050 EQUITIES Corresponds to the part of position risk referred to in 363 (1) of CRR linked to the equity risk factors as specified in Article 367 (2) of CRR. 060 EQUITIES – GENERAL RISK General risk defined in Article 362 of CRR. 070 EQUITIES – SPECIFIC RISK Specific risk defined in Article 362 of CRR. 080 FOREIGN EXCHANGE RISK Articles 363 (1) and 367 (2) of CRR. 090 COMMODITY RISK Articles 363 (1) and 367 (2) of CRR. 100 TOTAL AMOUNT FOR GENERAL RISK Market risk caused by general market movements of traded debt instruments, equities, foreign exchange and commodities. VAR for general risk of all risk factors (taking into account correlation effects if applicable). 110 TOTAL AMOUNT FOR SPECIFIC RISK Specific risk component of traded debt instruments and equities. VAR for specific risk of equities and traded debt instruments of trading book (taking into account correlation effects if applicable).
5.8. C 25.00 - CREDIT VALUATION ADJUSTMENT RISK (CVA)
5.8.1. Instructions concerning specific positions
Columns
010 Exposure value
Article 271 of CRR in accordance with article 382 of CRR
Total EAD from all transactions subject to CVA charge

175
020 Of which: OTC derivatives
Article 271 of CRR in accordance with article 382 (1) of CRR
The part of the total counterparty credit risk exposure solely due to OTC derivatives. The information is not required from IMM institutions holding OTC derivatives and SFTs in the same netting set 030 Of which: SFT
Article 271 of CRR in accordance with article 382 (2) of CRR
The part of the total counterparty credit risk exposure solely due to SFT derivatives. The information is not required from IMM institutions holding OTC derivatives and SFTs in the same netting set 040 MULTIPLICATION FACTOR (mc) x AVERAGE OF PREVIOUS 60 WORKING DAYS (VaRavg)
Article 383 of CRR in accordance with article 363 (1)(d) of CRR
VaR calculation based on internal models for market risk 050 PREVIOUS DAY (VaRt-1) See instructions referring to column 040 060 MULTIPLICATION FACTOR (ms) x AVERAGE OF PREVIOUS 60 WORKING DAYS (SVaRavg) See instructions referring to column 040 070 LATEST AVAILABLE (SVaRt-1) See instructions referring to column 040 080 OWN FUNDS REQUIREMENTS
Article 92 (3) d) of CRR
Own funds requirements for CVA Risk calculated via the chosen method 090 TOTAL RISK EXPOSURE AMOUNT
Article 92 (4) b) of CRR
Own funds requirements multiplied by 12,5.
Memorandum items
100 Number of counterparties
Article 382 of CRR
Number of counterparties included in calculation of own funds for CVA risk Counterparties are a subset of obligors. They only exist in case of derivatives transactions or SFTs where they are simply the other contracting party.

176
110 Of which: proxy was used to determine credit spread number of counterparties where the credit spread was determined using a proxy instead of directly observed market data 120 INCURRED CVA Accounting provisions due to decreased credit worthiness of derivatives counterparties 130 SINGLE NAME CDS
Article 386 (1) lit. a of CRR
Total notional amounts of single name CDS used as hedge for CVA risk 140 INDEX CDS
Article 386 (1) lit. b) of CRR
Total notional amounts of index CDS used as hedge for CVA risk Rows 010 CVA risk total Sum of rows 020-040 as applicable 020 According to Advanced method Advanced CVA risk method as prescribed by Article 383 of CRR 030 According to Standardised method Standardised CVA risk method as prescribed by Article 384 of CRR 040 Based on OEM Amounts subject to the application of Article 385 of CRR
6. Prudent valuation (PruVal)
6.1. C 32.01 - Prudent Valuation: Fair-Valued Assets and Liabilities (PruVal 1)
6.1.1. General remarks
154a. This template shall be completed by all institutions, whether or not they have adopted the simplified approach for the determination of Additional Valuation Adjustments (‘AVAs’). It is dedicated to the absolute value of fair-valued assets and

177 liabilities used to determine whether or not the conditions set out in Article 4 of Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation for using the simplified approach for the determination of AVAs are met. 154b. With regard to institutions using the simplified approach, this template shall provide the total AVA to be deducted from own funds under Articles 34 and 105 CRR as set out in Article 5 of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation, which shall be reported accordingly in row 290 of C 01.00.
6.1.2. Instructions concerning specific positions
Columns
0010 FAIR-VALUED ASSETS AND LIABILITIES
Absolute value of fair-valued assets and liabilities, as stated in the financial statements under the applicable accounting framework, as referred to in Article 4(1) of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation, before any deduction pursuant to Article 4(2) is performed. 0020 OF WHICH: TRADING BOOK Absolute value of fair-valued assets and liabilities, as reported in 010, corresponding to positions held in the trading book. 0030- 0070 FAIR-VALUED ASSETS AND LIABILITIES EXCLUDED BECAUSE OF PARTIAL IMPACT ON CET1 Absolute value of fair-valued assets and liabilities excluded pursuant to Article 4(2) of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation. 0030 EXACTLY MATCHING Exactly matching, offsetting fair-valued assets and liabilities excluded according to
Article 4(2) of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation.
0040 HEDGE ACCOUNTING
For positions subject to hedge accounting under the applicable accounting framework, absolute value of fair-valued assets and liabilities excluded in proportion to the impact of the relevant valuation change on CET1 capital according to Article 4(2) of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation. 0050 PRUDENTIAL FILTERS Absolute value of fair-valued assets and liabilities excluded according to Article 4(2) of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation due to the transitional filters referred to in Articles 467 and 468 of CRR. 0060 OTHER

178
Any other positions excluded according to Article 4(2) of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation due to adjustments to their accounting value having only a proportional effect on CET1 capital. This row shall only be populated in rare cases where elements excluded pursuant to
Article 4(2) of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation cannot be assigned to columns 0030, 0040 or 0050 of this template.
0070 COMMENT FOR OTHER
The main reasons why the positions reported in column 0060 were excluded shall be provided. 0080 FAIR-VALUED ASSETS AND LIABILITIES INCLUDED IN ART. 4(1) THRESHOLD Absolute value of fair-valued assets and liabilities actually included in the threshold computation in accordance with Article 4(1) of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation. 0090 OF WHICH: TRADING BOOK Absolute value of fair-valued assets and liabilities, as reported in column 0080, corresponding to positions held in the trading book. Rows 0010 – 0210 The definitions of these categories shall match those of the corresponding rows of FINREP templates 1.1 and 1.2. 0010 1 TOTAL FAIR-VALUED ASSETS AND LIABILITIES Total of fair-valued assets and liabilities reported in rows 20 to 210. 0020 1.1 TOTAL FAIR-VALUED ASSETS Total of fair-valued assets reported in rows 0030 to 0140. Relevant cells of rows 0030 to 0130 shall be reported in line with FINREP template F 01.01 of Annexes III and IV to this Regulation depending on the institution’s applicable standards:

IFRS as endorsed by the Union in application of Regulation (EU) 1606/2002
(‘EU IFRS’)
National accounting standards compatible with EU IFRS (‘National GAAP
compatible IFRS’) or
National GAAP based on Directive 86/635/EC, the Bank Accounting Directive
(FINREP ‘National GAAP based on BAD’).
0030 1.1.1 FINANCIAL ASSETS HELD FOR TRADING

179
IFRS 9.Appendix A.
The information reported in this row shall correspond to row 050 of template F
01.01 of Annexes III and IV to this Regulation.
0040 1.1.2 TRADING FINANCIAL ASSETS
BAD Article 32-33; Annex V. Part 1.17.
The information reported in this row shall correspond to row 091 of template F
01.01 of Annexes III and IV to this Regulation.
0050 1.1.3 NON-TRADING FINANCIAL ASSETS MANDATORILY AT FAIR VALUE THROUGH PROFIT OR LOSS IFRS 7.8(a)(ii); IFRS 9.4.1.4. The information reported in this row shall correspond to row 096 of template F
01.01 of Annexes III and IV to this Regulation.
0060 1.1.4 FINANCIAL ASSETS DESIGNATED AT FAIR VALUE THROUGH PROFIT OR LOSS IFRS 7.8(a)(i); IFRS 9.4.1.5; Accounting Directive art 8(1)(a), (6). The information reported in this row shall correspond to row 100 of template F
01.01 of Annexes III and IV to this Regulation.
0070 1.1.5 FINANCIAL ASSETS AT FAIR VALUE THROUGH OTHER COMPREHENSIVE INCOME IFRS 7.8(h); IFRS 9.4.1.2A. The information reported in this row shall correspond to row 141 of template F
01.01 of Annexes III and IV to this Regulation.
0080 1.1.6 NON-TRADING NON-DERIVATIVE FINANCIAL ASSETS MEASURED AT FAIR VALUE THROUGH PROFIT OR LOSS BAD art 36(2). The information reported in this row shall correspond to row 171 of template F
01.01 of Annexes III and IV to this Regulation.
0090 1.1.7 NON-TRADING NON-DERIVATIVE FINANCIAL ASSETS MEASURED AT FAIR VALUE TO EQUITY Accounting Directive art 8(1)(a), (8). The information reported in this row shall correspond to row 175 of template F
01.01 of Annexes III and IV to this Regulation.
0100 1.1.8 OTHER NON-TRADING NON-DERIVATIVE FINANCIAL ASSETS BAD art 37; Accounting Directive Article 12(7); Annex V. Part 1.20.

180
The information reported in this row shall correspond to row 234 of template F
01.01 of Annexes III and IV to this Regulation.
0110 1.1.9 DERIVATIVES - HEDGE ACCOUNTING
IFRS 9.6.2.1; Annex V. Part 1.22; Accounting Directive art 8(1)(a), (6), (8); IAS 39.9; Annex V. Part 1.22. The information reported in this row shall correspond to row 240 of template F
01.01 of Annexes III and IV to this Regulation.
0120 1.1.10 FAIR VALUE CHANGES OF THE HEDGED ITEMS IN PORTFOLIO HEDGE OF INTEREST RATE RISK IAS 39.89A(a); IFRS 9.6.5.8; Accounting Directive art 8(5), (6). The information reported in this row shall correspond to row 250 of template F
01.01 of Annexes III and IV to this Regulation.
0130 1.1.11 INVESTMENTS IN SUBSIDIARIES, JOINT VENTURES AND ASSOCIATES IAS 1.54(e); Annex V. Part 1.21, Part 2.4 ; BAD art 4.Assets(7)-(8); Accounting Directive art 2(2). The information reported in this row shall correspond to row 260 of template F
01.01 of Annexes III and IV to this Regulation.
0140 1.1.12 (-) HAIRCUTS FOR TRADING ASSETS AT FAIR VALUE
Annex V Part 1.29.
The information reported in this row shall correspond to row 375 of template F
01.01 of Annexes III and IV to this Regulation.
0150 1.2 TOTAL FAIR-VALUED LIABILITIES
Total of fair-valued liabilities reported in rows 0160 to 0210.
Relevant cells of rows 0150 to 0190 shall be reported in line with FINREP template F 01.02 of Annexes III and IV to this Regulation depending on the institution’s applicable standards:

IFRS as endorsed by the Union in application of Regulation (EU) 1606/2002
(‘EU IFRS’)
National accounting standards compatible with EU IFRS (‘National GAAP
compatible IFRS’)
or National GAAP based on Directive 86/635/EC, the Bank Accounting Directive (FINREP ‘National GAAP based on BAD’).
0160 1.2.1 FINANCIAL LIABILITIES HELD FOR TRADING IFRS 7.8 (e) (ii); IFRS 9.BA.6.

181
6.2. C 32.02 - Prudent Valuation: Core Approach (PruVal 2)
6.2.1. General remarks
154c. The purpose of this template is to provide information on the composition of the total AVA to be deducted from own funds under Articles 34 and 105 CRR alongside relevant information about the accounting valuation of the positions that give rise to the determination of AVAs. 154d. This template shall be completed by all institutions that:
(a) are required to use the Core approach because they exceed the threshold referred to in Article 4(1) of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation, The information reported in this row shall correspond to row 010 of template F
01.02 of Annexes III and IV to this Regulation.
0170 1.2.2 TRADING FINANCIAL LIABILITIES
Accounting Directive art 8(1)(a),(3),(6).
The information reported in this row shall correspond to row 061 of template F
01.02 of Annexes III and IV to this Regulation.
0180 1.2.3 FINANCIAL LIABILITIES DESIGNATED AT FAIR VALUE THROUGH PROFIT OR LOSS IFRS 7.8 (e)(i); IFRS 9.4.2.2; Accounting Directive art 8(1)(a), (6); IAS 39.9. The information reported in this row shall correspond to row 070 of template F
01.02 of Annexes III and IV to this Regulation.
0190 1.2.4 DERIVATIVES - HEDGE ACCOUNTING
IFRS 9.6.2.1; Annex V. Part 1.26; Accounting Directive art 8(1)(a), (6), (8)(a). The information reported in this row shall correspond to row 150 of template F
01.02 of Annexes III and IV to this Regulation.
0200 1.2.5 FAIR VALUE CHANGES OF THE HEDGED ITEMS IN PORTFOLIO HEDGE OF INTEREST RATE RISK IAS 39.89A(b), IFRS 9.6.5.8; Accounting Directive art 8(5), (6); Annex V. Part 2.8. The information reported in this row shall correspond to row 160 of template F
01.02 of Annexes III and IV to this Regulation.
0210 1.2.6 HAIRCUTS FOR TRADING LIABILITIES AT FAIR VALUE
Annex V Part 1.29
The information reported in this row shall correspond to row 295 of template F
01.02 of Annexes III and IV to this Regulation.

182 either on an individual basis or on a consolidated basis as set out in Article 4(3) the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation or (b) have chosen to apply the Core approach despite not exceeding the threshold. 154e. For the purposes of this template, ‘upside uncertainty’ shall be defined as follows: As determined by Article 8(2) of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation, AVAs are calculated as the difference between the fair value and a prudent valuation that is defined on the basis of a 90% confidence that institutions can exit the exposure at that point or better within the notional range of plausible values. The upside value or ‘upside uncertainty’ is the opposing point in the distribution of plausible values at which institutions are only 10% confident that they can exit the position at that point or better. The upside uncertainty shall be calculated and aggregated on the same basis as the total AVA but substituting a 10% level of certainty for the 90% used when determining the total AVA.
6.2.2. Instructions concerning specific positions
Columns
0010 -
0100
CATEGORY LEVEL AVA
The category level AVAs for market price uncertainty, close-out costs, model risk, concentrated positions, future administrative costs, early termination and operational risk are calculated as described in Articles 9 to 11 and 14 to 17 of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation respectively. For the market price uncertainty, close-out cost and model risk categories, which are subject to diversification benefit as set out under Articles 9(6), 10(7) and 11(7) of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation, respectively, category level AVAs shall be, unless indicated otherwise, reported as the straight sum of the individual AVAs before diversification benefit [since diversification benefits calculated using method 1 or method 2 of the Annex of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation are reported in items 1.1.2, 1.1.2.1 and 1.1.2.2 of the template]. For the market uncertainty, close-out cost and model risk categories, amounts calculated under the expert-based approach as defined in Articles 9(5)(b), 10(6)(b) and 11(4) of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation shall be separately reported in columns 0020, 0040 and 0060. 0010 MARKET PRICE UNCERTAINTY
Article 105(10) CRR.
Market price uncertainty AVAs computed according to Article 9 of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation. 0020 OF WHICH: CALCULATED USING THE EXPERT-BASED APPROACH Market price uncertainty AVAs computed according to Article 9(5)(b) of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation.

183
0030 CLOSE-OUT COSTS
Article 105(10) CRR.
Close-out costs AVAs computed according to Article 10 of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation. 0040 OF WHICH: CALCULATED USING THE EXPERT-BASED APPROACH Close-out costs AVAs computed according to Article 10(6)(b) of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation. 0050 MODEL RISK
Article 105(10) CRR
Model risk AVAs computed according to Article 11 of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation. 0060 OF WHICH: CALCULATED USING THE EXPERT BASED APPROACH Model risk AVAs computed according to Article 11(4) of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation. 0070 CONCENTRATED POSITIONS
Article 105(11) CRR
Concentrated positions AVAs as computed under Article 14 of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation. 0080 FUTURE ADMINISTRATIVE COSTS
Article 105(10) CRR
Future administrative costs AVAs as computed under Article 15 of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation. 0090 EARLY TERMINATION
Article 105(10) CRR
Early termination AVAs as computed under Article 16 of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation. 0100 OPERATIONAL RISK
Article 105(10) CRR
Operational risk AVAs as computed under Article 17 of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation. 0110 TOTAL AVA

184
Row 0010: total AVA to be deducted from own funds under Articles 34 and 105 CRR and reported accordingly in row 290 of C 01.00. The total AVA shall be the sum of rows 0030 and 0180. Row 0020: Share of the total AVA reported in row 0010 stemming from trading book positions (absolute value). Rows 0030 to 0160: Sum of columns 0010, 0030, 0050 and 0070 to 0100. Rows 0180 to 0210: Total AVA stemming from portfolios under the fall-back approach. 0120 UPSIDE UNCERTAINTY
Article 8(2) of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation
The upside uncertainty shall be calculated and aggregated on the same basis as the total AVA computed in column 0110, but substituting a 10% level of certainty for the 90% used when determining the total AVA. 0130 - 0140 FAIR-VALUED ASSETS AND LIABILITIES Absolute value of fair-valued assets and liabilities corresponding to the AVA amounts reported in rows 0010 to 0130 and row 0180. For some rows, in particular rows 0090 to 0130, these amounts may have to be approximated or allocated based on expert judgement. Row 0010: Total absolute value of fair-valued assets and liabilities included in the threshold computation of Article 4(1) of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation. This includes the absolute value of fair-valued assets and liabilities for which AVAs are assessed to have zero value according to Article 9(2), 10(2) or 10(3) of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation, which are also separately reported in rows 0070 and 0080. Row 0010 is the sum of row 0030 and row 0180. Row 0020: share of total absolute value of fair-valued assets and liabilities reported in row 0010 stemming from trading book positions (absolute value). Row 0030: Absolute value of fair-valued assets and liabilities corresponding to the portfolios under Articles 9 to 17 of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation. This includes the absolute value of fair-valued assets and liabilities for which AVAs are assessed to have zero value according to Article 9(2), 10(2) or 10(3) of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation, which are also separately reported in rows 0070 and 0080. Row 0030 shall be the sum of rows 0090 to 0130. Row 0050: Absolute value of fair-valued assets and liabilities included in the scope of the computation of unearned credit spread AVA. For the purpose of the computation of this AVA, exactly matching, offsetting fair-valued assets and liabilities, excluded from the threshold computation in accordance with Article 4(2) of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation, may not be considered exactly matching, offsetting anymore. Row 0060: Absolute value of fair-valued assets and liabilities included in the scope of the computation of investment and funding costs AVA. For the purpose of the

185 computation of this AVA, exactly matching, offsetting fair-valued assets and liabilities, excluded from the threshold computation in accordance with Article 4(2) of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation, may not be considered exactly matching, offsetting anymore. Row 0070: Absolute value of fair-valued assets and liabilities corresponding to the valuation exposures assessed to have zero AVA value under Article 9(2) of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation. Row 0080: Absolute value of fair-valued assets and liabilities corresponding to the valuation exposures assessed to have zero AVA value under Article 10(2) or 10(3) of t the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation. Rows 0090 to 0130: Absolute value of fair-valued assets and liabilities allocated as set out below (see corresponding row instructions) according to the following risk categories: interest rates, foreign exchange, credit, equities, commodities. This includes the absolute value of fair-valued assets and liabilities for which AVAs are assessed to have zero value according to Article 9(2), 10(2) or 10(3) of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation, which are also separately reported in rows 0070 and 0080. Row 0180: Absolute value of fair-valued assets and liabilities corresponding to the portfolios under the fall-back approach 0130 FAIR-VALUED ASSETS Absolute value of fair-valued assets corresponding to the different rows as explained in the instructions on columns 0130-0140 above. 0140 FAIR-VALUED LIABILITIES Absolute value of fair-valued liabilities corresponding to the different rows as explained in the instructions on columns 0130-0140 above. 0150 QTD REVENUE The quarter-to-date revenues (‘QTD revenue’) since the last reporting date attributed to the fair valued assets and liabilities corresponding to the different rows as explained in the instructions on columns 0130-0140 above, where relevant allocated or approximated based on expert judgment. 0160 IPV DIFFERENCE The sum across all positions and risk factors of unadjusted difference amounts (‘IPV difference’) calculated at the month end closest to the reporting date under the independent price verification process performed in accordance with Article 105(8) of CRR, with respect to the best available independent data for the relevant position or risk factor. Unadjusted difference amounts refer to unadjusted differences between the trading system generated valuations and the valuations assessed during the monthly IPV process.

186
No adjusted difference amounts in the books and records of the institution for the relevant month end date shall be included in the calculation of IPV difference. 0170 - 0250 FAIR VALUE ADJUSTMENTS Adjustments, sometimes also referred to as ‘reserves’, potentially applied in the institution’s accounting fair value that are made outside of the valuation model used to generate carrying amounts (excluding Deferral of day one gains and losses) and that can be identified as addressing the same source of valuation uncertainty as the relevant AVA. They could reflect risk factors not captured within the valuation technique, that are in a form of a risk premium or exit cost and are compliant with the definition of Fair value. They should nevertheless be considered by market participants when setting a price. (IFRS 13.9 and IFRS13.88) 0170 MARKET PRICE UNCERTAINTY Adjustment applied in the institution’s fair value to reflect the risk premium arising from the existence of a range of observed prices for equivalent instruments or, in respect of a market parameter input to a valuation model, the instruments from which the input has been calibrated, and thus that can be identified as addressing the same source of valuation uncertainty as the Market price uncertainty AVA. 0180 CLOSE-OUT COSTS Adjustment applied in the institution’s fair value to adjust for the fact that the position level valuations do not reflect an exit price for the position or portfolio, in particular where such valuations are calibrated to a mid-market price, and thus that can be identified as addressing the same source of valuation uncertainty as the Closeout costs AVA. 0190 MODEL RISK Adjustment applied in the institution’s fair value to reflect market or product factors that are not captured by the model used to calculate daily position values and risks (‘valuation model’) or to reflect an appropriate level of prudence given the uncertainty arising from the existence of a range of alternative valid models and model calibrations, and thus that can be identified as addressing the same source of valuation uncertainty as the Model risk AVA. 0200 CONCENTRATED POSITIONS Adjustment applied in the institution’s fair value to reflect the fact that the aggregate position held by the institution is larger than normal traded volume or larger than the position sizes on which observable quotes or trades that are used to calibrate the price or inputs used by the valuation model are based, and thus that can be identified as addressing the same source of valuation uncertainty as the Concentrated positions AVA. 0210 UNEARNED CREDIT SPREADS

187
Adjustment applied in the institution’s fair value to cover expected losses due to counterparty default on derivative positions (i.e. total Credit Valuation Adjustment ‘CVA’ at institution level). 0220 INVESTING AND FUNDING COSTS Adjustment applied in the institution’s fair value to compensate where valuation models do not fully reflect the funding cost that market participants would factor into the exit price for a position or portfolio (i.e. total Funding Valuation Adjustment at institution level where an institution computes such adjustment, or alternatively, equivalent adjustment). 0230 FUTURE ADMINISTRATION COSTS Adjustment applied in the institution’s fair value to reflect administrative costs that are incurred by the portfolio or position but are not reflected in the valuation model or the prices used to calibrate inputs to that model, and thus that can be identified as addressing the same source of valuation uncertainty as the Future administrative costs AVA. 0240 EARLY TERMINATION Adjustments applied in the institution’s fair value to reflect contractual or non-contractual early termination expectations that are not reflected in the valuation model, and thus that can be identified as addressing the same source of valuation uncertainty as the Early termination AVA. 0250 OPERATIONAL RISK Adjustments applied in the institution’s fair value to reflect the risk premium that market participants would charge to compensate for operational risks arising from hedging, administration and settlement of contracts in the portfolio, and thus that can be identified as addressing the same source of valuation uncertainty as the Operational risk AVA. 0260 DAY 1 P&L Adjustments to reflect instances where the valuation model plus all other relevant fair value adjustments applicable to a position or portfolio did not reflect the price paid or received at first day recognition, i.e. the deferral of day one gains and losses (IFRS 9.B5.1.2.A). 0270 EXPLANATION DESCRIPTION Description of the positions treated under Article 7(2)(b) of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation and the reason why it was not possible to apply Articles 9 to 17 thereof. Rows

188
0010 1. TOTAL CORE APPROACH
Article 7(2) of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation
For each relevant category of AVAs referred to in columns 0010 to 0110, total AVAs computed under the Core approach as set out in Chapter 3 of t the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation for fair-valued assets and liabilities included in the threshold computation in accordance with Article 4(1) of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation. This includes the diversification benefits reported in row 0140 in accordance with Articles 9(6), 10(7) and 11(7) of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation. 0020 OF WHICH: TRADING BOOK
Article 7(2) of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation
For each relevant category of AVAs referred to in columns 0010 to 0110, share of total AVAs reported in row 0010 stemming from trading book positions (absolute value). 0030 1.1 PORTFOLIOS UNDER ARTICLES 9 TO 17 - TOTAL CATEGORY LEVEL POST-DIVERSIFICATION
Article 7(2)(a) of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation
For each relevant category of AVAs referred to in columns 0010 to 0110, total AVAs computed according to Articles 9 to 17 of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation for fair-valued assets and liabilities included in the threshold computation in accordance with Article 4(1) of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation, except fair-valued assets and liabilities subject to the treatment described in Article 7(2)(b) of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation. This includes the AVAs computed in accordance with Articles 12 and 13 of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation that are reported in rows 0050 and 0060 and are included in market price uncertainty AVAs, closeout costs AVAs and model risk AVAs as set out in Articles 12(2) and 13(2) of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation. This includes the diversification benefits reported in row 0140 in accordance with Articles 9(6), 10(7) and 11(7) of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation. Row 0030 is therefore expected to be the difference between rows 0040 and 0140. 0040 - 0130
1.1.1 TOTAL CATEGORY LEVEL PRE-DIVERSIFICATION
For rows 0090 to 0130, institutions shall allocate their fair-valued assets and liabilities included in the threshold computation in accordance with Article 4(1) of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation (trading book and non-trading book) according to the following risk categories: interest rates, foreign exchange, credit, equities, commodities.

189
To this end, institutions shall rely on their internal risk management structure and, following a mapping developed based on expert judgement, allocate their business lines or trading desks to the most appropriate risk category. AVAs, Fair Value Adjustments and other required information, which correspond to the allocated business lines or trading desks, shall then be allocated to the same relevant risk category, in order to provide at row level for each risk category a consistent overview of the adjustments performed both for prudential purposes and accounting purposes, as well as an indication of the size of the positions concerned (in terms of fair-valued assets and liabilities). Where AVAs or other adjustments are computed at a different level of aggregation, in particular at firm level, institutions shall develop an allocation methodology of the AVAs to the relevant sets of positions. The allocation methodology shall lead to row 0040 being the sum of rows 0050 to 0130 for columns 0010 to 0100. Regardless of the approach applied, the information reported shall, as much as possible, be consistent at row level, since the information provided will be compared at this level (AVA amounts, upside uncertainty, fair-value amounts and potential fair-value adjustments). The breakdown in rows 0090 to 0130 excludes the AVAs computed in accordance with Articles 12 and 13 of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation that are reported in rows 0050 and 0060 and are included in market price uncertainty AVAs, close-out costs AVAs and model risk AVAs as set out in Articles 12(2) and 13(2) of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation. Diversification benefits are reported in row 0140 in accordance with Articles 9(6), 10(7) and 11(7) of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation and are therefore excluded from rows 0040 to 0130. 0050 OF WHICH: UNEARNED CREDIT SPREADS AVA
Article 105(10) CRR, Article 12 of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on
prudent valuation
The total AVA calculated for unearned credit spreads (‘AVA on CVA’) and its allocation between market price uncertainty, close-out cost or model risk AVAs under Article 12 of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation. Column 0110: The total AVA is given for information only as its allocation between market price uncertainty, close-out cost or model risk AVAs leads to its inclusion – after taking into account diversification benefits – under the respective category level AVAs. Columns 0130 and 0140: Absolute value of fair-valued assets and liabilities included in the scope of the computation of unearned credit spread AVAs. For the purpose of the computation of this AVA, exactly matching, offsetting fair-valued assets and liabilities, excluded from the threshold computation in accordance with
Article 4(2) of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation,
may not be considered exactly matching, offsetting anymore.
0060 OF WHICH: INVESTMENT AND FUNDING COSTS AVA

190
Article 105(10) CRR, Article 17 of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on
prudent valuation
The total AVA calculated for investing and funding costs and its allocation between market price uncertainty, close-out cost or model risk AVAs under Article 13 of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation. Column 0110: The total AVA is given for information only as its allocation between market price uncertainty, close-out cost or model risk AVAs leads to its inclusion – after taking into account diversification benefits – under the respective category level AVAs. Columns 0130 and 0140: Absolute value of fair-valued assets and liabilities included in the scope of the computation of investment and funding costs AVA. For the purpose of the computation of this AVA, exactly matching, offsetting fairvalued assets and liabilities, excluded from the threshold computation in accordance with Article 4(2) of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation, may not be considered exactly matching, offsetting anymore. 0070 OF WHICH: AVA ASSESSED TO HAVE ZERO VALUE UNDER ARTICLE 9(2) Absolute value of fair-valued assets and liabilities corresponding to the valuation exposures assessed to have zero AVA value under Article 9(2) of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation. 0080 OF WHICH: AVA ASSESSED TO HAVE ZERO VALUE UNDER ARTICLE 10(2)&10(3) Absolute value of fair-valued assets and liabilities corresponding to the valuation exposures assessed to have zero AVA value under Article 10(2) or 10(3) of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation. 0090 1.1.1.1 INTEREST RATES 0100 1.1.1.2 FOREIGN EXCHANGE 0110 1.1.1.3 CREDIT 0120 1.1.1.4 EQUITIES 0130 1.1.1.5 COMMODITIES 0140 1.1.2 (-) DIVERSIFICATION BENEFITS Total diversification benefit. Sum of rows 0150 and 0160. 0150 1.1.2.1 (-) DIVERSIFICATION BENEFIT CALCULATED USING METHOD 1

191
For those categories of AVA aggregated under Method 1 in accordance with Articles 9(6), 10(7) and 11(6) of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation, the difference between the sum of the individual AVAs and the total category level AVA after adjusting for aggregation. 0160 1.1.2.2 (-) DIVERSIFICATION BENEFIT CALCULATED USING METHOD 2 For those categories of AVA aggregated under Method 2 in accordance with Articles 9(6), 10(7) and 11(6) of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation, the difference between the sum of the individual AVAs and the total category level AVA after adjusting for aggregation. 0170 1.1.2.2* MEMORANDUM ITEM: PRE-DIVERSIFICATION AVAS REDUCED BY MORE THAN 90% BY DIVERSIFICATION UNDER METHOD 2 In the terminology of Method 2, the sum of FV – PV for all valuation exposures for which APVA < 10% (FV – PV). 0180 1.2 PORTFOLIOS CALCULATED UNDER THE FALL-BACK APPROACH
Article 7(2)(b) of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation
For portfolios subject to the fall-back approach under Article 7(2)(b) of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation, the total AVA shall be computed as a sum of rows 0190, 0200 and 0210. Relevant balance sheet and other contextual information shall be provided in columns 0130 - 0260. A description of the positions and the reason why it was not possible to apply Articles 9 to 17 of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation shall be provided in column 0270. 0190 1.2.1 FALL-BACK APPROACH; 100% UNREALISED PROFIT
Article 7(2)(b)(i) of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation
0200 1.2.2 FALL-BACK APPROACH; 10% NOTIONAL VALUE
Article 7(2)(b)(ii) of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation
0210 1.2.3 FALL-BACK APPROACH; 25% OF INCEPTION VALUE
Article 7(2)(b)(iii) of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation

192
6.3. C 32.03 - Prudent Valuation: Model Risk AVA (PruVal 3)
6.3.1. General remarks
154f. This template is to be completed only by institutions that exceed the threshold referred to in Article 4(1) of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation at their level. Institutions that are part of a group breaching the threshold on a consolidated basis are required to report this template only where they also exceed the threshold at their level. 154g. This template shall be used to report details of the top 20 individual model risk AVAs in terms of AVA amount that contribute to the total category level model risk AVA computed in accordance with Article 11 of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation. This information corresponds to the information reported in column 0050 of template C 32.02. 154h. The top 20 individual model risk AVAs, and corresponding product information, shall be reported in decreasing order starting from the largest individual model risk AVAs. 154i. Products corresponding to these top individual model risk AVAs shall be reported using the product inventory required by Article 19(3)(a) of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation. 154j. Where products are sufficiently homogenous with respect to the valuation model and the model risk AVA, they shall be merged and shown on one line for the purpose of maximising coverage of this template in respect of the total category level Model Risk AVA of the institution.
6.3.2. Instructions concerning specific positions
Columns
0005 RANK
The rank is a row identifier and shall be unique for each row in the table. It shall follow the numerical order 1, 2, 3, etc, with 1 being assigned to the highest individual model risk AVAs, 2 to the second highest and so on. 0010 MODEL Internal name (alpha-numerical) of the model used by the institution to identify the model. 0020 RISK CATEGORY The risk category (interest rates, FX, credit, equities, commodities) that most appropriately characterises the product or group of products that give rise to the model risk valuation adjustment. Institutions shall report the following codes:

193
IR – interest rates
FX – foreign exchange
CR – credit
EQ – equities
CO – commodities
0030 PRODUCT
Internal name (alpha-numerical) for the product or group of products, in line with the product inventory required by Article 19(3)(a) of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation, that is valued using the model. 0040 OBSERVABILITY Number of price observations for the product or group of products in the last twelve months that meet either of the following criteria:

The price observation is a price at which the institution has conducted a transaction
It is a verifiable price for an actual transaction between third parties
The price is obtained from a committed quote.
Institutions shall report one of the following values: ‘none’, ‘1-6’, ‘6-24’, ‘24-100’, ‘100+’. 0050 MODEL RISK AVA
Article 11(1) of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation
Individual model risk AVA before diversification benefit, but after portfolio netting where relevant. 0060 OF WHICH: USING EXPERT-BASED APPROACH Amounts in column 0050 that have been calculated under the expert-based approach as defined in Article 11(4) of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation. 0070 OF WHICH: AGGREGATED USING METHOD 2 Amounts in column 0050 that have been aggregated under Method 2 of Annex to the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation. This corresponds to FV – PV in the terminology of the Annex. 0080 AGGREGATED AVA CALCULATED UNDER METHOD 2 The contribution towards the total category level AVA for model risk, as computed according to Article 11(7) of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation, of individual model risk AVAs that are aggregated using Method 2 of the

194
Annex to the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation. This corresponds to APVA in the terminology of the Annex.
0090 -
0100
FAIR-VALUED ASSETS AND LIABILITIES
Absolute value of fair-valued assets and liabilities valued using the model reported in column 0010 as stated in the financial statements under the applicable framework. 0090 FAIR-VALUED ASSETS Absolute value of fair-valued assets valued using the model reported in column 0010 as stated in the financial statements under the applicable framework. 0100 FAIR-VALUED LIABILITIES Absolute value of fair-valued liabilities valued using the model reported in column 0010 as stated in the financial statements under the applicable framework. 0110 IPV DIFFERENCE (OUTPUT TESTING) The sum of unadjusted difference amounts (‘IPV difference’) calculated at the month end closest to the reporting date under the independent price verification process performed in accordance with Art 105(8) of CRR, with respect to the best available independent data for the corresponding product or group of products. Unadjusted difference amounts refer to unadjusted differences between the trading system generated valuations and the valuations assessed during the monthly IPV process. No adjusted difference amounts in the books and records of the institution for the relevant month end date shall be included in the calculation of IPV difference. Only results that have been calibrated from prices of instruments that would be mapped to the same product (output testing) shall be included here. Input testing results from market data inputs that are tested against levels that have been calibrated from different products shall not be included. 0120 IPV COVERAGE (OUTPUT TESTING) The percentage of those positions mapped to the model weighted by model risk AVA that is covered by the output IPV testing results given in column 0110. 0130 – 0140 FAIR VALUE ADJUSTMENTS Fair Value adjustments as defined in columns 0190 and 0240 of template C 32.02 that have been applied to the positions mapped to the model in column 0010. 0150 DAY 1 P&L Adjustments as defined in column 0260 of template C 32.02 that have been applied to the positions mapped to the model in column 0010.

195
6.4 C 32.04 - Prudent Valuation: Concentrated positions AVA (PruVal 4)
6.4.1. General remarks
154k. This template shall be completed only by institutions that exceed the threshold referred to in Article 4(1) of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation at their level. Institutions that are part of a group breaching the threshold on a consolidated basis shall report this template only where they also exceed the threshold at their level. 154l. This template shall be used to report details of the top 20 individual concentrated positions AVAs in terms of AVA amount that contribute to the total category level concentrated positions AVA computed in accordance with Article 14 of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation. This information shall correspond to the information reported in column 0070 of template C 32.02. 154m. The top 20 concentrated positions AVAs, and corresponding product information, shall be reported in decreasing order starting from the largest individual concentrated positions AVAs. 154n. Products corresponding to these top individual concentrated positions AVAs shall be reported using the product inventory required by Article 19(3)(a) of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation. 154o. Positions that are homogenous in terms of AVA calculation methodology shall be aggregated where this is possible in order to maximise the coverage of this template.
6.4.2. Instructions concerning specific positions
Columns
0005 RANK
The rank is a row identifier and shall be unique for each row in the table. It shall follow the numerical order 1, 2, 3, etc, with 1 being assigned to the highest concentrated positions AVAs, 2 to the second highest and so on. 0010 RISK CATEGORY The risk category (interest rates, FX, credit, equities, commodities) that most appropriately characterises the position. Institutions shall report the following codes:
IR – Interest Rates
FX – Foreign exchange
CR – Credit
EQ – Equities
CO – Commodities

196
0020 PRODUCT
Internal name for the product or group of products in line with the product inventory required by Article 19(3)(a) of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation. 0030 UNDERLYING Internal name of the underlying, or underlyings, in the case of derivatives or of the instruments in the case of non-derivatives. 0040 CONCENTRATED POSITION SIZE Size of the individual concentrated valuation position identified according to Article 14(1)(a) of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation, expressed in the unit described in column 0050. 0050 SIZE MEASURE Unit of size measure used internally as part of the identification of the concentrated valuation position to compute the concentrated position size referred in column 0040. In the case of positions in bonds or equity, please report the unit used for internal risk management, such as ‘number of bonds’, ‘number of shares’ or ‘market value’. In the case of position in derivatives, please report the unit used for internal risk management, such as ‘PV01; EUR per 1 basis point parallel yield curve shift’. 0060 MARKET VALUE Market value of the position. 0070 PRUDENT EXIT PERIOD The prudent exit period in number of days estimated under Art 14(1)(b) of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation. 0080 CONCENTRATED POSITIONS AVA The concentrated positions AVA amount calculated according to Article 14(1) of the Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101 on prudent valuation for the individual concentrated valuation position concerned. 0090 CONCENTRATED POSITION FAIR VALUE ADJUSTMENT The amount of any fair value adjustments taken to reflect the fact that the aggregate position held by the institution is larger than the normal traded volume or larger than position sizes and on which quotes or trades, which are used to calibrate the price or inputs used by the valuation model, are based. The amount reported shall correspond to the amount that has been applied to the individual concentrated valuation position concerned.

197
0100 IPV DIFFERENCE
The sum of unadjusted difference amounts (‘IPV difference’) calculated at the month end closest to the reporting date under the independent price verification process performed in accordance with Art 105(8) of CRR, with respect to the best available independent data for the individual concentrated valuation position concerned. Unadjusted difference amounts shall refer to unadjusted differences between the valuations generated by the trading system and the valuations assessed during the monthly IPV process. No adjusted difference amounts in the books and records of the institution for the relevant month end date shall be included in the calculation of IPV difference.
7. C 33.00 - Exposures to General governments (GOV)
7.1. General remarks
155.The information for the purpose of template C 33.00 shall cover all exposures to ‘General governments’ as defined in paragraph 42 (b) of Annex V. 156.Exposures to ‘General governments’ are included in different exposure classes in accordance with Article 112 and Article 147 of CRR, as specified by the instructions for the completion of template C 07.00, C 08.01 and C 08.02. 157.Table 2 (Standardised approach) and Table 3 (IRB approach), included in Part 3 of Annex 5, shall be observed for the mapping of exposure classes used to calculate capital requirements under CRR to counterparty sector ‘General governments’. 158.Information shall be reported for the total aggregate exposures (meaning the sum of all countries in which the bank has sovereign exposures) and for each country on the basis of the residence of the counterparty on an immediate borrower basis. 159.The allocation of exposures to exposure classes or jurisdictions shall be made without considering credit mitigation techniques and in particular without considering substitution effects. However the calculation of exposure values and risk weighted exposure amounts for each exposure class and each jurisdiction includes the incidence of credit risk mitigation techniques, including substitution effects. 160.The reporting of information on exposures to ‘General governments’ by jurisdiction of residence of the immediate counterparty other than the domestic jurisdiction of the reporting institution is subject to the thresholds in Article 5 (b) point 3 of this Regulation.
7.2. Scope of the template on exposures to “General governments”
161.The scope of the GOV template covers on, off-balance sheet and derivatives direct exposures to “General governments” in the banking and trading book. In addition

198 a memorandum item on indirect exposures in the form of credit derivatives sold on general government exposures is also requested. 162.An exposure is a direct exposure when the immediate counterparty is an entity covered by the definition of ‘General governments’. 163.The template is divided in two sections. The first one is based on a breakdown of exposures by risk, regulatory approach and exposure classes whereas a second one is based on a breakdown by residual maturity
7.3. Instructions concerning specific positions
Columns Instructions
010-260 DIRECT EXPOSURES
010-140 ON-BALANCE SHEET EXPOSURES
010 Total gross carrying amount of non-derivative financial assets Aggregate of gross carrying amount, as determined in accordance with paragraph 34 in
Annex V, Part 1, of non-derivative financial assets to General governments, for all accounting portfolios under IFRS or national GAAP based on Directive 86/635/EEC
(Bank Accounting Directive, ‘BAD’) defined in paragraphs 15 to 22 in Annex V, Part 1 and listed in columns 030 to 120. Prudent valuation adjustments shall not reduce the gross carrying amount of trading and non-trading exposures measured at fair value. 020 Total carrying amount of non-derivative financial assets (net of short positions) Aggregate of the carrying amount, in accordance with paragraph 27 in Annex V, Part 1, of non-derivative financial assets to General governments for all accounting portfolios under IFRS or national GAAP based on BAD defined in paragraphs 15 to 22 in Annex V, Part 1 and listed in columns 030 to 120, net of short positions. When the institution has a short position for the same residual maturity, the same immediate counterparty that is denominated in the same currency, the carrying amount of the short position shall be netted against the carrying amount of the direct position. This net amount shall be considered as zero when it is a negative amount. The sum of the columns 030 to 120 minus column 130 must be reported. If this amount is lower than zero, the amount to be reported shall be zero. 030-120 NON-DERIVATIVE FINANCIAL ASSETS BY ACCOUNTING PORTFOLIOS Aggregate carrying amount of non-derivative financial assets, as defined above, to General governments by accounting portfolio under the applicable accounting framework. 030 Financial assets held for trading IFRS 7.8(a)(ii); IFRS 9 Appendix A

199
040 Trading financial assets
BAD Articles 32-33; Annex V. Part 1.16; Accounting Directive Article 8(1)(a) Only to be reported by institutions under national Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP). 050 Non-trading financial assets mandatorily at fair value through profit or loss IFRS 7.8(a)(ii); IFRS 9.4.1.4 060 Financial assets designated at fair value through profit or loss IFRS 7.8(a)(i); IFRS 9.4.1.5 and Accounting Directive Article 8(1)(a), (6) 070 Non-trading non-derivative financial assets measured at fair value through profit or loss BAD Article 36(2); Accounting Directive Article 8(1)(a) Only to be reported by institutions under national Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP). 080 Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income IFRS 7.8(d); IFRS 9.4.1.2A 090 Non-trading non-derivative financial assets measured at fair value to equity Accounting Directive Article 8(1)(a), (8) Only to be reported by institutions under national Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP). 100 Financial assets at amortised cost IFRS 7.8(f); IFRS 9.4.1.2; Annex V. Part 1.15 110 Non-trading non-derivative financial assets measured at a cost-based method BAD Article 35; Accounting Directive Article 6(1)(i) and Article 8(2); Annex V. Part 1.16 Only to be reported by institutions under national Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP). 120 Other non-trading non-derivative financial assets BAD Article 37; Accounting Directive Article 12(7); Annex V. Part 1.16

200
Only to be reported by institutions under national Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP). 130 Short positions Carrying amount of short positions, as defined in IFRS 9 BA.7(b) when the direct counterparty is a General government as defined in paragraph 1. Short positions arise when the institution sells securities acquired in a reverse repurchase loan, or borrowed in a securities lending transaction, which direct counterparty is a General government. The carrying amount is the fair value of the short positions. Short positions must be reported by residual maturity bucket, as defined in row 170 to 230, and by immediate counterparty. Short positions will be then used for netting with positions for the same residual maturity and immediate counterparty for the computation of columns 030 to 120. 140 Of which: Short positions from reverse repurchased loans classified as held for trading or trading financial assets Carrying amount of short positions, as defined in IFRS 9 BA.7(b), that arise when the institution sells the securities acquired in reverse repurchase loans, which direct counterparty is a General government, that are included in the held for trading or trading financial assets accounting portfolios (columns 030 or 040). Short positions that arise when the sold securities were borrowed in a securities lending transition shall not be included in this column. 150 Accumulated impairment Aggregate accumulated impairment related to non-derivative financial assets reported in columns 080 to 120. [Annex V, Part 2, paragraphs 70 and 71] 160 Accumulated impairment - of which: from financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income or from non-trading non-derivative financial assets measured at fair value to equity Aggregate of accumulated impairment related to non-derivative financial assets reported in columns 080 and 090. 170 Accumulated negative changes in fair value due to credit risk Aggregate of accumulated negative changes in fair value due to credit risk related to positions informed in columns 050, 060, 070, 080 and 090. [Annex V, Part 2, paragraph 69] 180 Accumulated negative changes in fair value due to credit risk - of which: from nontrading financial assets mandatorily at fair value through profit or loss, financial

201 assets designated at fair value through profit or loss or from non-trading financial assets measured at fair value through profit or loss Aggregate of accumulated negative changes in fair value due to credit risk related to positions informed in columns 050, 060 and 070. 190 Accumulated negative changes in fair value due to credit risk - of which: from financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income or from non-trading non-derivative financial assets measured at fair value to equity Aggregate of accumulated negative changes in fair value due to credit risk related to positions informed in columns 080 and 090. 200-230 DERIVATIVES Direct derivative positions are to be reported in columns 200 to 230. For the reporting of derivatives subject to both counterparty credit risk and market risk capital charges see instructions for the row breakdown. 200-210 Derivatives with positive fair value All derivative instruments with a General government counterparty with a positive fair value for the institution at the reporting date, regardless of whether they are used in a qualifying hedging relationship, are held for trading or are included in the trading portfolio under IFRS and national GAAP based on BAD. Derivatives used in economic hedging shall be reported here when they are included in the trading or held for trading accounting portfolios (Annex V, Part 2, paragraphs 120, 124, 125 and 137 to 140). 200 Derivatives with positive fair value: Carrying amount Carrying amount of the derivatives accounted for as financial assets at the reporting reference date. Under GAAP based on BAD, derivatives to be reported in these columns include the derivative instruments measured at cost or at the lower of cost or market included in the trading portfolio or designated as hedging instruments. 210 Derivatives with positive fair value: Notional amount Under IFRS and national GAAP based on BAD, notional amount, as defined in Annex V, Part 2, paragraphs 133 to 135, of all derivative contracts concluded and not yet settled at the reporting reference date whose counterparty is a General government, as defined above in paragraph 1, when its fair value is positive for the institution at the reporting reference date. 220-230 Derivatives with negative fair value

202
All derivative instruments with a General government counterparty with a negative fair value for the institution at the reporting reference date, regardless of whether they are used in a qualifying hedging relationship or are held for trading or included in the trading portfolio under IFRS and national GAAP based on BAD. Derivatives used in economic hedging shall be reported here when they are included in the trading or held for trading accounting portfolios (Annex V, Part 2, paragraphs 120, 124, 125 and 137 to 140). 220 Derivatives with negative fair value: Carrying amount Carrying amount of the derivatives accounted for as financial liabilities at the reporting reference date. Under GAAP based on BAD, derivatives to be reported in these columns include the derivative instruments measured at cost or at the lower of cost or market included in the trading portfolio or designated as hedging instruments. 230 Derivatives with negative fair value: Notional amount Under IFRS and national GAAP based on BAD, notional amount, as defined in Annex V, Part 2, paragraphs 133 to 135, of all derivative contracts concluded and not yet settled at the reference date whose counterparty is a General government, as defined above in paragraph 1, when its fair value is negative for the institution. 240-260 OFF-BALANCE SHEET EXPOSURES 240 Nominal amount When the direct counterparty of the off-balance sheet item is a General government as defined above in paragraph 1, nominal amount of the commitments and financial guarantees that are not considered as a derivative in accordance with IFRS or under national GAAP based on BAD (Annex V, Part 2, paragraphs 102-119). In accordance with Annex V, Part 1, paragraphs 43 and 44, the General government is the direct counterparty: (a) in a financial guarantee given, when it is the direct counterparty of the guaranteed debt instrument, and (b) in a loan commitment and other commitment given, when it is the counterparty whose credit risk is assumed by the reporting institution. 250 Provisions BAD Article 4 Liabilities (6)(c ), Off balance sheet items, Article 27(11), Article 28(8),
Article 33; IFRS 9.4.2.1(c)(ii),(d)(ii), 9.5.5.20;IAS 37, IFRS 4, Annex V Part 2.11.
Provisions on all off-balance sheet exposures regardless how they are measured except those that are measured at fair value through profit or loss in accordance with IFRS 9. Under IFRS, the impairment of a loan commitment given shall be reported in column 150 when the institution cannot separately identify the expected credit losses related to the drawn and undrawn amount of the debt instrument. In case the combined expected

203 credit losses for that financial instrument exceed the gross carrying amount of the loan component of the instrument, the remaining balance of the expected credit losses shall be reported as a provision in column 250. 260 Accumulated negative changes in fair value due to credit risk For off-balance sheet items measured at fair value through profit or loss under IFRS 9, accumulated negative changes in fair value due to credit risk (Annex V, Part 2, paragraph110) 270-280 Memorandum item: credit derivatives sold on general government exposures Credit derivatives that do not meet the definition of financial guarantees that the reporting institution has underwritten with counterparties other than General governments and whose reference exposure is a General government must be reported. These columns will not be reported for exposures broken down by risk, regulatory approach and exposure class (rows 020 to 160). The exposures reported in the section are not to be considered in the computation of exposure Value and Risk weighted amount (columns 290 and 300) which is based solely on direct exposures. 270 Derivatives with positive fair value - Carrying amount Aggregated carrying amount of the credit derivatives sold on general government exposures reported which have a positive fair value for the institution at the reference reporting date, without considering prudent valuation adjustments. For derivatives under IFRS, the amount to be reported in this column is the carrying amount of the derivatives that are financial assets at the reporting date. For derivatives under GAAP based on BAD, the amount to be reported in this column is the fair value of the derivatives with a positive fair value at the reference reporting date, independently how they are accounted for. 280 Derivatives with negative fair value - Carrying amount Aggregated carrying amount of the credit derivatives sold on general government exposures reported which have a negative fair value for the institution at the reference reporting date, without considering prudent valuation adjustments. For derivatives under IFRS, the amount to be reported in this column is the carrying amount of the derivatives that are financial liabilities at the reporting date. For derivatives under GAAP based on BAD, the amount to be reported in this column is the fair value of the derivatives with a negative fair value at the reference reporting date, independently how they are accounted for. 290 Exposure value

204
Exposure value for exposures subject to the credit risk framework.
For exposures under the Standardised Approach (SA): see Article 111 of CRR. For exposures under the IRB approach: see Article 166 and Article 230 (1) sentence 2 of CRR. For the reporting of derivatives subject to both counterparty credit risk and market risk capital charges see instructions for the row breakdown. 300 Risk weighted exposure amount Risk weighted exposure amount for exposures subject to the credit risk framework. For exposures under the Standardised Approach (SA): see Article 113 (1) to (5) of CRR. For exposures under the IRB approach: see Article 153 (1) and (3) of CRR. For the reporting of direct exposures within the scope of Article 271 CRR subject to own funds requirements for both counterparty credit risk and market risk, see instructions for the row breakdown. Rows Instructions BREAKDOWN OF EXPOSURES BY REGULATORY APPROACH 010 Total exposures Aggregate of exposures to General governments, as defined in paragraph 1 020-155 Exposures under the credit risk framework Aggregate of exposures to General governments that shall be risk-weighted in accordance with Part Three, Title II CRR. Exposures under the credit risk framework include exposures from both the non-trading book and the trading book subject to a capital charge for counterparty credit risk. Direct exposures within the scope of Article 271 CRR subject to own funds requirements for both counterparty credit risk and market risk shall be reported both in the credit risk rows (020 to 155) and the market risk row (row 160): the exposures due to counterparty credit risk shall be reported in the credit risk rows, while the exposures due to market risk shall be reported in the market risk row. 030 Standardised Approach Exposures to General governments that shall be risk-weighted in accordance with Part Three, Title II, Chapter 2 CRR, including exposures from the non-trading book for which the risk-weighting in accordance with that Chapter addresses counterparty credit risk. 040 Central governments

205
Exposures to General governments that are central governments. These exposures are allocated to the “Central governments or central banks” exposure class in accordance with Articles 112 and 114 CRR, as specified by the instructions for template C 07.00, with the exception of the specifications as regards the redistribution of exposures to General governments to other exposure classes due to the application of credit risk mitigation techniques with substitution effects on the exposure, which shall not apply. 050 Regional governments or local authorities Exposures to General governments that are regional governments or local authorities. These exposures are allocated to the “Regional governments or local authorities” exposure class in accordance with Articles 112 and 115 CRR, as specified by the instructions for template C 07.00, with the exception of the specifications as regards the redistribution of exposures to General governments to other exposure classes due to the application of credit risk mitigation techniques with substitution effects on the exposure, which shall not apply. 060 Public sector entities Exposures to General governments that are public sector entities. These exposures are allocated to the “Public sector entities” exposure class in accordance with Articles 112 and 116 CRR, as specified by the instructions for template C 07.00, with the exception of the specifications as regards the redistribution of exposures to General governments to other exposure classes due to the application of credit risk mitigation techniques with substitution effects on the exposure, which shall not apply. 070 International Organisations Exposures to General governments that are international organisations. These exposures are allocated to the “International Organisations” exposure classes in accordance with Articles 112 and 118 CRR, as specified by the instructions for template C 07.00, with the exception of the specifications as regards the redistribution of exposures to General governments to other exposure classes due to the application of credit risk mitigation techniques with substitution effects on the exposure, which shall not apply. 075 Other general government exposures subject to Standardised Approach Exposures to General governments other than those included in rows 040 to 070 above, which are allocated to SA exposure classes in accordance with Article 112 CRR for the purposes of calculating own funds requirements. 080 IRB Approach Exposures to General governments that shall be risk-weighted in accordance with Part Three, Title II, Chapter 3 CRR, including exposures from the non-trading book for which the risk-weighting in accordance with that Chapter addresses counterparty credit risk. 090 Central governments

206
Exposures to General governments that are central governments and that are allocated to the “Central governments and central banks” exposure class in accordance with Article 147(3)(a) CRR, as specified by the instructions for template C 08.01 and C 08.02, with the exception of the specifications as regards the redistribution of exposures to General governments to other exposure classes due to the application of credit risk mitigation techniques with substitution effects on the exposure, which shall not apply.. 100 Regional governments or local authorities [Central governments and central banks] Exposures to General governments that are regional governments or local authorities and that are allocated to the “Central governments and central banks” exposure class in accordance with Article 147(3)(a) CRR, as specified by the instructions for template C
08.01 and C 08.02, with the exception of the specifications as regards the redistribution
of exposures to General governments to other exposure classes due to the application of credit risk mitigation techniques with substitution effects on the exposure, which shall not apply. 110 Regional governments or local authorities [Institutions] Exposures to General governments that are regional governments or local authorities and that are allocated to the “Institutions” exposure class in accordance with Article 147(4)(a) CRR, as specified by the instructions for template C 08.01 and C 08.02, with the exception of the specifications as regards the redistribution of exposures to General governments to other exposure classes due to the application of credit risk mitigation techniques with substitution effects on the exposure, which shall not apply. 120 Public sector entities [Central governments and central banks] Exposures to General governments that are public sector entities in accordance with Article 4(8) CRR and that are allocated to the “Central governments and central banks” exposure class in accordance with Article 147(3)(a) CRR, as specified by the instructions for template C 08.01 and C 08.02, with the exception of the specifications as regards the redistribution of exposures to General governments to other exposure classes due to the application of credit risk mitigation techniques with substitution effects on the exposure, which shall not apply. 130 Public sector entities [Institutions] Exposures to General governments that are public sector entities in accordance with Article 4(8) CRR and that are allocated to the “Institutions” exposure class in accordance with Article 147(4)(b) CRR, as specified by the instructions for template C 08.01 and C 08.02, with the exception of the specifications as regards the redistribution of exposures to General governments to other exposure classes due to the application of credit risk mitigation techniques with substitution effects on the exposure, which shall not apply. 140 International Organisations [Central governments and central banks] Exposures to General governments that are International Organisations and that are allocated to the “Central governments and central banks” exposure class in accordance with
Article 147(3)(c) CRR, as specified by the instructions for template C 08.01 and C 08.02,

207 with the exception of the specifications as regards the redistribution of exposures to General governments to other exposure classes due to the application of credit risk mitigation techniques with substitution effects on the exposure, which shall not apply. 155 Other general government exposures subject to IRB approach Exposures to General governments other than those included in rows 090 to 140 above which are allocated to IRB exposure classes in accordance with Article 147 CRR for the purposes of calculating own funds requirements. 160 Exposures subject to market risk Market risk exposures cover positions for which own funds requirements are calculated according to Title IV of Part Three CRR. Direct exposures within the scope of Article 271 CRR subject to own funds requirements for both counterparty credit risk and market risk shall be reported both in the credit risk rows (020 to 155) and the market risk row (row 160): the exposure due to counterparty credit risk shall be reported in the credit risk rows, while the exposure due to market risk shall be reported in the market risk row. 170-230 BREAKDOWN OF EXPOSURES BY RESIDUAL MATURITY Residual maturity shall be computed in days between the contractual date of maturity and the reporting reference date for all positions. Exposures to General governments shall be broken-down by residual maturity and allocated to the buckets provided as follows:

[ 0 - 3M [ : Less than 90 days
[ 3M - 1Y [ : Equal or greater than 90 days and less than 365 days
[ 1Y – 2Y [ : Equal or greater than 365 days and less than 730 days
[ 2Y – 3Y [ : Equal or greater than 730 days and less than 1,095 days
[ 3Y – 5Y [ : Equal or greater than 1,095 days and less than 1,825 days
[ 5Y – 10Y [ : Equal or greater than 1,825 days and less than 3,650 days
[ 10Y – more : Equal or greater than 3,650 days

Lineage: No known changes

Similar documents from other regulators